Integral As1000

HOME
A to D INDEX
PRODUCT INDEX
Introduction
Alphabetical index of products, brief system description, functioning the RS controllers
INTEGRAL RSM
02
INTEGRAL AS1000 Technical manual
NRUA/A, NRUB/A, NRUC/A and NRUD/A card controllers / NMIDK multiplexer / NTIM, NTOM, NTOMS terminal module carriers / NK.. terminal modules
03
INTEGRAL RSC
NRUE/A, NRUF/A, NRD24/A compact controllers
INTEGRAL RSA
04
Safety and conditions of use Your attention isdravn to the conditions of use and safety notes which follow.
NRK16/A, NRK16-B/A, and NRK9/A / application controllers / NSA application module
Operation and service
05
NBRN.. and NBE communicating operator terminals / INTEGRAL DIALOG service software / NON-communicating room operating units
06
Adapter
NA.. adapters / NTIO single module carrier / NMID multiplexer
07
Interfaces
NIPRO and NITEL.. interface modules / NICO (brief description)
08
SAPIM basic functions

Brief description
Installation instructions EMC / Cable routing
09
Electronmagnetic compatibility (EMC) Principles and control panel guidelines
10
Installation instructions Mounting

Mounting the components
11
Installation instructions AS1000 conneciton

Transformer sizing / INTEGRAL AS1000 connection
Commissioning
12
K21
K21 / en / 97-01 Subject to technical alteration
Control panels / Equipment tests Control and interlock system / NITEL for INTEGRAL DIALOG
13
Accessories
Type Z.. accessories
Landis & Gyr (Europe) AG Gubelstrasse 22 CH-6301 Zug Tel. 041 724 11 24 Fax 041 724 35 22 Staefa Control System AG CH-8712 Stfa Tel. 01 928 61 11 Fax 01 928 67 11
Members of the Electrowatt Group
INTEGRAL AS1000 Safety and conditions of use
K21-00.01
1/2 en - 97 - 01
General safety notes

Compliance with the safety notes in this manual
A basic prerequisite for the safe use of the products described in this manual is an awareness of the general and product-specific safety guidelines. General notes on safety are printed below. Additional product-specific notes will be found in the product data sheets. Local health and safety regulations, i.e. those applicable to the site where the equipment is installed, must be observed.
Risks associated with handling the products

Landis & Staefa products meet all the relevant regulations pertaining to their circulation, especially those associated with basic health and safety requirements. Nevertheless, misuse or carelessness could result in injury to, or loss of life of the user or a third party, or cause damage to the plant or other property. To avoid danger and damage, the products must be used only: for the purpose for which they are intended in perfect condition in terms of electrical safety by persons adequately qualified to perform the task concerned. Any fault or intereference which compromises safety must be eliminated without delay.
Use for the purpose intended

Unless otherwise stated on the data sheet, the products described in this manual are for use only in conjunction with domestic water, heating, ventilation, air conditioning and refrigeration systems. Refer to the data sheets for information on additional applications and restrictions in use. Written approval must be obtained from Landis & Staefa for the use of products in applications outside or beyond those described above. Use for the purpose intended includes observance of all other engineering notes in this manual, including the technical data sheets, and compliance with the instructions for installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance.
Subject to technical alteration
INTEGRAL AS1000 Safety and conditions of use Maintenance
K21-00.01
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Landis & Staefa products are noted for their mechanical and electrical operational reliability. The maintenance of individual components is required only in exceptional circumstances. In such cases, the relevant instructions on the data sheet should be followed. The interaction of numerous different hardware and software components within a system increases the possibility of impaired functioning. Further, the possibility of faults caused by external influences (water, damage to cables etc.) cannot be excluded. In systems where failure can lead to consequential damage, it is recommended that the control and interlock functions of the system and the associated monitoring arrangements should be checked at regular intervals. Landis & Staefa offers a modular service package for this purpose.
Warnings
This manual includes three categories of notes to which special attention should be paid. These normally appear in the left margin, in bold type. Important A failure to observe information under this heading could lead to malfunctioning of the equipment. 9 Caution A failure to observe information under this heading could result in hardware damage or serious program errors. 9 Danger A failure to observe information under this heading could endanger personal safety. The danger symbol printed on some products refers to the possibility of hazardous electrical voltage. Special care is required when installing these products.
Guarantee and liability

In principle, the "General Conditions of Sale" of Landis & Staefa apply. Guarantee and liability claims arising from injury or damage are excluded if they are attributable to one or more of the following: Inappropriate use of the product Use of the products or system with faulty or non-existent safety arrangements Unauthorised modification of the products Failure to comply with the maintenance instructions set out Inadequate monitoring of components exposed to wear Unauthorised repairs Circumstances beyond the immediate control of Landis & Staefa
INTEGRAL AS1000 Safety and conditions of use
K21-00.02
1/2 en - 97 - 01
About this manual

Purpose of this document
Manual K21 contains the information required for the design, engineering, installation and commissioning of the stand-alone control and interlock system, INTEGRAL AS1000.
Target readership
The manual is written for consulting engineers, project engineers, system contractors and their qualified personnel. It assumes an adequate theoretical and practical knowledge of control engineering.
Associated documentation
K21, the technical manual, is one of the K.. series of documents describing the stand-alone control and interlock system. The series includes the following other documentation:
No. M3 Type User manual INTEGRAL PLAN engineering tool User manual INTEGRAL DIALOG service software System description Technical manual Contents Structuring and programming of the RS controllers PC-operation of the RS controllers PC-operation of the pronto interface Description of INTEGRAL AS1000 Hardware description Brief software description Installation Commissioning Operation of the RS controllers Operation of the pronto interface PC operation of the RS controller
K8
K11 K21
K23 M5
User manual NBRN.. operator terminals User manual INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE
Where INTEGRAL AS1000 is used in conjunction with other Staefa systems, reference should be made to the following additional documentation:
System INTEGRAL MS2000 building management system INTEGRAL TS1500 remote buildings management system INTEGRAL MS1000 in-house management system PRONTO IRC individual room control system Document series E... T.. N.. P..
Peripheral devices which are not part of the INTEGRAL AS1000 range are detailed in the corresponding data sheets. See K21-01.10, page 1 for a system overview.
INTEGRAL AS1000 Safety and conditions of use Layout
K21-00.02
2/2 en - 97 - 01
The brief description in Section 01 provides a general view of the functions and scope of INTEGRAL AS1000 and describes the individual components. These are described in detail in Sections 02 to 07. The remaining sections of the manual contain descriptions of software, installation and commissioning, and details of the options for operation and service. Installation instructions Sections 09 to 11 contain information on control panel construction, and instructions on mounting and connecting the controllers and the peripheral devices.
Data sheet numbering

The complete page-numbering format comprises the sheet reference, page number, language code and the valid issue date. Example:
K21-05.10 K... series of documents, Manual 21, Section 05, Sheet 10

1/2 Page 1 of 2 en - 95 - 06 English language, date of issue June 1995
Validity
The validity of the data sheets in this manual is defined by the date of issue shown at the top of the page. New information and significant amendments will be issued in the form of replacement sheets, marked with a new date.
Layout conventions
Style Standard abbreviations are used. Range names, information requiring emphasis and cross-references are printed in italics. Notes and comments The left margin generally contains supplementary information and diagrams, and in bold type warnings (see 'General safety notes', page 2).
K21-01
Introduction
INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction / Description of operation
K21-01.01
1/1 en - 97 - 01
Contents
Alphabetical index of products .................................................................. 01.10 Introduction Brief system description .............................................................................. 01.20 Operation of the RS controllers Principle of operation of the RS controller ............................................... 01.30 RS controller block diagram ....................................................................... 01.40 Handling of process variables .................................................................... 01.50 Description of the operating system ......................................................... 01.60 Communication / RS bus ............................................................................. 01.70
INTEGRAL AS1000 K21 alphabetical product index

Type code NABBS/A NARB/A NARC NARS NATU NBE NBRN-.. NBRNA-.. NHGB NICO NIPRO NITEL.. NKDG NKDW NKIA NKIAI NKIAU NKIAV.. NKIAVN NKIC NKID NKIDH NKIDP NKIDP/8 NKIDPH NKIT NKOAI NKOAS NKOASA NKOASH NKOAU NKOD NKODH NKOK NKOKFH NMID NMIDK NRD24/A NRK9/A NRK14-T../A NRK16-B/A NRK16-B1/A NRK16-T../A NRK16/A NRUA/A NRUB/A NRUC/A NRUD/A NRUE/A NRUF/A NRUT../A NSA NTIM NTIO NTIOS Item RS bus adapter with power supply RS bus adapter RS bus adapter with interface converter Supply voltage adapter Adapter for special signals Remote operator terminal Hand-held operator terminal Hand-held operator terminal Card-frame MS2000 interface pronto interface Communications module Transducer module for DC 0 ...10 V signals (DC 15 V) Transducer module for DC 0 ...10 V signals (AC 24 V) Input module for DC 0 ...10 V signals (AC 24 V) Input module for 0 (4) ... 20 mA signals, with electrical isolation Input module for DC 0 ...10 V signals, with electrical isolation Input modules for Pt100 sensors Input module for Landis & Staefa Ni1000 sensors Input module for pulse counting Input module for digital signals as NKID, but with manual switch Input module for digital signals from volt-free contacts Input module for 8 digital signals from volt-free contacts as NKIDP, but with manual switch Input module with trimmer for T1 sensors Output module for 0 (4) ... 20 mA signals, with electrical isolation Output module for DC 0 ...10 V signals as NKOAS, but without hard-wired interlock as NKOAS, but with manual switch Output module for DC 0 ...10 V signals, with electrical isolation Output relay module as NKOD, but with manual switch Output module for 3-point signals Output module for 3-point signals, with manual switch Multiplexer, 4/1 Multiplexer, 56/8 RS controller RS controller RS controller with built-in communications module RS controller with operator panel RS controller with operator panel RS controller with built-in communications module RS controller RS controller RS controller RS controller RS controller RS controller RS controller RS controller with built-in communications module Application module Input terminal module carrier Single terminal module carrier Carrier for two terminal modules
K21-01.10
1/2 en - 97 - 01
Data sheet/Page K21-06.20 K21-06.10 K21-06.15 K21-06.30 K21-06.52 K21-01.20/5, K21-05.17 K21-01.20/5, K21-05.10 K21-01.20/5, K21-05.12 K21-02.18 K21-07.50 K21-07.20 K21-07.30 K21-02.30 K21-02.35 K21-02.40 K21-02.40 K21-02.42 K21-02.46 K21-02.47 K21-02.58 K21-02.50 K21-02.50 K21-02.52 K21-02.55 K21-02.52 K21-02.48 K21-02.64 K21-02.60 K21-02.60 K21-02.60 K21-02.62 K21-02.70 K21-02.70 K21-02.75 K21-02.76 K21-06.55 K21-02.15 K21-03.20 K21-04.20 K21-04.10 K21-04.10 K21-04.10 K21-04.10 K21-04.10 K21-02.10 K21-02.10 K21-02.10 K21-02.10 K21-03.10 K21-03.10 K21-03.10 K21-04.10 K21-02.20 K21-06.50 K21-06.51
INTEGRAL AS1000 K21 alphabetical product index

NTOM NTOMS INTEGRAL RSA INTEGRAL RSC INTEGRAL RSM Z237 Z257 / 259 Z273 ... 275 Z276 Z277 / 278 Z332 Z347 Z392 Z398 Z399 Z400 Z402 Z404 Z405 Z406 Output terminal module carrier Output terminal module carrier with power supply RS application controllers (NRK../A) RS compact controllers (NRUE/A, NRUF/A, NRUT/A, NRD24/A) RS card module controllers (NRUA/A ... NRUD/A) Service cable: NBRN RS controller Cables connecting PC RS controller via RS232 T1 sensor simulators Simulator for active sensors Voltmeters T1 signal adjuster unit Adapter for GND conductor: NTIM RS controller Adhesive labels for NSA Adhesive labels for NRK16-B/A Connecting cable for two or more NRK../A controllers Wall-mounting kit for NBRN.. NRK16-B/A front-mounting kit NBE mounting clip Adhesive labels for NBE NBRN.. NBE adapter K21-02.22 K21-02.22
K21-01.10
2/2 en - 97 - 01
K21-01.20/4, K21-04.10 K21-01.20/4, K21-03.10 K21-01.20/3, K21-02.10 K21-13.10/1 K21-13.10/2 K21-13.10/3 K21-13.10/4 K21-13.10/5 K21-13.10/6 K21-13.10/7 K21-13.10/8 K21-13.10/8 K21-13.10/9 K21-13.10/9 K21-13.10/10 K21-13.10/11 K21-13.10/11 K21-13.10/11
INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction
K21-01.20
1/8 en - 97 - 01
Brief system description

Application
INTEGRAL AS1000 is both as a stand-alone control and interlock system for small heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems, and provides the process control level for the following Staefa management systems: INTEGRAL MS2000 building management system INTEGRAL TS1500 remote buildings management system INTEGRAL MS1000 in-house management system The PRONTO IRC individual room control system can be incorporated via an interfa ce into the AS1000 system
System overview
51127UK
MS1000
RC1500 C
TS1500
RC1500 A/B (MC1500)
MS2000
Access Vision
Management level
NCRS NCRS
System coordination and communication

NITEL NITEL NICO-N
AS1000
INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE, INTEGRAL DIALOG RH500
*
(NAPC) NITEL NBE NBRN..
Local operation
THERMO
INTEGRAL RS control and interlock
RSM
RSC
RSA
NIPRO
PRONTO IRC individual room control
ZS1
INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction System configuration

Overview see pages 6 and 7.
K21-01.20
2/8 en - 97 - 01
At the heart of the INTEGRAL AS1000 control and interlock system are the microprocessor-based RS controllers. These are available in the following categories: INTEGRAL RSM Programmable control and interlock devices in card-module format, with an external interface for connection to the peripheral devices (see page 3). INTEGRAL RSC Programmable control and interlock devices in compact format with built-in interfaces for connection to the peripheral devices (see page 4). INTEGRAL RSA Application controllers with pre-programmed plug-in modules for system-specific applications, and with built-in interfaces for connection to the peripheral devices (see page 4). The application programs are written using the engineering tool INTEGRAL PLAN or INTEGRAL PLAN+. For simple structuring and parameter setting (see page 8) the Staefa programming language SAPIM (Structure and Parameter Identification Menu) is also available. The interface modules used to connect a PC operator station or higher-level management system, or to incorporate the individual room control system, have the same hardware construction as the RSM card modules. PRONTO IRC individual room control system The PRONTO IRC individual room control system can be integrated into the INTEGRAL AS1000 system by use of the NIPRO interface. This not only integrates the control and interlock functions but also permits centralised operation of the individual room controllers.
Configuration notes NICO When the NICO interface is used for connection to an MS2000 system, the maximum number of RS modules is normally restricted to 15 per bus. The NICO interface is available in the form of NRK16-C/A device also. NITEL The NITEL interfaces are available in the form of NITEL.., NRK14-T../A, NRK16-T../A, NRUT../A devices. The NITEL can communicate with all 16 modules on a bus.
See the P.. series of documents for a detailed description of the individual room control system. RS bus The RS modules, interfaces and operator terminals are interconnected by a data cable referred to as the RS bus. When a number of RS card modules are slotted together, an internal RS bus connection is created through the interlocking module bases. The external RS bus cable for connection to remote RS bus users can be up to 2400 m in length. For longer distances, short-haul modems or adapters for the connection of fibre optic interfaces are available. Up to 16 RS modules and pronto interfaces, and up to 16 operator terminals (NBE, NBRN..) or communication interfaces (NITEL.., NICO) may be connected to one RS bus.
INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction INTEGRAL RSM
K21-01.20
3/8 en - 97 - 01
The RSM range comprises four RS card modules with different configurations of inputs and outputs (see K21-02.10, page 1). The signals between the controllers and peripheral devices (sensors, controlled devices, starters etc.) are adapted and transferred externally via the terminal modules and terminal module carriers. The external interface has a number of advantages: The low voltage of the peripheral devices is separated from the extra low voltage of the system The manual/automatic change-over switches for service and commissioning purposes are located directly on the terminal modules The power amplification of the analogue outputs (phase cut signals) does not place any additional load on the RS modules Signal output status is indicated by LED The I/O configuration can be modified as required to match a wide range of peripheral devices RS card modules
NRUA/A
NRUB/A
NRUC/A
NRUD/A
Terminal module carrier with terminal modules
NT.. with NK.. See K21-02 for RSM specifications
INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction INTEGRAL RSC
K21-01.20
4/8 en - 97 - 01
The RSC controllers are particularly suitable for "off-the-shelf" solutions (e.g. air conditioning units for laboratories or computer rooms, etc.). The RSC range comprises three RS compact controllers with different input/ output configurations (see K21-03.10 and K21-03.20). The NRUT../A communications controller, an RS compact controller with a built-in NITEL.. communications module for the INTEGRAL MS1000 and INTEGRAL TS1500 systems is described in technical manual NT21. The peripheral devices (sensors, controlled devices, starters, etc.) can be connected directly to the screw terminals on the compact controllers. RS compact devices
NRD24/A
NRUE/A See K21-03 for RSC specifications.
NRUF/A
INTEGRAL RSA
NSA application modules The plug-in modules are held in applications libraries in the various national and regional Landis & Staefa offices. They can be selected to suit the application required and plugged into one of the base units. The engineering required is thus minimal, and since most setpoints, parameters etc. have suitable default settings, commissioning is very easy. Also available freely programmable
The RSA range is primarily used in smaller HVAC systems. RSA comprises three application controllers (see K21-04.10 and 04.20) and a large number of plug-in application modules. Each of these modules contains an EEPROM loaded with an applicationspecific program. The NRK16-T../A and NRK14-T../A communications controllers (RS applications controllers with a built-in NITEL.. communications module) for the INTEGRAL MS1000 and INTEGRAL TS1500 systems is described in the technical manual, document NT21. The peripheral devices (sensors, controlled devices, starters etc..) can be connected directly to the connection terminals on the controller base units. RS application controllers
NRK9/A
NRK16/A See K21-04 for RSA specifications.
NRK16-B/A NRK16-B1/A
INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction Options for local operation via RS bus

NBE remote operator terminal
K21-01.20
5/8 en - 97 - 01
The NBE remote operator terminal is designed for simple operation of the HVAC system with INTEGRAL AS1000. The NBE is connected to the RS bus and can be operated without any specific training in HVAC engineering. See K21-05.15 for NBE specification NBRN.. operator terminals The NBRNA-.. allows access to all the RS controllers from anywhere in the system and provides data needed for operation. The NBRN-.. operator terminal can be used for more sophisticated operation. The terminal is designed to provide access to all connected data points based on pre-definable access criteria (e.g. in accordance the technical expertise of the user).
NBE
NBRNA-..
NBRN-..
Technical specifications, see K21-05.12 (NBRNA-..) and K21-05.10 (NBRN-..).
PC operation with the INTEGRAL DIALOG or INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE software The system can also be operated from a PC running the INTEGRAL DIALOG or INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE software. A NITEL.. communications module is required for INTEGRAL DIALOG, and an NARC adapter for INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE. System operation emulates operation with the NBRN-.. operator terminal. See K21-05.30 for a brief description of operation with INTEGRAL DIALOG See K21-06.15 for the NARC adapter technical specification See K21-07.21 for the NITEL.. technical specification (NIBB emulation) INTEGRAL DIALOG software operating instructions - see User manual K8 INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE operating instructions - see User manual M5
Options for centralised operation

Where INTEGRAL AS1000 forms part of an overall management system, the system is operated from the associated management station. The options for local operation continue to be available.
INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction Overview of the INTEGRAL AS1000 control and interlock system
K21-01.20
6/8 en - 97 - 01
51128.1
INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE, INTEGRAL DIALOG
Alarm
Auto
NBE AC 24 V
NBRN(A)-..
NARB/A
NARB/A
NRUA/A
NRUD/A
6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1
NITEL NTOMS NTOMS
NTIM AC 24 V
NTIM
NTOM
NTIM
NTOM
NTIM AC 24 V
INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction
K21-01.20
7/8 en - 97 - 01
NABBS/A
51128.2
NBRN-.. AC 24 V
RS bus
NARB/A
NARB/A NRK16/A NIPRO
NARB/A
AC 24 V
NRUE/A
AC 24 V
AC 24 V NAPC
AC 24 V
2 pronto trunks
INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction Engineering and commissioning

Note SAPIM (Structure and Parameter Identification Menu) is a programming language developed by Staefa Control System for the programming of control and interlock modules. It consists of a wide range of basic functions (software modules) which can be combined to create all the structures required.
K21-01.20
8/8 en - 97 - 01
The design engineering, instrumentation, programming and commissioning of the AS1000 system involves various activities which can be defined collectively as "engineering". The starting point for all the engineering activities is the plant diagram, used in conjunction with the description of functions. The basic functions can be compiled on the basis of these documents, and logically connected by combining SAPIM software components to produce a system-specific structure. See K21-08 for a brief description of the SAPIM basic functions. For a detailed description, see the engineering manual M3. Structure diagram The structure diagram is a schematic diagram showing which SAPIM basic functions are needed to operate the system, and the way in which they are logically interconnected. Each function may be used as many times as necessary.
F F F F
9H475 A
Logically interconnected SAPIM software components For more complex systems, the structure diagram can be divided into operating modes (Day, Night, Frost etc.). This approach not only makes the structure diagram easier to read, but also improves operation by reducing the sampling rate, since the microprocessor only needs to sample and process the functions in the active operating mode. Application program On the basis of the system documentation and the structure diagram, the application program can now be created on a PC. To do this, the user invokes the functions shown in the structure diagram one after the other (by use of the relevant codes F1, F2 etc.) and allocates the relevant inputs, outputs and parameters. The process is interactive: after choosing a SAPIM basic function, the user is prompted systematically for all the associated inputs, outputs and parameters. All the requested inputs must be made before the user can complete a function and invoke the next. Engineering with INTEGRAL PLAN The INTEGRAL PLAN software is a convenient tool for the efficient engineering of the INTEGRAL AS1000 control and interlock system. It is based on SAPIM programming language and runs on IBM-compatible PCs or laptops. staefa plan short can be used to structure all the functions of the various RS controllers and to set the associated parameters. A clear graphics-based method of operation combined with intelligent user guidance reduces engineering time and minimises the possibility of programming errors. See User Manual M3 for a detailed description of the engineering software. Downloading the structures In the commissioning phase, the completed application programs are downloaded directly from a PC or laptop computer into the RS controllers and pronto interfaces. Normally it is then only necessary to adjust individual parameters on the basis of the system performance. Further structures can be added and parameters changed at any subsequent stage. See K21-12 for information on commissioning.
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation of the RS controllers
K21-01.30
1/3 en - 97 - 01
Principle of operation of the RS controller

Aim of this description
The RS controllers are freely programmable DDC-based control and interlock modules. Plant functions once implemented by combining a number of devices are now stored in program form, between the inputs and outputs of the RS controller. The purpose of this description is to provide a somewhat simplified, but nevertheless realistic picture of the structure of, and interaction between the hardware and software in the RS controllers.
RS controller structure
The diagram below illustrates the structure of an RS controller. The example used is the NRUA/A controller, with eight universal inputs and eight universal outputs. Every RS controller consists essentially of the following functional elements:
Input/output section: Comprises the input interface (IN) and the output interface (OUT), each with its associated multiplexer and demultiplexer (MUX) and the auxiliary processor with A/D and D/A converter. Processing section: Consists of the main processor with its RAM and associated buffers: the intermodule buffer (IMB), the input buffer and the output buffer. These buffers are actually components of the RAM, but are shown separately because of their special functions. EPROM: This accommodates the operating system software comprising the operating system (top) and the library of all the SAPIM functions (bottom). EEPROM: This accommodates the project-specific program in SAPIM (top) and the related lists of parameters and text labels (bottom). The project-specific program is divided into the various operating modes of the plant (in this case Night, Frost protection and Day) and Operating mode 0. Operating mode 0 contains the parameters in accordance with which the processor selects the plant operating mode valid at the time. Bus system: This enables all the functional units to communicate with each other, and is also connected with the "outside world" (RS bus, operator terminal) via the BUS interface. Real-time clock (RTC): Shows the current day, date and time. Subject to technical alteration
Input/output section Processing section Memory for the operating system software (EPROM) Memory for the project-specific program (EEPROM) Bus system Real-time clock
X t t
1 UI
60002en
UO 1
IN
AUXILIARY
D
OUT
MUX 8
PROCESSOR D
MUX 8
INPUT BUFFER IMB RAM
OUTPUT BUFFER
BUS INTERFACE
MAIN PROCESSOR
RTC BUS
xp x y
P
W
x y W xp
P PI
y = f(x, w, Xp,) y = f(x, w, Xp,)
EEPROM
EPROM
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation of the RS controllers Processing the project-specific program
K21-01.30
2/3 en - 97 - 01
Multiplexer: Transfers information from various data channels to a single path. All channels are interrogated in sequence. Demultiplexer: Reverses the process. Distributes the data from a single path to various data channels. A/D converter: Circuit which converts analogue values into digital code. D/A converter: Circuit which converts digital code into analogue values. Buffer: Memory in which data is stored temporarily (on call). Interface: Point at which two interacting devices or systems are connected. The signal levels and the routine are coordinated/standardised to enable the devices to communicate. Processor: Functional unit within a digital computer system. The processor controls the routine and executes the processing commands. RAM: Random Access Memory. Allows data to be accessed within fractions of a second, modified and stored again. The data is lost, however, if the power supply is interrupted. EPROM: Erasable, programmable read-only memory. The data is programmed into the memory during manufacture and is retained even if the power supply is interrupted. The complete contents can be erased by ultra-violet light. EEPROM: This has the same properties as the EPROM except that the data can be deleted electrically and reprogrammed by the processor itself.
X t t
1 UI
60003de
1
IN
6 A
OUT
UO 1
AUXILIARY
PROCESSOR
MUX 8
MUX 8
INPUT BUFFER
B
OUTPUT BUFFER
IMB
5 4 RAM A
BUS INTERFACE
MAIN
PROCESSOR
2
RTC BUS
xp x y
P
W
x y W xp
P PI
y = f(x, w, Xp,) y = f(x, w, Xp,)
EEPROM
EPROM
Preparation Step A: The structuring device is used to download the project-specific control and interlock program from the data disk into the EEPROM of the RS controller via the RS bus/service socket. Step B: The RS controller operating system copies the list of parameters for the project-specific program into the intermodule buffer.

Execution Step 1:
K21-01.30
3/3 en - 97 - 01
The operating system causes the current reading or status of the inputs to be scanned every 100 ms. These values are stored in the input buffer. Analogue values are first converted by the A/D converter of the auxiliary processor into digital codes. The same applies to the control variable, x, at input UI 1. Step 2: The current operating mode of the plant is now determined on the basis of the data in Operating mode 0. Assuming that the plant switch in the example is set to "Automatic", that the clock indicates "Day" and that there is no danger of frost, then the main processor will process the program for the "Day" operating mode, working through each function of this SAPIM structure in turn. The diagram assumes that the P controller of the temperature control loop is currently to be computed. Step 3: The algorithm for calculating the function of the P controller is retrieved from the function library in the EPROM. Step 4: The P controller function is now computed in the RAM with the control parameters (x,w,Xp) for this temperature control loop. The processor finds these values in the plant memory, which is part of the intermodule buffer. Step 5: The current value thus calculated for the controller output signal, y, is then transferred to the output buffer. Step 6: With the next module cycle, the auxiliary processor receives the new value for y from the output buffer. When the digital code has been converted into an analogue signal, the current controller output signal is transferred to output UO 1 via the demultiplexer.
K21-01.40
1/2 en - 97 - 01
RS controller block diagram

Summary
The block diagram below shows three functional units, from top to bottom: Power supply Auxiliary processor with A/D and D/A conversion Main processor with data and program memories
Auxiliary processor: Motorola 6805, 8 bit
AC 24 V DC 5 V POWER SUPPlY DC 15 V
60004en
AC 24 V DC 15 V
A/D and D/A conversion: 12 bit resolution (4096 steps)

A D AUXILIARY PROCESSOR D A MUX UO UNIVERSAL
Main processor: INTEL 8031, 8 bit / 16 bit structure RAM 8 kBytes: Temporary data EEPROM 8 kBytes: Project-specific program with: Structure data Text labels and data tables Other storage, e.g. I/O structure, runtime totalisers, switch-times, parameters etc. EPROM 64 kBytes: Operating system Function library
UNIVERSAL
UI
MUX
BAUDRATE
DIGITAL
DI
IN
MAIN PROCESSOR RAM
OUT
DO
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
RS BUS TERMINAL
E - PROM
EE - PROM
Power supply
The DC 15 V and DC 5 V voltages required internally are produced from the AC 24 V input, but isolated from it. The AC 24 V is transmitted further to power the operator terminal and the DC 15 V is fed to the terminal module carriers, to supply power to the terminal modules.
Auxiliary processor with A/D and D/A conversion

Note The universal inputs and outputs must be set up for either analogue or digital signals during structuring.
The auxiliary processor processes the universal inputs and outputs via the multiplexer. Analogue signals are converted into digital codes and assigned to an operating range 0 100 %. Digital signals (0 V and 10 V) are assigned directly to 0 % and 100 % of the operating range respectively.
Main processor with data and program memories

The functions of the main processor are as follows: Processing data to and from the auxiliary processor. Operating the digital inputs (DI) and the digital outputs (DO). Working through the project-specific program from the EEPROM in conjunction with the RAM and EPROM. The following are also allocated to the main processor unit: Real-time clock, with battery back-up

Baud rate: Speed at which data is transmitted on the RS bus.
K21-01.40
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Baud rate switch: Used to change the baud rate. RS bus interface Allows the connection of the RS controllers, PC interface, pronto interface, operator terminals and the service PC to the RS bus.
K21-01.50
1/6 en - 97 - 01
Management of the process variables

Measurement and calculation range of the RS controllers
The RS controllers can be connected (via terminal modules in the case of the RSM controllers) to a wide range of peripheral devices. Where necessary (e.g. with RSM controllers), the terminal modules ensure that the signals are adapted to the level required by the RS controller. The required signal levels are: DC 0 10 V for analogue operations DC 0 or 10 V for digital operations (digital outputs 0 / 5 V) In the case of analogue operations, temperature sensors with a T1 measuring element represent an exception: their change in resistance is evaluated directly by the RS controller. See page 2, 'Analogue input signals' for more information. The RS controller effectively allocates an operating range of 0 100 % to analogue DC 0 10 V signals, irrespective of the physical variables and ranges associated with the connected devices. The internal processing in the RS controller is also always within an operating range of 0 100 %, expressed as a 16-bit value. The RS controller assigns logic 0 and logic 1 to the digital DC 0 V and DC 10 V signals respectively.
60005en
0...10 V
0...100 % AB Analogue
0...10 V
NK..
0V 10 V
Digital Logic 0 / logic 1
0V 10 V
NRU.., NRK..
Processing accuracy All analogue values, i.e. all values to universal inputs and outputs are converted, with a resolution of 12 bits (4096 steps). All internal calculated values, setpoints, parameters etc. are handled with a resolution of 16 bits (65 535 steps). The values for the input/display resolution shown in the definition range tables do not affect the internal 16-bit resolution.
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation of the RS controllers Signals at the inputs and outputs
K21-01.50
2/6 en - 97 - 01
This section gives an overall view of the principal options for connection. Mention is also made of special features which affect structuring and the setting of parameters. Analogue input signals Analogue input signals are derived from one of two sources: Active sensors, e.g. the FKA-V2 air velocity sensor. This already produces a 0 10 V signal corresponding to its physical measuring range of 0 15 m/s. Passive sensors, such as the T1 temperature measuring element. Within the defined measuring range of -50 150 C, a 2.23 4.23 V signal is generated at the sensor by the appropriate power supply from the RS controller. This signal is converted into 0 10 V in the RS controller.
AB = Effective operating range
60006
Refer to data sheet S1-02.98 for details of the measuring principle.
0...15 m / s
V1
0...10 V
NKDG
0...10 V
UI...
0...100 % AB
The data entered during structuring enables the RS controller to recognise whether a T1 measuruing element is connected. When T1 is defined, the signal is connected internally, via a sensor amplifier.
-50...150 C
T1
2,23...4,23 V
NKDG
2,23...4,23 V
UI...
0...100 % AB
NRU.., NRK..
Analogue output signals Signals to modulating or quasi-proportional controlled devices are transmitted to these devices via the UO.. universal outputs and the appropriate terminal modules. The diagram below illustrates three typical examples of connection: Landis & Staefa magnetic valve Modulating damper actuator Motorised valve (or A1H250 damper actuator) with quasi-proportional control Please refer to the notes to the left of the diagram.
AB = Effective operating range

60007en
* The effective voltage change for an operating range of 100 % for a Landis & Staefa magnetic valve with a DC 010 V control signal is approximately 2.5 V (57.5 V). This should be noted when setting the parameters (Xp and Offset). The three-point signal is defined when the output functions are structured. 5 V: STOP motor 10 V: Motor in OPEN direction 0 V: Motor in CLOSE direction
0...100 % AB
UO..
0...10 V
0...100 % *
NKOAS
0...100 % AB
UO..
0...10 V
M
NKOAS
10 5 0
0...100 %
0...100 % AB
NRU.., NRK..
open
M
UO..
0...100 %
close
NKOK

Digital input signals a) Sensor contacts with voltage
K21-01.50
3/6 en - 97 - 01
60008en
open 0 V (low) 15 ... 240 V (high) closed

NKID
log 1 10 V 0V DI.. log 0

NRU.., NRK..
AC / DC 15 ... 240 V
b) Volt-free sensor contacts

60009en
Important In the case of digital input signals, an inversion takes place: Closed N/O contacts (signal level High) produce logic 0 in the RS controller, and vice versa. The same applies to N/C contacts: an open N/C contact (signal level High) will also produce logic 0 in the RS controller.
open 0 V (low) 24 V (high) closed

NKID
log 1 10 V 0V DI.. log 0
NRU.., NRK..
Digital signals to universal inputs

60010en
Important The RS controller interprets a 10 V signal at a universal input as 100 % of the operating range, and a 0 V signal as 0 %. These quasi-digital signals must be converted into true digital signals (logic 1 or logic 0) during structuring, by use of the appropriate SAPIM function.
open 0 V (low) 15 ... 240 V (high) closed

NKID
100 % AB 10 V 0V UI.. 0 % AB
NRU.., NRK..
AC / DC 15 ... 240 V
Digital output signals
log 0 DO / UO..
Note: Connection diagrams for these and other examples will be found in Section 11 of this manual.
off 0V 10 V
NKOD
60011en
log 1
on
NRU.., NRK..
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation of the RS controllers Processing in the RS controller

tv [C] 90 70
60012
K21-01.50
4/6 en - 97 - 01
Example: Reset function A reset function is used here as an example of how the process variables are handled in the RS controller. Operating diagram In accordance with the plant specification, the function shown in the diagram on the left is required:
20 tAU -15 -5 0 20 [C]
The flow temperature tv is to be increased as shown, as a function of the outside temperature tAU. At an outside temperature of 5 C, the flow temperature will be set at 70 C, i.e. 50 K above its original value of 20 C. SAPIM function The desired reset can be achieved using SAPIM function F1.3. The reset adjustment is defined with cut-in and end points Xa1 and Xe1 and the reset height, H1. The absolute value of the original flow temperature tv (20 C), is subsequently added, using another SAPIM function (F4.1).
y [K]
60013
At a temperature of -5 C, the output of SAPIM function F1.3 is thus a reset value of 50 K. SAPIM structure diagram and signal flow
70 50 H1
The diagram below is an extract showing the structure diagram and signal flow for this example: The outside temperature tAU is measured by the T1 sensor and transmitted via the terminal module to the RS controller. The RS controller converts the measured value received into its operating range of 0 100 % and transfers this variable as input xe to function F1.3. F1.3 then calculates the curve using the appropriately set parameters, Xa1, H1 and Xe1. The output value, y, is transmitted via plant memory location UZ01 to function F4.1.
60014
0 -15 -5 Xa1 Xe1 0 20 [C]
xe
NRU.., NRK..
-5 C
T1
NKDG
F 1.3 UZ1 UI1 0 ... 100 % xe y F 4.1
-50 ... 150 C
Xa1 H1
Xe1

y [K]
60015
K21-01.50
5/6 en - 97 - 01
Situation in the RS controller The diagram, left, again shows SAPIM function F1.3, with the procedure required for the example used. An outside temperature of 5 C results in a flow temperature of 50 K above base setpoint.
H1
70 50
The diagram below shows how the RS controller identifies the individual parameters of this function and the form in which the corresponding values are displayed to the user.
xe
60016
0 -15 -5 Xa1 Xe1 0 20 [C]
F 1.3 -50 -5 22,5 % 0 22,5 100 % UI 1 150 C xe f (xe, Xa1, Xe1, H1) = y y 0 25 100 % UZ 1 0 50 200 K 25 %
-50 -15
150 C
0 17,5 100 % UP 1
Xa1
-50 20 0
150 C
35 100 % UP 2
Xe1
0 0
70
200 K
35 100 % UP 3
H1
The absolute value of the physical range 50 ... 150 C is 200 K = 100 %. Within this, 5 C = 45 K = 22.5 %. The ranges and units of the parameters stored in the various registers are transmitted in coded form to the RS controller during downloading.
The current value of tAu (5 C), as described on page 4, has been converted and is stored as 22.5 % in input register UI 01. From the operator terminal, it can be read in the form of a variable expressed in engineering units. When the parameters are set, variables Xa1, Xe1 and H1 are entered in the form of value from physical ranges (e.g. 20 C for Xe1). The RS controller also interprets these as values within its own operating range of 0 ...100 % and stores them in the registers shown (e.g. 35 % for Xe1 to register UP 02). When the processor reaches function F1.3 in the program routine, it collects the current values of all the input parameters and connects them in accordance with the algorithm of this function.
The values in registers UP 01 to UP 03 can, of course, also be read from the operator terminal.
The result, y, is in turn stored as a percentage value in plant memory location UZ 01, from where it can be read from the operator terminal in engineering units, i.e. 50 K in the example illustrated (corresponding internally to 25 %).
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation of the RS controllers Display on the operator terminal

Starting point
K21-01.50
6/6 en - 97 - 01
The operator wants to know the current outside temperature, tAU. This is 5 C and is stored as an internal value of 22.5 % in input register UI 01. The operator terminal displays the reading in C. The section below shows how this is achieved.
-50 -5 -5 C
t
150 C
60017en
tAU
100 % 0 22,5 UI 1
F 1.3
Transfer of data to the operator terminal When input register UI 01 is selected, the relevant data is transferred from the RS controller tables (shown left in the diagram) to the operator terminal. This decodes the data, converts the % value into engineering units and displays the full reading in ordinary text form.
RS Controller UI table
UI1 UI2 T1
Operator terminal
60018en
A B -5.0 C C D
t Outside
IMB
The UI range and units table is in the EEPROM. The code T1 represents a measuring range of 50 ... 150 C. This is how the operator terminal determines the factor required to convert the associated 22.5% in the plant memory. The code will have been entered during structuring. The current values are stored in the intermodule buffer. In this example they were taken from the input buffer. The text labels, entered during structuring, are in the EEPROM.
Display (plain text) 22,5 Conversion Decoding
UI1
Text
UI1 t Outside
Display format
60019en
Numerical
Init
Text
5 . 0
5 Sign
C
10
Ou t s i d e
20
K21-01.60
1/4 en - 97 - 01
Description of the operating system

Function
The operating system controls the routines inside the RS controller and organises and monitors the data traffic to the peripheral devices.
Task: Computing process in an operating system. Program for executing a task.
It consists of the following four tasks which are processed in parallel, as it were, with four levels of priority: Clock (1), Communication (2), Administration (3), Application (4).
Operating system
60020en
Clock
Administration
Communication
Application
IMB
The intermodule buffer (IMB) is an intermediate memory. It contains all data accessed by more than one task.
RS bus
Inputs/Outputs
Brief description of the tasks The clock task is polled by the operating system in a 50 ms cycle. It controls the timers required by the communication and starts the administration task. The 50 ms periods are referred to as the module base cycle. The communication task is a wide-ranging task for the administration and implementation of communication via the RS bus. The communication is controlled by an interrupt circuit and can therefore interrupt the two tasks described below at any time. The administration task is always processed after the clock task. It runs various counters and has synchronisation and monitoring functions. The application task in normal operation, processes the project-specific program (SAPIM).

Timing and priorities
K21-01.60
2/4 en - 97 - 01
The diagram below shows the timing and interdependence of the tasks. With regard to the communication task an assumption has been made. Note the effect on the application task.
Module cycle (100 ms)
60021en
The RS module cycle comprises the application time and a reserve time. The latter represents approximately 50 % of the module cycle. This is added by the operating system to ensure that the RS module cycle time remains constant despite variations in the duration and frequency of communication. This is important when calculating timedependent functions such as the integral action time Tn of a PI controller. The application time depends on the length and complexity of the SAPIM program (typically 250 ms).
1. Clock task
2. Communication task
3. Administration task
4. Application task
Application Reserve
RS module cycle
RS module cycle
Activities in detail The diagram below provides an overall view of the software activities and the way in which they interact in conjunction with the buffers. The "Communications handler" and "Application" tasks are of particular interest to the user, because they have observable results. For this reason they are described in more detail below.
Operating system
RSBUS
Communications handler
Clock
Administration
Application
Task administration
Comms.buffer
Task distribution
Plant operation administration
E2 write
Timer
BSZ
I/O
60022de
InterRS Read Structure Write Menu tree
Alarm signals. Plant capacity calculation Initialisation Termination
Alarmhandler
Time channels
Switch
I / O Prozessor Plant memory
IMB
UIN
UOUT
DIN
DOUT

The communications handler
K21-01.60
3/4 en - 97 - 01
The communications handler controls the RS bus and the data traffic via this bus. Outwardly this software module operates in the same way in all units in the RS range, enabling them to intercommunicate. The communications handler has two basic functions: 1. It receives communication tasks from other units. In this situation, the RS controller functions as a communications slave. The task is passed on to the Task administration function, which performs the appropriate activities and sends back a response. These activities comprise: Reading and writing for operating purposes, and the provision of the menu information required. Structuring, i.e. downloading the project-specific program into the RS controller or application module. 2. It distributes communication tasks to other units. In this case, the RS controller operates as a communications master, and the Task distribution function can execute these tasks within a given time. The tasks are: Inter-RS communication (2) and alarm signals (1). The order of priority is shown in brackets In both cases, the data is retrieved from or stored in the intermodule buffer. An additional communications buffer holds the incoming and outgoing communications package in each case. The application The Application task has various functions depending on the operating status of the RS controller, i.e. normal operation, structuring mode or service mode.
These communicaton tasks are transmitted in the form of group communications, i.e. all connected units receive the messages simultaneously.
Normal operation In normal operation, the application processes the following:

The alarm handler collects the alarm reports and transmits them to the IMB.
1. Infrastructure, Section 1: This section comprises the I/O processor and the alarm handler. These are always processed completely, as the first step. 2. Plant operation administration: This comprises the following three operations: Initialisation, in which the plant memory is compiled from the intermodule buffer. The plant memory is an internal working memory for calculating the plant capacity and contains all the data required for this purpose. Plant capacity calculation, in which all the calculations required for control and interlock of the HVAC plant are performed. Termination, whereby the plant memory, updated on the basis of the calculations, is stored in the intermodule buffer. The plant operation administration function is also processed completely.
See K21-08.20 for allocation of registers in the plant memory.

3. Infrastructure, Section 2
K21-01.60
4/4 en - 97 - 01
Delays are most frequently caused by the communication.
This comprises the following: 8-channel time clock Run-time totaliser Timer module Baud rate switch Section 2 of the infrastructure is also processed completely provided there have been no interruptions in the previous sequences. If, however, a delay has occurred, processing only continues for as long as the RS module cycle time permits. Once processing of a unit has begun, however, it is always completed. 4. Reserve: The reserve time takes up approximately 50% of the plant capacity calculation function. The purpose of the reserve time is to ensure that the RS module cycle time remains constant despite interruptions from the communication.
Structuring mode Structuring mode is activated directly via the service socket under software control which automatically disconnects the RS controller concerned from the RS bus. All outputs are set to 0 during structuring. The plant program is downloaded into the EEPROM during structuring. Service mode This is activated automatically when an unstructured controller is switched on. It comprises:
If an error occurs in an application task, which prevents further processing despite several attempts, the RS controller automatically changes over to Service mode.
Reading inputs and outputs via communication Overriding the outputs via communication Reading the baud rate switch setting Setting the clock and programming the time channels
K21-01.70
1/6 en - 97 - 01
Communication / RS bus
Network topology
60023
Principle Multi-point system with serial bus Maximum 32 bus users, all able to intercommunicate Allocation of addresses: No. 1 ... 16: RS controllers (types NRU.., NRK..), interfaces to PRONTO IRC (NIPRO). No. 17 ... 32: Operator terminals (NBRN..), interfaces to PC operator station (NITEL..), to MS2000 (NICO) and to TS1500 and MS1000 (NITEL..). Each address may be used only once. Bus and interfaces in accordance with EIA Standard RS485 Implementation For remote RS controllers: bus cable with adapter. For adjacent RS card modules (RSM controllers): bus connection established through spring-contact strip in base Bus-termination is integral to all devices for connection to the bus ('participants').
17
32 NBRN NICO/NITEL
NRU.. NRK.. NIPRO 1 2 16
60024
17
18
Bus cable: 2-core, twisted See K21-11.20 for detailed specification and connection diagrams o = Intelligence of bus user ('participants')
1 2 3 4
5 6

Options for arrangement of the bus cable The bus cable may be arranged in any configuration:
K21-01.70
2/6 en - 97 - 01
Important Do not connect the bus cable in a closed ring configuration.
A Straight point-to-point connection B in a ring configuration. Note, however, that the ring must not be closed. C As a star-shaped network The length of the bus connection between the furthest participants (i.e. from (a) to (b) each of the diagrams below) must not exceed 2400 m.
60025
A a
Note Normally, when a participant drops out of a network, the communication is either partially or completely terminated. This is not the case with the RS bus system in conjunction with the appropriate organisation of data traffic (see page 3). Within the specified limits, moreover, any number of participants may be removed or connected.
B b C b
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation of the RS controllers Data traffic organisation

The two basic communication modes
60026
K21-01.70
3/6 en - 97 - 01
A
1
Individual communication: During normal operation, a participant, A, (e.g. an operator terminal) may require certain information from another participant, B (e.g. an RS controller). Participant A transmits a call (1) to participant B and receives a response from B (2). Group communication: With group communication, the sender (e.g. A) transmits data intended for more than one participant (X, Y) on the bus. This is the case for the following tasks: Inter-RS communication Time synchronisation Alarm signals In the case of group communication, the sender does not receive a reply from the participants. The three states of the communications handler
60027
17
18
60028
The devices connected to the bus can each assume one of the three following states: Bus master (BM) Communications master (KM) Communications slave (KS) Bus master
KS BM KS
1
KM
KS
2
KS
3
The bus master status is a virtual function. It is automatically assigned to the device with the fewest communication tasks, which can therefore assume additional tasks. The task of the bus master is to control the data traffic on the RS bus, i.e. bus administration, which consists of the following activities: Checking the topology Allocating the communications master function The topology is checked approximately every 10 seconds. This is the first activity of the bus master, which polls all 32 addresses in the bus system in succession, and checks whether they are in use. At 9600 baud, this procedure takes approximately 0.5 s. The communications master function is allocated to one of the participants in accordance with a priority system described in a later section. Communications master Only one device in the bus system has the function of communications master at any given time. Only the communications master is able to transmit (and of course receive a reply, in the case of individual communication) via the bus. The time allowed for transmission (and receipt) of data is however restricted to approximately 200 ms, after which the function of communications master is assigned to another device. Communications slave All other devices are communications slaves and are only able to receive communications and to respond when interrogated.
Note When a device is first connected to the bus system, it may take approximately 10 seconds until it is operative. This length of time must therefore be allowed to elapse before values, for example, may be interrogated from an RS controller.

Priority levels
K21-01.70
4/6 en - 97 - 01
One of eight priority levels is allocated to each of the stations on the RS bus. The order of priority runs from 0 to 7, with 0 representing the lowest priority and 7 the highest (most important). The standard allocation of priorities depends on the type of station, and is as follows: Type of station RS controller NIPRO Operator terminal Priority 2 2 4
Principle for allocation of the communications master function The following principle provides the basis for allocating the communications master function: The higher the priority, the more frequently (n + 1) within one cycle the communications master function will be allocated to the associated stations than to stations at the lowest priority level. A cycle is complete when each station has received the communications master function at least once. The stations at the lowest priority level form the basis for the multiplication factor n, where n = 1. The factor is raised by 1 for each higher priority level, even when intervening priority levels are not used.
60029en
Priority levels lowest 0 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 3 4 17 18 5 highest 6 7
The communications master function is always allocated first to the first address at the highest priority level. Example The following is an illustration of the principle described above. The table on the left shows the stations connected to the RS bus, namely: 5 RS controllers, Addresses 1 5 2 operator terminals, Addresses 17 and 18. The priority level 2 stations have a factor of n = 1, as there are no stations with a lower priority. The stations at priority level 4 have a factor of 3. The frequency with which the communications master function is assigned to the individual stations is therefore as follows: RS controllers 1 ... 5: once each 3 times each
Stations connected
17 5 1
60030
Operator terminals 17 and 18:
18
18
The order in which each of the stations receives the communications master function is also worked out systematically. The procedure is not explained here, but the diagram on the left shows the order which would apply to the example. Timing
17
It is naturally of relevance to know how long it is before a device is again able to communicate on the bus (e.g. in the case of an RS controller, to transmit an alarm or an inter-RS message). From the description above and the explanations on page 5, however, it will be seen that absolute values cannot be calculated. The timings depend on a range of factors in addition to the topology and the priority levels.
4 3 18
17
Important Activities in relation to alarms must be dealt with in the RS controller concerned. Do not use inter-RS traffic for timecritical signals. Subject to technical alteration
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation of the RS controllers Bus activities

General notes on data traffic In normal operation, three activities are processed on the bus:
K21-01.70
5/6 en - 97 - 01
Allocation of the bus master function (BM-Z) Bus administration, consisting of topology check (BV-T), allocation of the communications master function (KM-Z) and the return of the same (KM-R). Communication (K) among the participants. The allocation of the bus master and communications master functions, and the topology check are described in the previous section. This section below gives details of communication among the participants in both operation and group communication modes.
60031
Key to diagram K KA BM-Z BV-T KM-Z Communication Communication task Allocation of bus master function Topology check Allocation of communications master function KM-R Communications master function returned
BM-Z
BV-T t
KA
KA
KA
KM-R
t
The communication tasks In principle, the communications master function is allocated to a station for a duration of 500 ms. The station concerned can execute several communication tasks (KA) in this time. The station itself monitors the 500 ms period. If it establishes, after a communication task has been executed, that the time has not yet expired (e.g. only 490 ms used) it starts a further task. The station does not relinquish the communications master function until this task (including a response where applicable) is completed. This means that in effect, the time for a communications packet (K) may be considerably more than 500 ms, bearing in mind that there are responses comprising up to 255 bytes which alone require 255 ms (at 9600 baud).
KM-Z

Example of a communication task
K21-01.70
6/6 en - 97 - 01
CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check This CCITT-recommended procedure gives an error detection probability of close to 100 %. *CCITT: International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee
The example below shows an example of a group communication task, in this case, an inter-RS communication. The alarm signals follow the same principle.
60040en
1 To : All
2 From RS1 : AW2 From RS3 : AW7 etc. etc. etc. : ....... : ....... : .......
From : RS1 AW1 AW2 AW3 etc. etc. CRC
Explanatory notes: Whenever RS controller No. 1 has the function of communications master, it transmits its communications packet to the bus. This packet contains the following data:
The question of what data is to be transmitted to and retrieved from the bus is defined in the structure diagram and entered accordingly at the "RS bus configuration" stage. At the same time, the data is assigned with the required paths to the RS bus, i.e. UO/DO output registers and UI/DI input registers.
Addresses of receivers, in this case "All" Address of the sender, in this case: RS controller No. 1. The actual data to be transmitted, for example: analogue values AW 1, AW 2, AW 3, etc. (bus outputs). The digital values are transmitted as a separate task. The CRC code word for detecting transmission errors. Group communication data is always accessible to all bus participants. Each participant, however, is programmed to recognise which data is required from which source. In the example shown, the data for RS controller No. 2 is: Analogue value 2 from RS controller No. 1 Analogue value 7 from RS controller No. 3 Etc. (all the defined bus inputs). Unlike with normal operation, no answers or acknowledgements are transmitted in the case of group communication. If an error occurs during data transmission, this is likely to be detected by the receiver and the data concerned will not be accepted. The receiver however does not then have access to new data until the next time the communications master function is assigned to the sender concerned.
Note In addition to the bus activities already described, the table readings are automatically updated from the RS controllers into the operator terminal. This process is triggered by the operator terminal itself, independently of the other bus activities. The cycle times cary, e.g.: Measured values: approximately every 5 s Setpoints: approximately every 30 s.
Important The following requirements should be noted in conjunction with the above and the notes on the allocation of the communications master function on page 3: As a general rule, do not transmit time-critical data via the RS bus. In particular, activities on alarms should be processed in the RS controller in which they occur. Only the alarm itself may be transmitted via the bus. Subject to technical alteration
K21-02
INTEGRAL RSM
INTEGRAL AS1000 INTEGRAL RSM
K21-02.01
1/1 en - 97 - 01
Contents
Card modules NRU../A NMIDK NHGB Control and interlock modules .............................................. 02.10 56/8 multiplexer ...................................................................... 02.15 Card frame ............................................................................... 02.18
Terminal module carriers NTIM NTOM NTOMS Input terminal module carrier ............................................... 02.20 Output terminal module carrier ............................................ 02.22 Output terminal module carrier with power supply for RSM controllers ................................ 02.25
Terminal modules NKDG NKDW NKIA Transducer module for DC 0 ... 10 V signals, with DC 15 V supply voltage for active peripheral devices .......... 02.30 Transducer module for DC 0 ... 10 V signals, with AC 24 V supply voltage for active peripheral devices .......... 02.35 Input module for DC 0 ... 10 V signals, with differential amplifier and AC 24 V supply voltage for active peripheral devices .................................................................... 02.40 Input module for DC 0 ... 10 V signals, with electrical isolation .......................................................... 02.42 Input module for 0 (4) ... 20 mA signals, with electrical isolation .......................................................... 02.44 Input module for Pt 100 sensors ............................................ 02.46 Input module for Ni1000 sensors ........................................... 02.47 Input module with trimmer, for T1 sensors .......................................................................... 02.48 Input module for digital signals from switched voltages .... 02.50 as NKID, with manual switch Input module for digital signals from volt-free contacts .... 02.52 as NKIDP, with manual switch Input module for 8 digital signals from volt-free contacts ........................................................... 02.55 Input module for pulse counting .......................................... 02.58 Output module for DC 0 ... 10 V signals, with high-impedance isolation .............................................. 02.60 as NKOAS, with manual switch as NKOAS, without hard-wired interlock Output module for DC 0 ... 10 V signals, with electrical isolation .......................................................... 02.62 Output module for 0 (4) ... 20 mA signals, with electrical isolation .......................................................... 02.64 Output relay module .............................................................. 02.70 as NKOD, with manual switch Output module for 3-point signals ........................................ 02.75 Output module for 3-point signals with manual switch (for spring-return actuators) .................................................. 02.76

NKIAU NKIAI NKIAV.. NKIAVN NKIT NKID NKIDH NKIDP NKIDPH NKIDP/8 NKIC NKOAS NKOASH NKOASA NKOAU NKOAI NKOD NKODH NKOK NKOKFH
INTEGRAL RSM Card modules
K21-02.10
1/4 en - 97 - 01
NRUA/A, NRUB/A, NRUC/A, NRUD/A

Control and interlock modules (RS card modules)
Programmable card modules for local control, interlock and energy management functions in HVAC installations. They may be used as stand-alone control and interlock modules in small to medium-sized systems for remote processing within a management system
NRUA/A NRUB/A NRUC/A NRUD/A
Types
Type Digital NRUA/A NRUB/A NRUC/A NRUD/A -8 -8 Inputs 1) Universal 8 8 16 16 Digital -8 -8 Outputs Universal 8 8 16 16
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Power consumption Intrinsic consumption with max. output load Fuse Terminal module supply voltage Output voltage Output current Signal inputs Number and type Signal outputs Number and type Product data Accuracy class Sampling rate Internal System Data protection after power fail Structures / parameters Time / date Connections Connecting cable Max. cable length Communication RS bus Transmission speed Max. cable length (RS bus) NRU../A RS bus Service terminal Technical data continued on page 2 Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % 8 VA Max. 18 VA On-board PTC thermistor To terminal module carrier DC 15 V 10 %, electrically isolated from AC 24 V Max. 500 mA See table above See table above 0.5 100 ms 0.2 4 s > 10 years > 12 months 10-pin or 20-pin ribbon cable connector to terminal module carrier 2m Electrically isolated from AC 24 V and signal outputs 9600 baud 2400 m Via service socket with 10-pin ribbon cable connector to NARB/A (NARB) adapter NBRN operator terminal for direct connection to service socket
1)
With the NMIDK multiplexer, up to 56 digital inputs can be gained at the expense of eight universal inputs and outputs (see K21-02.15).

Technical data continued from page 1 Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity 0.5 kg 30 x 262 x 200 mm In NHGB card frame EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing
K21-02.10
2/4 en - 97 - 01
This product meets the requirements for marking
Brief description
The RS card modules are programmable, microprocessor-based DDC control and interlock modules. The four types of card module are identical except for the number and type of system inputs and outputs available (see Types, page 1). Each module is capable of processing the control and interlock functions of several systems or parts of a system. Connections The card modules are connected to the peripheral devices via terminal module carriers and terminal modules. The terminal module carriers are connected to the card modules by ribbon cable. Each terminal module carrier can accommodate up to eight plug-in terminal modules. The RS card modules incorporate a socket for the RS bus and the service and operator terminals.
Construction
Essentially, the RS card modules consist of the card housing and a plug-in printed circuit board. The NGHB card housing (see K21-02.18) comprises a card frame and a base receptacle. The base receptacle accommodates the printed circuit board and is fitted with contact springs, enabling adjacent card modules to be interconnected electrically, so creating a continuous internal bus connection without the need for wiring.
Ordering information The NHGB card housing must be ordered separately.

Front plate
K21-02.10
3/4 en - 97 - 01
The printed circuit board and the front plate form a single unit. The front plate incorporates the following elements:
9E298
Top handle with labelling space Service socket / RS bus interface (Service/RS485) LEDs RS bus address switch
6 5 4 3 2 1
Connection sockets for terminal module carriers
Bottom handle with type label NRUD/A
The service socket may be used to connect any of the following: NBE remote operator terminal NBRN.. operator terminals NARB/A RS bus adapter NARC RS bus adapter with interface converter Service computer for programming and commissioning the RS module The LEDs indicate normal operation and alarm states: Green = Power on (flashes during download of software) Yellow = Communication Red = Error / Reset The address switch has 16 settings (for the maximum 16 users per RS bus). The connection sockets accommodate the ribbon cable connectors of the terminal module carriers. Each connector incorporates eight universal (analogue or digital) signal inputs or outputs. The number of connection sockets and their use varies according to the card module selected (see Types table, page 1, and diagram below). To select the correct module type, therefore, the number and of inputs and outputs and their signal type needs to be determined in advance. All the connections can be secured mechanically.
9E292 B
Service socket Inputs / Outputs

6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 digital inputs 8 digital outputs 8 universal inputs 8 universal outputs 8 universal inputs 8 universal outputs and
power supply for RS card module Associated terminal module carrier
(DI) (D0) (UI) (U0) (UI) (U0)
NTIM NTOM NTIM NTOM NTIM NTOMS
NRUA/A NRUB/A NRUC/A NRUD/A

Caution : Do not touch the PCB. Electronic components can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Handling the PCB without observing electrostatic precautions will invalidate the warranty.
K21-02.10
4/4 en - 97 - 01
Printed circuit board The printed circuit board and the front plate form a single unit which can be inserted and removed from the card housing by the two handles. When correctly in place, the front plate locks into the card frame. Service switches The PCB incorporates four DIP switches used to select the operating mode and set the baud rate.
51065
ON
1 2 3 4
DIP
RS bus
1 2 3 4 5
Baud rate and test switch Rotary address switch
OFF ON
Battery A replaceable lithium battery provides protection against data losses (battery life approx. 5 ...10 years). Battery
EEPROM EPROM Used and faulty batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations.
D 140 D 120
Front plate
Test switch setting 1

1)
Baud rate settings 3 4 ON ON OFF OFF 9600 baud 2) 4800 baud 2400 baud 1200 baud ON OFF ON OFF
2 ON Normal operation 1)
2)
Factory setting. No other settings may be used. Factory setting. Other baud rates should be used only in special circumstances (e.g. for service purposes).
ON
Mounting
The card housing may be mounted in the control panel as follows: screwed directly onto the control-panel base mounted on two DIN rails mounted in a standard 19" fixed or swivel rack See K21-10 for detailed installation instructions
K21-02.15
1/4 en - 97 - 01
NMIDK
Multiplexer 56/8
Used in conjunction with the RS card modules to increase the number of digital inputs available. The multiplexer is not suitable for time-critical applications or counting functions.
NMIDK
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Current consumption Signal inputs Number of digital inputs Sink current Signal outputs Number of digital outputs Sink current Current limitation with overvoltage Output voltage Connections Connection cable Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity From RS controller, type NRU../A DC 15 V 20 mA 56 0.125 mA per input 8 1.5 mA per output 9.5 mA "ON" : < DC 0.65 V "OFF": DC 12 V Ribbon cable to terminal module carrier and RS card module Approx. 0.5 kg 30 x 262 x 200 mm In NHGB card frame EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Electrical protection The inputs are electrically separated inside the terminal module from the power supply and the signal output.
Important: Note that the inputs gained by using the multiplexer are stored as digital calculated values in the DZ register, and not in the normal input table of the RS card module memory map.
Brief description
The multiplexer is used in conjunction with the RS card modules and provides for a maximum of 56 digital data points in place of eight universal inputs and outputs. A special SAPIM structure must be downloaded to the RS module for the multiplexer application. The disk containing this structure must be ordered separately. The multiplexer is connected to the RS module using the ribbon cable supplied (see page 3). The same cable is used for the AC 24 V power supply to the RS module. The sampling rate for inter-RS communication varies according to the SAPIM structure, up to a maximum of six seconds. (NKIC terminal modules should not, therefore be used with the NMIDK).

Connections
K21-02.15
2/4 en - 97 - 01
The connections to the peripheral devices are made via the terminal module carriers and the terminal modules. The terminal module carriers (up to a maximum of seven) are connected to the multiplexer by ribbon cable, and can each accommodate up to eight plug-in terminal modules. For NKIDP/8 terminal modules (see K21-02.55), the NTOM module carrier should be used. Each NTOM can accommodate a maximum of four plug-in modules, but no more than seven per NMIDK multiplexer. The NTOM module carriers are connected directly to the NMIDK, again by ribbon cable (see page 4). The multiplexer and the terminal modules are supplied directly with DC 15 V from the RS card module. It is therefore important to ensure that the maximum output current of the RS module (500 mA) is not exceeded. (Calculate the total intrinsic consumption of the RS module, terminal modules, multiplexer, sink currents etc.).
Construction
The multiplexer consists of the NHGB card housing (see K21-02.18) and the plug-in printed circuit board. The card housing provides the necessary mechanical support for the PCB. Front plate The printed circuit board forms a single unit with the front plate, which incorporates the connection sockets and indicators as shown below:
9H747 A
Top handle with labelling space LED

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Connection sockets 1 ... 7 (for terminal module carriers and/or NKIDP/8 modules)
Connection socket for RS card module Ordering information The NHGB card housing must be ordered separately. Bottom handle with type label
NMIDK
The yellow LED indicates normal operation. It flashes at the same rate at which the multiplexer is scanned. The ribbon cable connectors of the NTIM terminal module carriers or NKIDP/8 terminal modules are plugged into connection sockets 1 ... 7. Each connector incorporates eight signal inputs. The multiplexer is connected (again by ribbon cable) to the RS card module via the lower connection socket. This connection provides the NMIDK with the requisite DC 15 V power supply and also carries the address inputs and eight digital outputs. All connections can be mechanically secured.

Caution : Do not touch the PCB. Electronic components can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Handling the PCB without observing electrostatic precautions will invalidate the warranty.
K21-02.15
3/4 en - 97 - 01
Printed circuit board The printed circuit board incorporating the electronic circuit is combined with the front plate to form a single unit. It can be inserted and removed from the card housing using the two handles on the front plate. When correctly in place, the front plate locks into the card frame.
Mounting
For control panel installation the multiplexer can be mounted as follows: Screw the housing directly to the control-panel base Mount on two DIN/EN rails Mount on a standard 19" fixed or swivel rack See K21-10 for detailed installation instructions. Connection cable The supply cable for the RS card module is connected directly to an AC 24 V 10%, max. 1.3 A source.
RS module RS-Modul connector (UO) Stecker 1 1 (UO)
9H748
T 1,25 A T 1.25 A
AC 24 V
RS module RS-Modul connector(UI) Stecker 2 2 (UI)
NMIDK NMIDK Unterster Stecker Lowest socket
Block diagram
Max. Klemmenmodultrger von 56 data points from max. 56 Datenpunkte terminal module carrier
P
A B C D E F G
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
A2 B2 A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1
9H751
DC15 V 7 7
Multiplexer 7/1
1 1 1
From RS card module von RS-Kartenmodul
AD21 AD22 AD23
1 1 1
F7 G7
DC 15 V GND
A8 B8 C8 D8 E8 F8 G8
DC 15 V 7 7
Multiplexer 7/1
AD21 AD22 AD23
A ... G Max. 56 digital data points from the terminal module carriers 1 ... 8 8 digital data points to the RS card module AD21 ... AD23 Address inputs from the RS card module, used to control the multiplexer P Input filter Q Multiplexer 7/1 R ON/OFF switch S Signal driver
To RS card module
AD21 AD22 AD23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
zum RS-Kartenmodul
INTEGRAL RSM Card modules Connection examples

Example 1:
K21-02.15
4/4 en - 97 - 01
NMIDK multiplexer with seven NTIM terminal module carriers and a maximum of 56 NKID.. terminal modules (= 56 data points).
51130A
NTIM
7 6 6 5 4 3 2 5 4 3 2 1
NTIM
AC 24 V
NTIM NRUD/A NMIDK
NTIM
NTIM
NTIM
NTIM
Example 2:
NMIDK multiplexer with two NTOM terminal module carriers and a maximum of seven NKIDP/8 terminal modules (= 56 data points).
51131A
NTOM
7 6 6 5 4 3 2 5 4 3 2 1
AC 24 V
AC 24 V
NRUD/A NRUC/A NRUB/A NRUA/A
NMIDK
NTOM
AC 24 V
INTEGRAL RSM Kartenmodule
K21-02.18
1/1 en - 97 - 01
NHGB
Housing for card modules
NHGB
Technical data
Connections Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Spring-contacts for interconnection of adjacent card modules 0.46 kg 30 x 262 x 200 mm Snap-mounted on rail, in 19" rack or screwed to a flat surface Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing
Brief description
The card housing comprises a base receptacle and a frame. The base receptacle serves as a base for the electronic card and is fitted with contact springs which enable adjacent modules to be interconnected electrically, so creating a continuous internal bus connection without the need for wiring.
Dimensions and drilling diagram [mm]
Important: Card modules must be always be mounted vertically.
See K21-10 for detailed installation instructions.
INTEGRAL RSM Terminal module carriers
K21-02.20
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NTIM
Input module carrier
The input module carriers serve as the baseplate and power supply interface for up to eight input modules (and for transducer modules used as input modules). The NTIM incorporates a ribbon cable connector for the RS module or multiplexer and terminal connections for the peripheral devices. Suitable terminal modules: NKIAU, NKIA, NKIAI, NKIAV.., NKIT, NKID, NKIDH, NKIDP, NKIDPH, NKIC, NKDG, NKDW.
NTIM
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. voltage tolerance Power consumption Fuse Connections Cable to RS card modules Max. cable length Cable to peripheral devices Connection terminals Max. cable length Voltage against earth Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Overvoltage category Electrical safety Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % see transformer sizing, K21-11.10 F 2 A / AC 24 V Ribbon cable with 10-pin connector Approx. 2 m See "Installation", K21-11.20 Screw terminals with test socket for 1 x 4 mm2 wire See "Installation", K21-11.20 Max. 250 V 0.47 kg 220 x 95 x 48 mm Snap-mounted on rail or screwed to a flat surface EN 61010-1 2 II SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing
Caution If higher voltages than extra low voltage are connected via the NKID(H) terminal module, the coding pins supplied must be inserted into the corresponding carrier slots.
General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity
Brief description
The NTIM can accommodate any of the input terminal modules; eight carrier slots are provided for this purpose. The module carrier is connected by the ribbon cable connector to the RS module. The peripheral devices are wired to the screw terminals of the module carrier.
Construction
Essentially, the carrier consists of the following parts: Plastic base suitable for snap-on rail mounting. Printed circuit board with tracks for power supply and signal transmission; AC 24 V connection terminals, fuse and measuring terminals for DC +15 V and ground. The ribbon cable is fixed to the printed circuit board. Plastic housing with terminals for the peripheral devices, and spaces for labelling.

Important : When installing the module carrier, do not unroll the ribbon cable more than is necessary. See illustraton, K21-02.25/2
K21-02.20
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Mounting
The terminal module carrier can be mounted directly onto any surface (such as the baseplate of a control panel) or rail-mounted. See K21-10 for detailed installation instructions.
Terminal and pin layout

AC 24 V ~ L N +15 V F2A
NTIM
93.00664
SGND
+15 V
1 SGND S
10
1 2 3 4 1 2 3
2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Max. AC 250 V / 6 A with NKID(H)
K21-02.22
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NTOM
Output module carrier
The output module carriers serve as the baseplate and power supply interface for up to eight output terminal modules (and transducer modules used as output modules) or for four NKIDP/8 terminal modules. The NTOM incorporates a ribbon cable connector for the RS module or multiplexer and terminal connections for the peripheral devices. Suitable terminal modules: NKOAS, NKOASH, NKOASA, NKOAU, NKOAI, NKOD, NKODH, NKOK, NKOKFH, NKDG, NKDW, NKIDP/8.
NTOM
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. voltage tolerance Power consumption Fuse Connections Cable to RS card modules Cable length Cable to peripheral devices Connection terminals Max. cable length Voltage against earth Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Overvoltage category Electrical safety Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % see transformer sizing, K21-11.10 FF 10 A / AC 24 V Ribbon cable with 10-pin connector Approx. 2 m See "Installation", K21-11.20 Screw terminals with test socket for 1 x 4 mm2 wire See "Installation", K21-11.20 Max. 250 V 0.54 kg 220 x 95 x 48 mm Snap-mounted on rail or screwed to a flat surface EN 61010-1 2 II SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing
Caution If higher voltages than extra low voltage are connected via the NKOD(H) terminal module, the coding pins supplied must be inserted into the corresponding carrier slots.
Brief description
The NTOM can accommodate any of the output terminal modules or the NKIDP/8; eight carrier slots are provided for this purpose, of which each NKIDP/8 uses two. The module carrier is connected by ribbon cable connector to the RS module or to an NMIDK multiplexer. The peripheral devices are wired to the screw terminals of the module carrier.
Construction

Important: When installing the carrier, do not unroll the ribbon cable more than is necessary. See illustration, K21-02.25/2
K21-02.22
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Mounting
The terminal module carrier can be screwed directly onto any surface (such as the baseplate of a control panel) with two screws, or rail-mounted. See K21-10 for detailed installation instructions.

AC 24 V ~ 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 L N F10A 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
NTOM
93.00665
+15 V
1 SGND S
10
1 2 3 4 1 2 3
2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Max. AC 250 V / 6 A with NKOD(H)
K21-02.25
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NTOMS
Output module carrier with power supply for RS card modules
These module carriers serve as the baseplate and power supply interface for up to eight output terminal modules (and transducer modules used as output modules) or for four NKIDP/8 terminal modules. The module carriers incorporate a ribbon cable connector for the RS module or multiplexer and terminal connections for the peripheral devices. The NTOMS provides the supply voltage for the RS module. Suitable terminal modules: NKOAS, NKOASH, NKOASA, NKOAU, NKOAI, NKOD, NKODH, NKOK, NKOKFH, NKDG, NKDW, NKIDP/8.
NTOMS
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. voltage tolerance Power consumption Fuse Connections Cable to RS card modules Cable length Cable to peripheral devices Connection terminals Max. cable length Voltage against earth Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Overvoltage category Electrical safety Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % see transformer sizing, K21-11.10 FF 10 A / AC 24 V Ribbon cable with 20-pin connector Approx. 2 m See "Installation", K21-11.20 Screw terminals with test socket for 1 x 4 mm2 wire See "Installation", K21-11.20 Max. 250 V 0.59 kg 220 x 95 x 48 mm Snap-mounted on rail or screwed to a flat surface EN 61010-1 2 II SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing
Caution If higher voltages than extra low voltage are connected via the NKOD(H) terminal module, the coding pins supplied must be inserted into the corresponding carrier slots.
Brief description
The NTOMS can accommodate any of the output terminal modules or the NKIDP/8; eight carrier slots are provided for this purpose, of which each NKIDP/8 requires two. The module carrier is connected by ribbon cable connector to the RS module or to an NMIDK. The peripheral devices are wired to the screw terminals of the module carrier.
Construction

Important: When installing the carrier, do not unroll the ribbon cable more than is necessary. See illustration below.
K21-02.25
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Mounting
The terminal module carrier can be screwed directly onto any surface (such as the baseplate of a control panel) with two screws, or rail-mounted. See K21-10 for detailed installation instructions.

AC 24 V ~ 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 +15 V 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
NTOMS
1 2
93.00666
F10A
SGND
+15 V
SGND S
19
20
1 2 3 4 1 2 3
2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Max. AC 250 V / 6 A with NKOD(H)
Ribbon cable
Only unroll es much cable as actually needed (1) Fix the remaining roll with a cable tie (2)
INTEGRAL RSM Terminal modules
K21-02.30
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NKDG
Transducer module for DC 0 ... 10 V signals, with DC 15 V supply voltage for active peripheral devices
For use as an input module for passive sensors (e.g. T1), active sensors, setpoint adjusters etc. with suitable DC 0 ... 10 V signals1) and for signals from volt-free N/O contacts (but only in conjunction with universal signals). Also used as an output module for unisolated DC 0 ... 10 V signals. Suitable module carriers: NTIM, NTOM, NTOMS, NTIO(S).
NKDG
Technical data
Supply voltage for peripheral devices Nominal voltage Through-current Signal input Range Voltage Sink current Signal output Range Source/sink current Connections Plug-in connection Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) DC 15 V, 10 % (from module carrier) Max. 500 mA2) DC 0 ... 10 V, not electrically isolated Max. DC 15 V (no load, input open) Max. 1.5 mA with DC 0 V signal Max. 0.5 mA with DC 10 V signal DC 0 ... 10 V Max. 2 mA Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 0.04 kg 24 x 68 x 50 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
1)
Since no isolation is provided in the NKDG, not all 010 V signals are suitable.
2)
The maximum load on the complete RSM system must not exceed DC 500 mA (including the terminal module power supply).
Brief description
The NKDG transmits a DC 0 ... 10 V signal in either direction, without amplification or attenuation. The module carrier provides an additional supply voltage of DC 15 V for active sensors.
Terminal layout on module carrier

93.00618
SGND DC 0 ... 10 V DC +15 V
1 2 + 3 4
5 6 7 8
INTEGRAL RSM Terminal modules Labelling

93.00638
K21-02.30
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Block diagram
5 6 7 8 93.00667
A (9)
B (10)
DC +15 V
C (12)
NKDG
SGND Signal DC 0 ... 10 V
E (13)
P
F (14)
SGND
DC +15 V
Signal DC 0 ... 10 V
1 ... 4 5 ... 8 A ... F P
Terminals for peripheral devices Auxiliary terminals Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) EMC circuit
K21-02.35
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NKDW
Transducer module for DC 0 ... 10 V signals, with AC 24 V supply voltage for active peripheral devices
For use as an input module for passive sensors (e.g. T1) and active sensors, setpoint adjusters etc. with suitable DC 0 ... 10 V signals.1) Also used as an output module for DC 0 ... 10 V signals. Suitable module carriers: NTIM, NTOM, NTOMS, NTIO(S)
NKDW
Technical data
Supply voltage for peripheral devices Nominal voltage Through-current Signal input Range Voltage Sink current Signal output Range Source/sink current Connections Plug-in connection Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz (from module carrier) Max. 2 A DC 0 ... 10 V, not electrically isolated Max. DC 15 V (no load, input open) Max. 1.5 mA with DC 0 V signal Max. 0.5 mA with DC 10 V signal DC 0 ... 10 V Max. 2 mA Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 0.04 kg 24 x 68 x 50 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
1)
Since no isolation is provided in the NKDW, not all 010 V signals are suitable.
Brief description
The NKDW transmits a DC 0 ... 10 V signal in either direction without amplification or attenuation. The module carrier provides an additional supply voltage of AC 24 V for active sensors.

93.00619
SGND DC 0 ... 10 V AC 24 V
1 2 3 4
+ (~) L () N
5 6 7 8

93.00639
K21-02.35
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Block diagram
5 6 7 8 93.00668
N () AC 24 V L (~)
A (9)
P
B (10)
C (12)
NKDW
E (13)
P
F (14)
SGND
L (~)
N ()
AC 24 V Signal DC 0 ... 10 V
1 ... 4 5 ... 8 A ... F P
Terminals for peripheral devices Auxiliary terminals Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) EMC circuit
K21-02.40
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NKIA
Input module for DC 0 ... 10 V signals, with differential amplifier and AC 24 V supply voltage for active peripheral devices
For peripheral devices with DC 0 ... 10 V analogue outputs which are not compatible with SGND and the RS universal input. Suitable module carriers: NTIM, NTIO(S).
NKIA
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Current consumption Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier DC 15 V, 10 % Max. 3 mA
Supply voltage for peripheral devices Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from module carrier Nominal voltage AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz Through-current Max. 2 A Signal input Range Differential impedance Serial impedance Common mode voltage Signal output Bereich Source/sink current Connections Plug-in connection Product data Accuracy Temperature influence Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity DC 0 ... 10 V 100 k 100 k Max. DC 50 V DC 0 ... 10 V Max. 2 mA Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 0.5 % Typically 0.01 %/K 0.05 kg 24 x 68 x 50 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Brief description
The DC 0 ... 10 V signal from the peripheral device is converted into a proportional DC 0 ... 10 V signal for the RS module by a high-impedance differential amplifier. For active peripheral devices a supply voltage of AC 24 V is also available from the terminal module carrier. To accommodate 3-wire AC 24 V signals, the () terminal of the AC 24 V supply (Terminal 4) may be connected to the () terminal of the input signal (Terminal 1).

93.00640
51133
K21-02.40
2/2 en - 97 - 01
DC 0 ... 10 V AC 24 V
1 2 3 4
+ LS (~) NS ()
Block diagram
A (9) 51134A
NKIA
NS () AC 24 V LS (~)
B (10)
DC +15 V
C (12)
E (13)
F (14)
+ LS (~) NS () AC 24 V
DC 10 V
Note See K21-11.20, page 17 for application examples.
1 ... 4 A ... F P Q R
Connection terminals for peripheral devices Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Input impedances 100 k Auxiliary electronics with amplifier EMC protection
K21-02.42
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NKIAU
Input module for DC 0 ... 10 V signals, with electrical isolation
For peripheral devices with DC 0 10 V analogue output signals. Suitable module carriers: NTIM, NTIO(S).
NKIAU
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Power consumption Signal input Range Input impedance Signal output Range Source/sink current Connections Plug-in connection Product data Accuracy Temperature influence Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz Max. 2 VA DC 0 10 V 100 DC 0 ... 10 V Max. 5 mA Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 0.5 % Typically 0.02 %/K 0.08 kg 24 x 68 x 113 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Electrical protection The signal input is electrically isolated both from the signal output and from the supply voltage, and is immune to interference voltages up to AC/DC 50 V. AC/DC >100 V interference voltages may cause damage to the input. The RS card module and the supply voltage are protected. Differences in potential between the signal input and output and the supply voltage are admissible in the extra-low voltage range (max. 50 V).
Brief description
The DC 0 ... 10 V signal from the peripheral device is electrically isolated in the NKIAU and converted into a proportional DC 0 ...10 V signal for the RS card module.

93.00621
DC 0 ... 10 V
1 2 + 3 4
INTEGRAL RSM Terminal modules Indicators / Labelling

93.00641
K21-02.42
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Block diagram
~ AC 24 V ~
A (9)
93.00670
B (10)
R
C (12)
T SGND
E (13)
NKIAU
F (14)
Input signal indicator (green): LED Proportional display of input signal
DC 0 ... 10 V
Note The NKIAU should be used whenever electrical isolation is specified, or when the peripheral device signal is exposed to significant interference. See K21-11.20, page 17 for application examples
1 ... 4 A ... F P Q R S T
Connection terminals for peripheral devices Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Voltage/frequency converter Opto-isolator Frequency/voltage converter Electrical isolation / power supply Input signal LED
K21-02.44
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NKIAI
Input module for 0 (4) ... 20 mA signals, with electrical isolation
For peripheral devices with analogue current outputs of 0 (4) ... 20 mA. Suitable module carriers: NTIM, NTIO(S).
NKIAI
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Power consumption Signal input Range Input impedance Signal output Range Source/sink current Connections Plug-in connection Product data Accuracy Temperature influence Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz Max. 2 VA 0 ... 20 or 4 ... 20 mA (switch-selectable) 100 DC 0 ... 10 V Max. 5 mA Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 0.5 % Typically 0.02 %/K 0.10 kg 24 x 68 x 113 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Electrical protection The signal input is electrically isolated both from the signal output and from the supply voltage, and is immune to interference voltages up to AC/DC 30 V. Interference voltages above AC/DC 50 V can cause damage to the input. The RS card module and the supply voltage are protected. Differences in potential the signal input and output and the supply voltage are admissible in the extra-low voltage range (max. 50 V).
Brief description
The 0 ... 20 or 4 ... 20 mA signal from the peripheral device is electrically isolated in the NKIAI terminal module and converted into a proportional DC 0 ... 10 V signal for the RS card module. The range 020 or 420 mA can be set on the front of the module with a screwdriver.

93.00622
0 (4) ... 20 mA
1 2 + 3 4

93.00642
K21-02.44
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Block diagram
~ AC 24 V ~
A (9)
93.00671
B (10)
T
C (12)
0 ... 20 mA
D 0 ... 20 4 ... 20
V SGND
E (13)
4 ... 20 mA
NKIAI
F (14)
U I
Input signal indicator (green): LED Proportional display of input signal
0 (4) ... 20 mA
1 ... 4 A ... F P Q R S T U V
Connection terminals for peripheral devices Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Current / voltage converter Rotary switch for range selection Voltage / frequency converter Opto-isolator Frequency / voltage converter Electrical isolation / power supply Input signal LED
K21-02.46
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NKIAV..
Input module for Pt100 sensors
Suitable module carriers: NTIM, NTIO(S).
NKIAV..
Types
NKIAVA NKIAVB NKIAVC NKIAVD Measuring range Measuring range Measuring range 0 ... 100 C 0 ... 200 C 0 ... 500 C 50 C
Measuring range 50 ...
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Current consumption Signal input Resistance Sensor current Signal output Range Source/sink current Connections Plug-in connection Product data Accuracy Measuring range Temperature influence Cable resistance From terminal module carrier DC 15 V, 10 % 7 mA Pt100 (DIN 43760) DC 3 mA 5 % DC 0 ... 10 V Max. 2 mA Plugs directly into terminal module carrier < 0.15 % of measuring range (with 4-wire connection) See "Types", above 0.01 %/K Max. 400 per core (for connection of EEx i ... G5 intrinsically safe measuring circuits) 2- or 4-wire connection, twisted pairs Offset min 2 K (trim pot. on front) 0.045 kg 24 x 68 x 50 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Inside control panels 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Sensor connection Possible adjustment range Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity
INTEGRAL RSM Terminal modules Brief description
K21-02.46
2/2 en - 97 - 01
The NKIAV.. measures the resistance of the Pt100 sensor. The cable resistance (in the case of 4-wire connections) is compensated and the non-linear temperature / resistance relationship is converted into a linear DC 0 ... 10 V output signal for the RS card module.
Terminal layout on the module carrier

4-wire connection
93.00624
2-wire connection
93.00625
Important: 2-wire connections are not normally recommended, as no resistance compensation is allowed for.
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Labelling
60307
Block diagram
A (9) 93.00672
B (10)
DC +15 V
C (12)
SGND
E (13)
NKIAVA
P Signal DC 0 ... 10 V
F (14)
PT100
1 ... 4 A ... F P Q R
Connection terminals for Pt100 sensor Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Amplifier Constant current source Input filter
K21-02.47
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NKIAVN
Input module for Landis & Staefa Ni1000 sensors (-50 ... 150 C)
NKIAVN
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Current consumption Signal input Resistance element Sensor current Signal output Definition range Output range Sink current Connections Plug-in connection Product data Accuracy Measuring range Influence of temperature Sensor connection From terminal module carrier DC 15 V, 10 %, SELV 5 mA Ni1000 (Landis & Staefa) DC 2.6 mA at 0 C DC 0 ... 10 V DC 0.1 ... 10 V Max. 2 mA Plugs directly into terminal module carrier
< 0.25 % of measuring range 50 ... 150 C Typically 0.01 %/K Two-wire twisted-pair connection. Use correct wire resistance / cross-section to avoid calibration errors Calibration error due to wire resistance see diagram page 2 Possible adjustment range Offset min. 2 K (trim pot. on front) 0.045 kg 24 x 68 x 50 mm Plugs into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Inside control panels 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (w x h x d) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Important When using the NKIAVN with INTEGRAL RSA or RSC controllers, the T1 supply of the associated input must be enabled (factory setting).
Brief description
The NKIAVN measures the resistance of the Ni1000 sensor and converts it into a linear DC 0 ... 10 V signal for the RS module.
INTEGRAL RSM Terminal modules Terminal layout on the module carrier

60308
K21-02.47
2/2 en - 97 - 01
1 SGND 2 + 3 4
Labelling
60307
Block diagram
60309
A (9)
B (10)
Q DC +15 V
C (12)
10.0 V
R
+
2.91 k
SGND
NKIAVA
E (13)
P Signal DC 0 ... 10 V
F (14)
1 SGND
2 +
Ni1000
1, 2 A ... F P Q R
Connection terminals for Ni1000 sensor Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Amplifier Constant voltage source Bridge resistor
Calibration error due to wire resistance

2 d = 0.6 mm
60437
1.5
Error [K]
1 mm2
1.5 mm2 1 2 mm2 0.5
-0.5 0 100 200 300
Calibration error (Cu wire, 25 C): 4,7 /K F= 2*L 57 * A * 4.7 Error [K] Length [m] Cross section [mm2]
F L A
K21-02.48
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NKIT
Input module with trimmer, for T1 sensors
For use as an alternative to the NKDG transducer module when correction of the measured value is required (adjustment to the reference measurement). Suitable module carriers: NTIM, NTIO(S).
NKIT
Technical data
Signal input Signal output Connections Plug-in connection Product data Adjustment range Factory setting Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity T1 resistance T1 resistance with trimmer Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 4 K (= 10 turns) 0.2 K at 20 C 0.04 kg 24 x 68 x 50 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Brief description
The NKIT has a purely passive function. The nominal value can be corrected by 4 K by means of a trimmer potentiometer on the front of the module. This circuit causes a steepness error in the T1 sensor, i.e. the measured value of the T1 is accurate only at the point of adjustment (see diagram, page 2).

Important: In the case of connections to RSC and RSA controllers via the NATU adapter, the signal ground must be isolated from the power ground (DC 15 V). In such cases, therefore, terminals 3 and 4 should be used to connect the sensors, and terminals 7 and 8 for direct connection to the RSC or RSA controllers (i.e. NOT via the NATU). When used in conjunction with the NTIO (NITOS) single module carrier the connection is made via terminals 1 and 2, as for the RSM card modules. Subject to technical alteration
51136
T1 T1 *
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
* Only when used with NATU adapter (see left)

93.00643
K21-02.48
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Block diagram
93.00673 5 6 7 8
A (9)
B (10)
C (12)
NKIT
P
E (13)
F (14)
T1
T1
1 ... 4 A ... F P Q
Connection terminals for T1 sensor Connection to terminal module carrier Trimmer potentiometer EMC circuit
Notes on application
Owing to the steepness error, the NKIT should not be used where the temperature range to be measured exceeds 50 K. The module is factorycalibrated at 20 C, so that adjustment is unlikely to be needed within the room temperature range. This is not the case, however, for temperatures below 0 C or above 50 C. Because of the large steepness errors in this range, calibration is recommended even where no reference value is available. In these cases the measured value should be adjusted until the reading displayed on the NBRN-.. operator terminal has changed by the deviation shown in the diagram below.
Example The measuring range is 40 ... 90 C (i.e. the mean value is 65 C). However, because the curve is asymmetrical, the selected point of adjustment is 60 C. The temperature of the medium to be measured must be stabilised to this value before any adjustments are made. At 60 C, the diagram shows an NKIT calibration error of 1.2 K; the trimmer potentiometer should be turned clockwise (+) until the temperature display on the NBRN-.. increases from 60 C to 61.2 C. In the case of temperatures below 20 C the procedure is the same, except that the deviation is subtracted, i.e. the trimmer is turned anticlockwise ().
Abweichung vom Sollwert Deviation from setpoint
+3 K +2 K +1 K
9H164 A
Adjustment (Werkeichung) Trimmpunkt point (factory calibration)

0 1 K 2 K 3 K 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 C
Measured temperature Messtemperatur
K21-02.50
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NKID, NKIDH
Input module for digital signals
NKIDH: with manual switch. Suitable module carriers: NTIM, NTIO(S).
NKID
NKIDH
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Power consumption Signal input Ranges Input impedance Voltage against earth Signal output Type Max. load Voltage level, output activated Connections Plug-in connection Product data Input signal sampling rate Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) NKID NKIDH Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Overvoltage category Insulation Electrical safety Caution If higher voltages than extra low voltage are connected via the NKID(H) terminal module, the coding pins supplied must be inserted into the corresponding carrier slots on the terminal module carrier. General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz 0.75 VA AC / DC 6 V = Passive (output high) AC / DC 13 ... 240 V = Active (output low) 1.4 ... 56 k, dependent on voltage Max. 250 V Open collector driver DC 36 V, 5 mA 0.8 V @ 5 mA 0.4 V @ 2 mA Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 0.2 5 s (depending on processing time in RS card module) 0.045 kg 24 x 68 x 50 mm 24 x 68 x 58 mm Plugs into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 II Double insulation of input - output / supply voltage SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Brief description
The input voltage signal is electrically isolated in the NKID or NKIDH and converted into an open collector signal for the RS card module. The manual switch on the NKIDH is used to override the existing signal (for service purposes).
INTEGRAL RSM Terminal modules Terminal layout on module carrier

51138
K21-02.50
2/2 en - 97 - 01
AC / DC 15 ... 240 V
1 2 3 4
Indicators / Labelling
NKID
93.00645
Block diagrams
NKID
~ AC 24 V ~
A (9) 93.00674
~
B (10)
=
Q R P
C (12)
SGND
E (13)
NKID
F (14)
Signal
Input status (green): LED Off Low LED On High
AC / DC 0 / 15 ... 240 V
1 ... 4 A ... F P Q R S
Connection terminals for peripheral devices Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Converter (electrical isolation) Control Input status LED Auxiliary voltage
NKIDH
93.00655
NKIDH
~ AC 24 V ~
A (9)
93.00675
~
B (10)
T S
=
Q R P
C (12)
ON
OFF AUT
SGND
E (13)
NKIDH
F (14)
Signal
Input status (green): LED Off Low LED On High
AC / DC 0 / 15 ... 240 V
Manual override (red): LED On Manual override ON 1 ... 4 A ... F P Q R U T S Connection terminals for peripheral devices Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Converter (electrically isolated) Control Input status LED Auxiliary voltage Manual switch Manual status LED
Manual switch: OFF ON AUT Continuous high Continuous low Controlled by input signal
K21-02.52
1/3 en - 97 - 01
NKIDP, NKIDP/C1, NKIDPH

Input modules for digital signals from volt-free contacts
NKIDPH: with manual switch. NKIDP/C1: with signal buffering Suitable module carriers: NTIM, NTIO(S).
NKIDP NKIDP/C1 Technical data

DC supply voltage Nominal voltage Current consumption NKIDP NKIDPH AC supply voltage Nominal voltage AC Power consumption Signal input 1) Type Max. load on external contacts N/C contact N/O contact Signal output Type Max. load Active signal level Connections Plug-in connections Product data Input signal sampling rate Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) NKIDP NKIDPH Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity
NKIDPH
Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier DC 15 V, 10 % 5 mA 10 mA Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from module carrier AC 24 V Max. 0.75 VA Volt-free contact (N/O or N/C) AC 24 V, 30 mA resistive AC 24 V, 15 mA resistive Open collector driver DC 36 V, 5 mA 0.8 V @ 5 mA 0.4 V @ 2 mA Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 0.2 5 s (depending on processing time in RS card module) 0.05 kg 24 x 68 x 50 mm 24 x 68 x 58 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
1)
NKIDP/C1: Input contact (N/O). Signal buffering approx. 6 s.
Brief description
When the N/O contact is closed or the N/C contact open, the input signal is converted in the NKIDP.. into an active output signal (low) for the RS card module. When the contacts are in their normal position the output signal becomes passive (high). The manual switch on the NKIDPH is used to override the existing signal for service purposes.

Normally-open contact (N/O)
93.00627
93.00627
K21-02.52
2/3 en - 97 - 01
Normally-closed contact (N/C)

93.00628
1 2 3 4
Important: When the N/C contact is used, terminals 1 and 2 must be short-circuited with a wire link.
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
See page 3 for connection options.
NKIDP NKIDP/C1
93.00646
Block diagram
NKIDP NKIDP/C1
() AC 24 V (~)
A (9) 93.00676
B (10)
DC +15 V
C (12)
Q SGND NKIDP
E (13)
P R
F (14)
Signal
Input status (green): LED Off Passive signal input LED On Active signal input
NO
NC
1 ... 4 A ... F P Q R NC NO
Connection terminals for peripheral devices Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Converter (electrically isolated) Control Input status LED Normally-closed contact Normally-open contact

NKIDPH
93.00656
K21-02.52
3/3 en - 97 - 01
NKIDPH
() AC 24 V (~)
A (9) 93.00677
B (10)
DC +15 V
C (12)
T S
D ON
Q SGND NKIDPH
E (13)
OFF AUT
P R
F (14)
Signal
Input status (green): LED Off Passive signal input LED On Active signal input
Manual override (red): LED On OFF ON AUT Manual override ON Continuous high Continuous low Controlled by input signal 1 ... 4 A ... F P Q R T S NC NO
NO NC
Manual switch positions:
Connection terminals for peripheral devices Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Converter (electrically isolated) Control Input status LED Manual switch Manual status LED Normally-closed contact Normally-open contact
Connection options
Option 1: Two-wire connection for each data point.
93.00844
NKIDP..
1 2 3 4
Option 2:
Various data points supplied from a common source

93.00845
NKIDP.. (1)
1 2 3 4
NKIDP.. (2)
1 2 3 4
NKIDP.. (n)
1 2 3 4
Important: Option 2 is only suitable for use within one and the same RS card module. Subject to technical alteration
K21-02.55
1/3 en - 97 - 01
NKIDP/8
Input module for eight digital signals from volt-free contacts
Used primarily in conjunction with the NMIDK multiplexer. Suitable module carriers: NTOM, NTOMS.
NKIDP/8
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Power consumption Fuse Signal inputs Number and type Contact rating Signal outputs Number and type Max. load per output Active signal level Electrical connection The data points and the output signals are electrically isolated by means of opto-isolators. Connections Plug-in connection Connection cable Product data Sampling rate, input signal Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz Max. 2 VA PTC thermistor, 0.2 A 8 volt-free contacts DC 30 V, 8 mA 8 open collector drivers, DC 30 V, 2 mA 0.8 V @ 2 mA Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 10-core ribbon cable to NMIDK or NRU../A 0.2 5 s (depends on processing time in RS card module) 0.16 kg 75 x 155 x 55 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Brief description
When the N/O contact is closed, the output signal in the NKIDP/8 becomes active (low). When the N/O contact is open, the output signal is passive (high). The NKIDP/8 takes up two module spaces in the terminal module carrier.

9H755
K21-02.55
2/3 en - 97 - 01
Block diagram
93.00850
+ 1 . . . . . . 8
NKIDP/8
1 2
. . . . . .
Signal
3 4
1 Ribbon cable
SGND
200 mA
F E D C B A
~ ~
AC 24 V
1 ... 8 Connection terminals for peripheral devices A ... F Connection to terminal module carrier
Connection options
Option 1: Two-wire connection for each data point. Option 2: All data points supplied from a common source
2 4 6 8 10
1 3 5 7 9
9H757A
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
9H770A
10 9
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 F E D C B A
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 F E D C B A
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
5 6 7 8
AC 24 V
AC 24 V
INTEGRAL RSM Terminal modules Connection examples
K21-02.55
3/3 en - 97 - 01
Example 1: Direct connection to RS card module, with simultaneous use of other output modules in same module carrier.
6 5 4 3 2 1
51139
NTOM(S)
AC 24 V NRUD/A NRUC/A NRUB/A NRUA/A
Example 2: Connection via NMIDK multiplexer.

51140
NTOM
7 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
AC 24 V
Important: If the NTOM terminal module carrier contains only NKIDP/8 modules, the NTOM ribbon cable will not be needed, but must NOT be cut off. If there are output modules other than NKIDP/8 modules in the NTOM terminal module carrier, the NTOM ribbon cable must be connected to the RS card module as appropriate.
NRUD/A NRUC/A NRUB/A NRUA/A
NMIDK
NTOM
AC 24 V
INTEGAL RSM Terminal modules
K21-02.58
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NKIC
Input module for pulse counting
NKIC
Technical data
DC supply voltage Nominal voltage Current consumption AC supply voltage Nominal voltage Power consumption Signal input Active input signal Range Rating of transmitting device Division ratio 2:1 10:1 20:1 50:1 Input frequency Max. Max. Max. Max. 0.2 1.0 2.0 5.0 Hz Hz Hz Hz Passive input signal Rating External contacts Opening time Closing time Bounce time Signal output Type Max. load Active signal level Connections Plug-in connection Product data Input frequency Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier DC 15 V, 10 % 1 mA Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz Max. 0.5 VA External signal DC 1.0 V = low DC 9.5 ... 25.2 V = high DC 10 V, 3 mA DC 25 V, 20 mA Volt-free N/O contact DC 10 V, 8 mA Min. 25 ms Min. 25 ms Max. 10 ms Open collector driver DC 36 V, 10 mA 0.4 V @ 10 mA Plugs directly into terminal module carrier Varies according to division ratio (see left margin) 0.042 kg 24 x 68 x 50 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Important: The maximum input frequency depends on the size of the SAPIM structure (and hence the processing time) in the RS module. Pulses will be lost if the input frequency is too high.
INTEGAL RSM Terminal modules Brief description
K21-02.58
2/2 en - 97 - 01
The NKIC counts pulses (e.g. from a volumetric or heat meter). When a given number of pulses is reached, it transmits an electrically isolated output pulse to the RS module. The output pulse (typically 1 Hz) is then within the detection capability of the RS module. The frequency division ratio (2:1, 10:1, 20:1 or 50:1) can be selected with a switch on the front of the module. There are two possible operating modes: Passive input for auxiliary contact (as delivered from factory) Active input for external signal (for this mode, the solder jumpers at points A and B on the underside of the NKIC must be removed)

93.00629
Recommendation The input wires connected to terminals 1 and 2 should be a twisted pair.
1 2 + 3 4
Labelling
93.00647
Block diagram
~ AC 24 V ~
A (9)
93.00678
B (10)
DC +15 V
50 : 1
C (12)
20 : 1
Q SGND
E (13) 2:1 10 : 1 20 : 1 50 : 1
10 : 1
2:1
NKIC
F (14)
1 ... 4 A ... F P Q R S
Connection terminals for peripheral devices Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Open collector driver Pulse-counting electronics Opto-isolator Auxiliary input electronics
K21-02.60
1/4 en - 97 - 01
NKOAS, NKOASH
Output module for DC 0 ... 10 V signals, with high-impedance isolation
For three-wire control of peripheral devices with an AC 24 V supply voltage and a DC 0 ... 10 V signal input. NKOASH: with manual switch. Suitable module carriers: NTOM, NTOMS, NTIO(S).
NKOAS Technical data

DC supply voltage Nominal voltage Current consumption AC supply voltage Nominal voltage Power consumption Signal input Range Signal output Range Source current Sink current Connections Plug-in connection Product data Accuracy Power consumption AC 24 V (for peripheral devices) Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) NKOAS NKOASH Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier DC 15 V, 10 % 5 mA
NKOASH
Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz Max. 0.5 VA From RS card module DC 0 ... 10 V DC 0 ... 10.28 V Max. 5 mA Max. 2 mA Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 1.5 % Max. 40 W 0.045 kg 24 x 68 x 50 mm 24 x 68 x 58 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Electrical protection In the event of a wiring error, the terminal module will protect the RS card module, but may, itself, be damaged in the process.
Brief description
The DC 0 ... 10 V control signal from the RS card module is used to control the 0 10 V output signal but is effectively isolated from it in the NKOAS(H) by a high impedance amplifier, which amplifies the signal by 1.03. The DC 0 ... 10 V output signal is referenced to one side () of the AC 24 V. Hence, the conductor connected to this terminal (N or ) may be used as a common connection for the signal and the power supply for suitable 3-wire devices. Terminals 5, 6 and 7 may be used for a hard-wired safety interlock. The manual switch on the NKOASH is used for service purposes, to override the existing signal.
INTEGRAL RSM Terminal modules Terminal layout on terminal module carrier

Note: N (), terminals 1 and 3, and SGND (terminal 5) must not be interconnected.
AC 24 V
93.00630
K21-02.60
2/4 en - 97 - 01
N () L (~)
DC 0 ... 10 V
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
5/6 closed = ON (> 100 %) 5/7 closed = OFF (0 %)
NKOAS
93.00648
Block diagrams
NKOAS
SGND
5 6
ON
7
OFF
8
93.00680
N () AC 24 V L (~)
A (9)
B (10)
DC +15 V
NKOAS
C (12)
P SGND
E (13)
Output signal (green): LED Off 0 % LED On Gradual change in intensity to 100 %
F (14)
Q R
N ()
L (~)
(+) DC 0 ... 10 V
AC 24 V
NKOASH
93.00659
1 ... 4 5 ... 8 A ... F P Q R
Connection terminals for peripheral devices Hard-wired interlock Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Input amplifier Output amplifier LED for proportional output signal
NKOASH
SGND
5 6
ON
7
OFF
8
93.00681
OFF AUT
ON
NKOASH
N () AC 24 V L (~)
A (9)
B (10)
DC +15 V
C (12)
Output signal (green): LED Off 0 % LED On Gradual change in intensity to 100 %
P SGND Signal DC 0 ... 10 V

E (13)
7 Manual override (red):

LED On Manual switch positions: OFF ON AUT
F (14)
S T R Q
Manual override ON
Continuous 0 V output Continuous 10 V output Output controlled by input signal
N ()
L (~)
(+) DC 0 ... 10 V
AC 24 V
1 ... 4 Connection terminals for peripheral devices 5 ... 8 Hard-wired interlock A ... F Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) P Input amplifier Q Output amplifier R LED for proportional output signal S Manual switch T Manual override status LED
K21-02.60
3/4 en - 97 - 01
NKOASA
Output module for DC 0 ... 10 V signals, with high-impedance isolation, and without hard-wired interlock
For 3-wire control of peripheral devices with a supply voltage of AC 24 V and a DC 0 ... 10 V input signal. Suitable module carriers: NTOM, NTOMS, NTIO(S).
NKOASA
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Power consumption Signal input Range Signal output Range Source current Sink current Electrical protection In the event of a wiring error, the terminal module will protect the RS card module, but may, itself, be damaged in the process. Connections Plug-in connection Product data Accuracy Power consumption AC 24 V (for peripheral devices) Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz Max. 0.5 VA From RS card module DC 0 ... 10 V DC 0 ... 10.28 V Max. 5 mA Max. 2 mA Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 1.5 % Max. 40 W 0.045 kg 24 x 68 x 50 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Brief description
The DC 0 10 V control signal from the RS card module is used to control the 0 10 V output signal, but is effectively isolated from it in the NKOASA by a high-impedance amplifier, which amplifies the RS module signal by 1.03. The DC 0 ... 10 V output signal is referenced to one side () of the AC 24 V voltage. Hence, the conductor connected to this terminal (N or ) may be used as a common connection for both the signal negation and the power supply for suitable 3-wire devices.
INTEGRAL RSM Terminal modules Terminal layout on terminal module carrier

93.00634
K21-02.60
4/4 en - 97 - 01
N () AC 24 V L (~)
DC 0 ... 10 V
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
93.00663
Block diagram
N () AC 24 V L (~)
A (9) 93.00679
B (10)
C (12)
SGND
NKOASA
E (13)
F (14)
Q R
Output signal (green): LED Off 0 % LED On Gradual change in intensity up to 100 % 1 ... 4 A ... F Q R
N ()
L (~)
(+) DC 0 ... 10 V
AC 24 V
Connection terminals for peripheral devices Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Output amplifier LED for proportional output signal
K21-02.62
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NKOAU
Output module for DC 0 ... 10 V signals, with electrical isolation
For peripheral devices with analogue DC 0 ... 10 V inputs. Suitable module carriers: NTOM, NTOMS, NTIO(S).
NKOAU
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Power consumption Signal input Range Input impedance Signal output Range Source/sink current Connections Plug-in connection Product data Accuracy Temperature influence Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz Max. 2 VA From RS card module DC 0 ... 10 V 100 k DC 0 ... 10 V Max. 5 mA Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 0.5 % Typically 0.02 %/K 0.08 kg 24 x 68 x 113 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Electrical protection The signal output is electrically isolated from the input and from the supply voltage, and is sustained short-circuit proof (max. 30 mA). The output will be damaged (PCB fusible link) by external voltages above AC 16 V/DC 20 V. The RS module and the supply voltage are protected. Differences in potential between the output and input signal or the power supply are admissible in the extra low voltage range (max. 50 V).
Brief description
The DC 0 ... 10 V from the RS module is electrically isolated in the terminal module and converted into a proportional DC 0 ... 10 V output signal for the peripheral device.

93.00632
0 (4) ... 20 mA
1 2 + 3 4

93.00649
K21-02.62
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Block diagram
~ AC 24 V ~
A (9)
93.00682
B (10)
Q
C (12)
R S
NKOAU
E (13)
F (14)
Proportional output signal (green): LED Proportional display of output signal
DC 0 ... 10 V
1 ... 4 A ... F P Q R S T
Connection terminals for peripheral device Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Electrical isolation for power supply Frequency/voltage converter Opto-isolator Voltage/frequency converter Output signal LED
K21-02.64
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NKOAI
Output module for 0 (4) ... 20 mA signals, with electrical isolation
For peripheral devices with analogue 0 (4) ... 20 mA current inputs. Suitable module carriers: NTOM, NTOMS, NTIO(S).
NKOAI
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Power consumption Signal input Range Input impedance Signal output Range Load impedance Connections Plug-in connection Product data Accuracy Temperature influence Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz Max. 2.5 VA From RS card module DC 0 ... 10 V 100 k 0 ... 20 or 4 ... 20 mA (switch-selectable) 600 Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 0.5 % Typically 0.02 %/K 0.08 kg 24 x 68 x 113 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Electrical protection The signal output is electrically isolated from the input and from the supply voltage. It is immune to interference voltages up to AC/DC 30 V. Interference voltages above AC/DC 50 V can damage the output. The RS card module and the supply voltage are protected. Differences in potential between the output and input signal or the power supply are admissible in the extra low voltage range (max. 50 V).
Brief description
The DC 0 ... 10 V control signal from the RS card module is electrically isolated in the NKOAI and converted into a proportional 0 ... 20 or 4 ... 20 mA signal for the peripheral device. The range 0 ... 20 or 4 ... 20 mA can be selected on the front of the module by use of a screwdriver.

93.00632
0 (4) ... 20 mA
1 2 + 3 4

93.00650
K21-02.64
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Block diagram
~ AC 24 V ~
A (9)
93.00683
B (10)
Q
C (12)
0 ... 20 mA
D 0 ... 20 E (13) 4 ... 20
T U
4 ... 20 mA
SGND
NKOAI
F (14)
U I
Proportional output signal (green): LED Proportional display of output signal 1 ... 4 A ... F P Q R S T U V
0 (4) ... 20 mA
Connection terminals for peripheral device Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Electrical isolation for power supply Voltage/frequency converter Opto-isolator Frequency/voltage converter Rotary switch for range selection Voltage/current converter Output signal LED
K21-02.70
1/3 en - 97 - 01
NKOD, NKODH
Relay terminal module
NKODH with manual switch. Suitable module carriers: NTOM, NTOMS, NTIO(S).
NKOD
NKODH
Technical data
DC supply voltage Nominal voltage Current consumption AC supply voltage Nominal voltage Power consumption Signal input Range Input impedance
1)
Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier DC 15 V, 10 % Max. 10 mA Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz Max. 0.75 VA From RS card module DC 0 ... 10 V 100 k Relay contact 1) Max. AC 250 V Max. 6 A resistive Max. 2 A inductive (cos 0,4) Min. admissible load: 1 mA at DC 1 V 2) Max. 250 V Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 0.045 kg 24 x 68 x 50 mm 24 x 68 x 58 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 II Input output double insulated SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
The relay contacts are made of AgCdO or AgNi, with a 5 m hard-gold plating. This type of contact is suitable for switching both low level signals (>1 mA/>1 V) and large loads (see maximum load data). Applies to contact in new condition.
Signal output Contact rating
Voltage against earth Connections Plug-in connections Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) NKOD NKODH Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Overvoltage category Insulation Electrical safety
2)
Caution Relays which have been used for large loads must not subsequently be used for low level signal switching.
Caution If higher voltages than extra low voltage are connected via the NKOD(H) terminal module, the coding pins supplied must be inserted into the corresponding carrier slots on the terminal module carrier.
General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity

Note When the NKOD or NKODH is used to switch inductive loads (e.g. contactor coils), suitable suppression may be necessary.
K21-02.70
2/3 en - 97 - 01
Brief description
The DC 0 ... 10 V from the RS card module is electrically isolated in the NKOD or NKODH and switches the relay on and off to control the peripheral devices: Signal DC 1 V Off Signal DC 2.4 V On A power-on delay prevents the relay from energising for the first five seconds after the DC 15 V supply has been established. This is necessary because the digital output drive signals only assume their correct status approximately two seconds after RS card module power-up. Terminals 5, 6 and 7 may be used for a hard-wired interlock circuit. The manual switch on the NKODH overrides the hard-wired interlock.

93.00635
1 2 3 4
SGND ON OF F
5 6 7 8
NKOD
93.00653
Block diagrams
NKOD
93.00684
SGND
5 6
ON
7
OFF
8
(~) AC 24 V (~)
A (9)
B (10)
R
C (12)
DC +15 V
NKOD
S Q SGND
E (13)
Output signal (green): LED Off Contact 1 3 closed LED On Contact 1 2 closed
F (14)
DC 0 ... 10 V P
1 ... 4 5 ... 8 A ... F P Q R S
Connection terminals for peripheral devices Hard-wired interlock Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Input amplifier with power-on delay Opto-isolator Relay Output signal LED

NKODH
93.00660
K21-02.70
3/3 en - 97 - 01
NKODH
SGND
5 6
93.00685
ON
7
OFF
8
(~) AC 24 V
ON
A (9)
(~)
B (10)
OFF AUT
DC +15 V
NKODH
C (12)
T
D
U Q S
SGND
E (13)
Output signal (green): LED Off Contact 1 3 closed LED On Contact 1 2 closed
F (14)
DC 0 ... 10 V P
Manual override (red): LED On OFF ON AUT Manual override ON

1 2 3 4
Manual switch: Contact 1 3 closed Contact 1 2 closed Controlled by RS controller 1 ... 4 5 ... 8 A ... F P Q R S T U
Connection terminals for peripheral devices Hard-wired interlock Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Input amplifier with power-on delay Opto-isolator Relay Output signal LED Manual switch Manual override LED
K21-02.75
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NKOK
Output module for 3-point signals
Suitable module carriers: NTOM, NTOMS, NTIO(S).
NKOK
Technical data
DC supply voltage Nominal voltage Current consumption AC supply voltage Nominal voltage Power consumption Signal input Range Signal output Signal Output current Connections Plug-in connection Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier DC 15 V, 10 % 36 mA Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz Max. 25 VA (peripheral devices only) From RS card module DC 0 ... 10 V AC 24 V Max. 1.0 A resistive Max. 0.4 A inductive (cos 0,4) Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 0.055 kg 24 x 68 x 50 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Brief description
The DC 0 ... 10 V signal from the RS card module switches the relay for the positioning actuator via the interlock in the NKOK. Signal DC 2 V CLOSED AC 24 V at terminals 1 and 3 Signal DC 3.5...7 V No output Signal DC 9.5 V OPEN AC 24 V at terminals 1 and 2 Terminals 5, 6 and 7 may be used for a hard-wired interlock circuit.

93.00636
1 2 3 4
SGND ON OF F
5 6 7 8

93.00654
K21-02.75
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Block diagram
93.00686
SGND
5 6
ON
7
OFF
8
N () AC 24 V L (~)
NKOK
A (9)
S OPEN
B (10)
P T Q R
CLOSED
DC +15 V
C (12)
Output signal (green): LED On Closed Output signal (green): LED On Open
E (13)
F (14)
r q
OPEN AC 24 V AC 24 V
CLOSED
1 ... 4 5 ... 8 A ... F P H, Z R S
Connection terminals for peripheral device Hard-wired interlock circuit Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Control Relays LED for output signal "Open" LED for output signal "Closed"
K21-02.76
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NKOKFH
Output module for 3-point signals for spring return actuators
With manual switch. Suitable module carriers: NTOM, NTOMS, NTIO(S).
NKOKFH
Technical data
DC supply voltage Nominal voltage Current consumption AC supply voltage Nominal voltage Power consumption Intrinsic consumption Signal input Range Signal output Signal Output current Connections Plug-in connection Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety Note If the NKOKFH is driven by a controller for 3-wire devices (staefa classic, staefa desigo30, staefa integral RSA and RSC) with a connection between NS () and GND, the NKOKFH must be supplied from a separate transformer which must not be earthed on the secondary side. General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier DC 15 V, 10 % 20 mA Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from terminal module carrier AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz Max. 25 VA Max. 2 VA From RS controller DC 0 ... 10 V AC 24 V Max. 1.0 A resistive Max. 0.4 A inductive, (cos 0.4) Plugs directly into terminal module carrier 0.06 kg 24 x 68 x 58 mm Plugged into terminal module carrier EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Inside control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Brief description
The DC 0 ... 10 V signal from the RS module switches the relays for the positioning actuator via the interlock in the NKOKFH. Signal DC 2 V CLOSED AC 24 V at terminals 1 and 3 Signal DC 3.5 ... 7 V No output Signal DC 9.5 V OPEN AC 24 V at terminals 1 and 2 The magnet for the spring return is activated when the AC 24 V and DC 15 V supply voltages are connected to the module. Terminals 5 and 8 must be linked for this purpose. Terminals 5, 6 and 7 may be used for a hard-wired interlock circuit. The manual switch is used to override the existing signal for service purposes.

93.00637
K21-02.76
2/2 en - 97 - 01
1 2 3 4
SGND ON OF F
5 6 7 8
Indication / Labelling
93.00661
Block diagram
93.00687
SGND
5 6
ON
7
OFF
8
ON
N () AC 24 V L (~)
NKOKFH
A (9)
X ~+ ~ P
V U
OFF AUT
B (10)
DC +15 V
C (12)
S Q R OPEN CLOSED T
Input signal (green): LED On Closed Input signal (green): LED On Open
E (13)
F (14)
Manual override (red): LED On Manual override ON

1 2
Manual switch: OFF Closed ON Open AUT Controlled by RS controller
OPEN CLOSED MAGN AC 24 V AC 24 V AC 24 V
1 ... 4 5 ... 8 A ... F P Q,R S T U V W X
Connection terminals for peripheral device Hard-wired interlock Connection to terminal module carrier (9 ... 14: NTIO) Control Relays LED for "OPEN" output signal LED for "CLOSED" output signal Manual switch Manual override LED Relay for hold-in coil Rectifier
K21-03
INTEGRAL RSC
INTEGRAL AS1000 INTEGRAL RSC
K21-03.01
1/1 en - 97 - 01
Contents
Compact controllers NRUE/A NRUF/A NRUT../A Control and interlock devices ................................................... 03.10 NRD24/A Control and interlock device ...................................................... 03.20
INTEGRAL RSC Compact controllers
K21-03.10
1/5 en - 97 - 01
NRUE/A, NRUF/A (NRUT../A)

Control and interlock devices
Programmable compact devices for local control, interlock and energy management functions in HVAC systems. They may be used for stand-alone control and interlock functions remote processing within a management system Particularly suitable for packaged solutions, such as air-conditioning units for laboratories or computer rooms etc.
NRUE/A NRUF/A
Types
Type Digital NRUE/A NRUF/A NRUT../A Electrical protection The digital inputs are electrically isolated from each other, from the auxiliary power supply and from the signal outputs. Variations in voltage are acceptable in the extra low voltage range. The digital inputs are protected against overvoltages up to AC/DC 50 V. Higher voltages will damage the input (fusible link). The analogue inputs can withstand overvoltages up to AC 30 V/DC 40 V. Higher voltages will damage the input (protection module). Subject to certain limitations, the analogue outputs are short-circuit proof (max. 50 mA): One output: Sustained short-circuit protection. Two or more outputs simultaneously: The short-circuit protection is subject to a time limit (< 1 minute) after which thermal damage will ensue. Important: For direct connection of AC 24 V 3-wire peripheral devices, "GND" and "NS" () must be connected. Inputs1) Universal Digital Outputs Analogue
8 8 10 6 8 16 16 8 NRUE/A + NITEL.. built-in communication module (see manual NT21)
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Power consumption Without output peripherals With output peripherals Fuse Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % Max. 12.5 VA Max. 20 VA T4A
Supply voltage for output peripheral devices Output voltage DC 15 V 10 %, electrically isolated from AC 24 V Output current Max. 300 mA Signal inputs 2) Digital inputs Number Range Universal inputs 3) Number Use Input impedance Signal outputs 2) Digital outputs Number Type Contact rating Voltage against earth Analogue outputs Number Range Source/sink current
See table above Low < AC/DC 6 V High = AC/DC 15 ... 45 V 10 %, Ri = 4 k See table above Can be structured as T1, DC 0 ... 10 V, digital volt-free or NMID connection Ri (pull-up resistor) = 10 k to DC +15 V or 100 k to GND (change-over facility, see p. 3)
See table above Volt-free normally open contact Max. AC/DC 45 V + 10 %, max. 2 A Max. AC/DC 45 V + 10 % See table above DC 0 ... 10 V Max. 2 mA
1)
The NMID multiplexer enables four digital inputs to be connected to a universal output. (see K21-06.55). Up to eight multiplexers may be connected to the NRUE/A and 16 to the NRUF/A. 2) When connecting peripheral devices with special input or output signals (e.g. Pt100, phase cut or 3-position signals), the NTIO (NTIOS) single module carrier or an NATU adapter can be used. (See K21-06.50 and K21-06.52). 3) The T1 supply voltage cam be disabled at some inputs (see page 3). Subject to technical alteration
Product data Accuracy class 0.5 Sampling rate Internal 100 ms System 0.2 ... 4 s Data protection after power failure Structures and parameters > 10 years Time / date > 12 months Technical data continued on page 2

Technical data continued from page 1 Connections Connection terminals Cable type and length Communication RS bus Transmission rate Max. cable length (RS bus) NRU../A RS bus connection Service terminal Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity
K21-03.10
2/5 en - 97 - 01
Screw terminals for 1.5 mm2 cable or 2.5 mm2 wire See installation instructions, K21-11.20 Electrically isolated from AC 24 V and signal outputs 9600 baud 2400 m From service socket via 10-core ribbon cable to NARB/A adapter NBRN operator terminal plugged directly into service socket 4 kg 265 x 292 x 100 mm Vertical; screwed to a flat surface EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Brief description
The RS compact controllers are programmable microprocessor-controlled DDC control and interlock devices. The only difference between the two hardware models is the type and number of system inputs and outputs available (see table, page 1). Both controllers are capable of processing the control and interlock functions of several systems or subsystems. Connections The peripheral devices, power supply and the RS bus are connected directly via the two-part connectors on the side of RS compact controller (see page 4, Terminal layout). The RS compact controllers incorporate a socket for the service and operator terminals. Mounting The RS compact controllers can be mounted directly on any flat surface (e.g. the base plate of a control panel) using four screws. See K21-10 for detailed mounting instructions.
INTEGRAL RSC Compact controllers Construction
K21-03.10
3/5 en - 97 - 01
Basically, the RS compact controller consists of a metal housing and printed circuit boards. The housing comprises a base with a cover and accommodates the RS card and either one or two I/O cards, depending on type. These are fitted with two-part connectors along the side of the housing for direct connection of the peripheral devices. The service socket, also on the side of the housing, may be used to connect any of the following: NBE remote operator terminal NBRN.. operator terminal NARB/A RS bus adapter NARC RS bus adapter and interface converter A service PC for programming and commissioning the RS controllers
Display and labelling The following LEDs indicate operating and alarm states: Green = Power on (flashes duning download of software) Yellow = Communication Red = Error / Reset Various labelling spaces are provided (e.g. for module address, number and type of inputs and outputs etc.). Printed circuit boards The NRUE/A accommodates the RS card and one I/O card, both of which are mounted on the housing base. A steel plate screens the RS card from the relays and facilitates the routing of the ribbon cable connections. The NRUF/A incorporates a second I/O card, mounted inside the housing cover. Opening the controller see K21-10.20, p.14. Service switches There are four DIP switches on the RS card for setting the baud rate and the operating mode. For access to these switches the cover must be removed. The rotary switch used to address the compact controller can be adjusted by inserting a screwdriver through the aperture on the right-hand side of the cover. This hole is sealed with an easily-removable plastic plug.
Caution: Do not handle PCBs. Electronic components can be damaged by electrostatic charge.
Battery A replaceable lithium battery provides protection against loss of data (battery life approx. 5 years).
Jumpers T1 supply voltage
51066
D120 D140
EPROM EEPROM
Used and faulty batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations.
Battery
Rotary address switch Baud rate and test switch
1 2 3 4
ON OFF
PCB (RS card)
ON DIP

Factory setting. No other settings may be used. 2) Factory setting. Other baud rates should be used only in special circumstances (e.g. for service purposes).
1)
K21-03.10
4/5 en - 97 - 01
Test switch settings 1 ON 2 ON Normal operation

1)
Baud rate codes 3 ON OFF ON OFF 4 ON ON OFF OFF 9600 baud 2) 4800 baud 2400 baud 1200 baud
Addressing the compact modules Switch setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Switch setting 8 9 A B C D E F Address 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Disabling the T1 supply voltage The pull-up resistors (Ri = 10k) for the T1 supply voltage can be disabled individually at inputs A (UI101) to H (UI08) with jumpers X1 to X8. This process is required whenever devices are connected which are unable to sink current.
SAPIM structure for NRUF/A When creating the SAPIM structure for an NRUF/A compact controller, note that any devices not capable of sinking current must be connected to inputs UI01 to UI08.
The jumpers are located on the printed circuit board (see page 3) and cannot be adjusted without opening the controller housing. When delivered from the factory, the jumper settings are such that the T1 supply voltage is enabled. To disable the T1 supply, each jumper must be moved one position to the left.
51067
Inputs and jumpers Input Jumper A UI101 X1 B UI102 X2 C UI103 X3 D UI104 X4 Input Jumper F UI05 X5 G UI06 X6 H UI07 X7 I UI08 X8
X.. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Caution The incorrect positioning of jumpers can give rise to offset voltages when active signal transmitters are connected (failure to reach a zero-point).
View of part of PCB: In this example, apart from X5 and X6 (T1 supply OFF) all the jumpers are shown in their factory-set position.
0 ...10 V
T1
INTEGRAL RSC Compact controllers Terminal layout

BUS RS
K21-03.10
5/5 en - 97 - 01
NRUE/A
51142
01 02 03 () +15 GND 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
RSG RS1 RS2 LS (~) AC 24 V NS () DC 15 V / 300 mA
NBRN Service 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 + + + + A B C D A
E + F + G H
Universal inputs
DC 0 ...10 V max. 2 mA
Analogue outputs
+ B + C + D + + F + G + H + E I J
24 V
T1
DC 0 ...10 V (H2/P2)
Digital
NMID
I J K L
Digital outputs
Inputs A 1/2 ... H 1/2 I 1/2 ... P 1/2 Outputs A 3/4 ... F 3/4 G 3/4 ... H 3/4 I 3/4 ... P 3/4
Software addresses UI01 ... UI08 DI01 ... DI08 Software addresses UO01 ... UO06 UO07 ... UO08 1) DO01 ... DO08
Max. AC/DC 50 V max. 2 A
K L
M N O P
M N O P
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Low < AC/DC 6 V High = AC/DC 15 ... 45 V 10 %
Digital inputs
BUS RS
NRUF/A
51143
01 02 03 () +15 GND 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
RSG RS1 RS2 LS (~) AC 24 V NS () DC 15 V / 300 mA
NBRN Service 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 + + + + + + + + A B C D A
Analogue outputs
Universal inputs
DC 0 ...10 V max. 2 mA
+ B + C + D + + F + G + H + E I J K
24 V
T1
DC 0 ...10 V (H2/P2)
E F G H
Digital
NMID
I J K L
Inputs A 1/2 ... H 1/2 I 1/2 ... P 1/2 I 5/6 ... P 5/6 Outputs A 3/4 ... H 3/4 I 3/4 ... P 3/4 I 7/8 ... P 7/8
Software addresses UI01 ... UI08 DI01 ... DI08 UI09 ... UI16 Software addresses UO01 ... UO08 DO01 ... DO08 UO09 ... UO16 1)
Max. AC/DC 50 V max. 2 A
Digital outputs
Digital outputs
Digital inputs
Universal inputs
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
I J K L
+ J + K + L + I M N O P + + + +
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
M N O P
M N O P
M N O P
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Low < AC/DC 6 V High = AC/DC 15 ... 45 V 10 %
1)
Must be structured as time-proportioning or DO.
K21-03.20
1/3 en - 97 - 01
NRD24/A
Control and interlock device
Programmable, compact device for local control, interlock and energy management functions in HVAC systems. The NRD24/A may be used for stand-alone (control and interlock remote process control Suitable for use as a 24-input digital data-gathering outstation, as an outstation for the gernation of common alarms, and for integration into management systems.
NRD24/A
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Power consumption Signyl inputs Number Type Important: 1) The operation of the inputs is opposite to that of NKIDP and NRU.. . External contact rating Min. puls length for acquisition N/C contacts N/O contacts Signal buffering Signaloutputs Switch outputs Contact rating Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % Max. 12 VA 24 Digital, controlled by volt-free contacts (N/O or N/C) 1) AC 24 V, approx. 8 mA ca. 5 s 100 ms ca. 2 ... 4 s 2 volt-free change-over contacts Max. AC 250 V Max. 5 A resistive Max. 2 A inductive (cos 0,4) Min. admissible load: 10 mA at DC 5 V Max. 250 V Red LED indicator, can be structured in application software
Voltage against earth Signal output
Product data Sampling rate Depends on structure (typically 250 ms) Data protection after power failure Structures / parameters > 10 years Time / date > 12 months Connections Connection terminals Inputs Outputs, supply and RS bus Cable type and dimensions Inputs Outputs, supply and RS bus Communication RS bus Transmission speed Max. cable length (RS bus) NRD24/A RS bus connection
Plug-in screw terminals, 1.5 mm2 Plug-in screw terminals, 2 x 1.5 mm2 Max. 100 series resistance (e.g. A = 0,75 mm2 Lmax = 1900 m) See installation instructions, K21-11.20 Electrically isolated 9600 baud (fixed) 2400 m Tor RS bus terminals or from service socket via 10-core ribbon cable to NARB/A adapter NBRN/A hand-held terminal (plugs directly tino into service socket) 0,825 kg 160 x 170 x 52 mm
Service terminal Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (B x H x D)
Technical data continued on page 2
Technische nderungen vorbehalten

Technical data continued from page 1 Mounting Safety Product safety Overvoltage category (for circuits at switch outputs) Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity
K21-03.20
2/3 en - 97 - 01
Snap-mounted on rail (EN50022-35 x 7,5) or screwed to a flat surface EN 61010-1 II 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Inside control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rH, non-condensing This product meets the requirement for marking
Brief description
The NDR24/A is a freely programmable, DDC microprocessor-based (control and) interlock device, ideally used for the processing of digital signal. The controller can accommodate 24 digital signals, controlled via external volt-free N/C or N/O contacts. Due to the buffering of the inpout signals, preference should be given to the use of N/O contacts. The controller also has two volt-free outputs and one LED signalling output, al lof which can be freely structured. The NDR24/A is structured with the same software (SAPIM or staefa plan) as other controllers, interfaces etc. in the INTEGRAL RS range, and is fully compatible with these devices. Connections Inputs and outputs, supply voltae and the RS bus are connected directly to the NDR24/A by screw terminal blocks (see page 3, Terminal layout). A connector socket (Service) is available for service and operator terminals. For safety, the SAPIM of INTEGRAL PLAN structure should be downloaded from an unearthed service computer.
Mounting
The controller can be snap-mounted on a DIN rail (type EN50022-35 x 7.5) of fixed to al flat surface (e.g. a control panel base) with four screws. See K21-10.20 for detailed mounting instructions
Mechanical construction
Essentially the NDR24/A consists of a two-part metal housing incorporating the plug-in connection terminals. The upper connection terminals are designed for the inputs, and the lower terminals for the output, supply voltage and RS bus. To avoid damage to the terminal pins, it is recommended that a screwdriver should be used when unplugging the upper terminals (see mounting instructions, K21-10.20). The service socket can accommodate any of the following: NBE remote operator terminal NBRN.. operator terminal NARB/A adapter for RS bus RS bus adapter with NARC interface converter Service computer (not earthed) for structuring and commissioning of the RS controller
INTEGRAL RSC Compact controllers Display / Addressing
K21-03.20
3/3 en - 97 - 01
The LEDs under the transparent cover indicate normal opration and errors (see part view of PCB below): Info (red) Freely structurable signal output Power (green) Power on (flashes in software download mode) TxRS (yellow) Communication Error (red) Error indicating failure of processor self-test The RS bus address of the NNDR24/A (1 ...16) is set on the rotary switch located under the transparent cover. Part-view of PCB (under transpartent cover):
Caution Do not handle the PCB. Electronic components can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Red LED Info
60188
Info LED
9 1 1
13
15
1
3
Battery A replaceable lithium battery provides protection against loss of data (battery life 5 ...10 years). Red LED Battery Green LED Error Power on Yellow LED TxRS RS bus address
Used and faulty batteries must ebe disposed of in accordance with local regulations.
Register allocation for SAPIM structure

Inputs A ... Q R ... Z Outputs Y1 Y2 Info Input register addresses UI01 ... UI16 DI01 ... DI08 Output register addresses UO01 UO02 UO03
Terminal layout
Digital inputs
1 2
60189
9 Caution
Refer to the technical data relating to relay outputs Y1 and Y2: AC 250 V / 5 (2) A.
A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Z 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Service
RS1RS2 60 61 62
60
61
62
NBRN Service socket
RS-Bus
max.250V AC24V Y1 71 72 73 Y2 76 77 78 TE LS NS 80 81 82
71
72
73
76
77
78
80
81
82
Output Y1
Output Y2
Power supply
K21-04
INTEGRAL RSA
INTEGRAL AS1000 INTEGRAL RSA
K21-04.01
1/1 en - 97 - 01
Contents
Application controllers NRK16../A, (NRK14-T../A) NRK9/A Control and interlock devices ....................... 04.10 Control and interlock device ........................ 04.20
INTEGRAL RSA Application controllers
K21-04.10
1/8 en - 97 - 01
NRK16/A, NRK16-B/A, NRK16-B1/A (NRK16-T../A, NRK14-T../A)

Control and interlock devices
Application controllers with pre-programmed system-specific application modules. The controllers may be used as stand-alone control and interlock devices for remote process control within a management system Especially suitable for use in small heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems.
NRK16/A (with NSA)
NRK16-B (with NSA) NRK16-B1/A
Types
NRK16/A NRK16-B/A NRK16-B1/A NSA Electrical protection The power supply is overload-protected with a PTC thermal element. All DC voltages are electrically isolated from the AC 24 V input. All the inputs are protected against overvoltage (max. AC/DC 45 V). Low-pass filters prevent fluctuations in measurement. All outputs are sustained short-circuit proof. High frequency interference is suppressed by means of filters, or in the case of capacitive interference, discharged via the (earthed) housing or the TE terminal (functional earth). Important: For direction connection of AC 24 V 3-wire peripheral devices, "GND" and "NS" () must be connected. NRK16-T../A NRK14-T../A Application controller with ten universal inputs1) and two analogue, two digital and two combined outputs Like NRK16/A, but with panel for simple local operation Like NRK16-B/A, but with temperature display in F Application modules, varying according to country or region, for plugging into base units NRK16/A + NITEL integrated communications module for a maximum of three additional devices (see manual NT21) Like NRK16-T../A, but without analogue outputs (see manual NT21)
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Power consumption Without output peripherals With output peripherals Fuse Supply voltage for peripheral devices and remote operator terminal Output voltage Output current Signal inputs 2) Universal inputs 3) Number Use Input impedance Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % 3 VA Max. 12 VA Thermal element (PTC)
DC 15 V 10%, electrically isolated from AC 24 V Max. 150 mA
101) Can be structured as T1, DC 0 ... 10 V, digital volt-free, or for connection of NMID Ri (pull-up resistor) = 10 k to DC +15 V or 100 k to GND (change-over, see p. 5) Can be structured as T1, DC 0 ... 10 V, min. 1.5 sink, digital volt-free contacts, or for NMID Ri (pull-up resistor) = 10 k to DC +15 V
1)
The NMID multiplexer enables four digital inputs to be connected to a universal output. (see K21-06.55). Up to eight multiplexers may be connected to the NRUE/A and 16 to the NRUF/A. 2) When connecting peripheral devices with special input or output signals (e.g. Pt100, phase cut or 3-position signals), the NTIO (NTIOS) single module carrier or an NATU adapter can be used. (See K21-06.50 and K21-06.52). 3) The T1 supply voltage can be disabled at the inputs (see page 5)
Remote control input Use Input impedance Technical data continued on page 2

Battery In the event of a power failure, data is protected against loss by a replaceable lithium battery (service life approx. 5 ...10 years). Technical data continued from page 1 Signal outputs 2) Digital outputs Number Signal Source current Analogue outputs Number Range Source/sink current Combined outputs Number Type Digital/analogue relationship Remote control output Range Source current Sink current Product data Accuracy Sampling rate Internal Structure Data protection after power failure Structures and parameters Time / date 4) Adjustable values in NRK16-B/A4) NSA application module Connections Connection terminals Cable type and length Communication RS bus Transmission speed Max. cable length (RS bus) NRK16../A connection to RS bus Service terminal Weight excluding packaging NRK16/A NRK16-B/A NSA application module Dimensions (W x H x D) NRK16../A NSA application module Mounting
K21-04.10
2/8 en - 97 - 01
2 DC 0 / 24 V, 20 / +15 % Max. 50 mA 2 DC 0 ... 10 V Max. 2 mA 2 One terminal with a digital and one with an analogue output (see data above) High > 50 %, low < 30 % of analogue signal DC 0 ... 10 V Max. 10 mA Max. 3 mA Class 0.5 100 ms 0.2 4 s > 10 years > 12 months Equivalent to battery life EEPROM Type 28C64 2.5 mm2 screw terminals See installation instructions, K21-11.20 Electrically isolated from AC 24 V and signal outputs 9600 baud 2400 m From service socket via 10-core ribbon cable to NARB/A adapter NBRN operator terminal; plugs directly into service socket 1.15 kg 1.25 kg 0.06 kg 162 x 252 x 52 mm 24 x 59 x 49 mm Snap-mounted on DIN rails or screwed to a flat surface; NRK16-B/A installed in control panel front with the Z402 mounting kit EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
4)
Applies to permanently plugged-in application modules
Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Use Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity
INTEGRAL RSA Application controllers Brief description
K21-04.10
3/8 en - 97 - 01
The RSA controllers are microprocessor-based DDC controllers comprising a base unit and a plug-in application module. Each plug-in application module contains an EEPROM preprogrammed with a given application chosen from a wide range of heating, ventilation and air conditioning applications. The application modules are held in application libraries in the various national and regional Staefa offices. They can be selected according to the system and plugged into the base unit. The engineering required is thus minimal, and since suitable default settings are provided for setpoints, parameters etc., commissioning is extremely easy.
Note: SAPIM (Structure and Parameter Identification Menu) is a programming language developed by Staefa Control System for the programming of control and interlock modules. It consists of a wide range of basic functions (software modules) which can be combined to create all the structures required.
If no suitable standard solution is available, a program for the specific application can be designed in SAPIM and downloaded to the module from a PC. At the same time, the application modules are freely programmable, so that if no suitable standard solution is available, a program can be designed in SAPIM and downloaded to the module from a PC. The EEPROM also holds the NBRN-modifiable setpoints, parameters and time programmes but not the setpoints from the local operator panel of the NRK16-B/A.
92.00157
Construction
Essentially, the base unit consists of a metal housing and printed circuit board. The housing comprises a base and a cover, and accommodates the PCB and two-part plug-in connection terminals. These terminals are accessible at the top and bottom of the housing, so that peripheral devices can be connected directly without removing the cover plate. Additional terminals and a 10-pin ribbon cable connector are provided for the power supply, operator terminal and RS bus communication (see page 5, Connection diagram and suitable devices). The cover plate incorporates an aperture for the plug-in application module, a rotary switch for setting the RS bus address and three LEDs: Green (power): Yellow (Tx RS): Red (error) Power supply / basic test (on = OK) Normal operation / RS bus communication (flashing = OK) Error
The NRK16-B/A incorporates additional elements for control and display (see page 7).
INTEGRAL RSA Application controllers Mounting and dimensions [mm]
K21-04.10
4/8 en - 97 - 01
The base unit can be fixed with four screws directly onto any surface, or snap-mounted on two rails. If mounting rails are used, proceed as follows: 1. Fix the top rail 2. Fit the bottom rail to the base unit and snap-mount the unit onto the top rail 3. Fix the bottom rail The terminal connections are grouped in blocks, making for easy wiring without the need to remove the unit cover.
149
92.00156
243
162
52
92.00158
Caution: The application module is a staticsensitive component. Before inserting or removing the module, the base unit must be disconnected from the power supply. Do not touch the contact pins in the base unit.
252
203
59
49
125
15
Opening the controller 1. Ensure that the necessary EMC precautions have been taken. 2. Undo the four cross-head screws between the terminal blocks. 3. Carefully lift off the cover. For the NRK16-B/A: Press the four white plastic clips together with pliers, carefully release the pcb for the display and operating unit, and pull upwards. Observe similar precautions when re-assembling the controller, paying special attention to the fibre optic cables of the LEDs and the extension of switch S100.
Caution: Do not touch the PCB. Electronic components can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Handling the PCB without observing electrostatic precautions will invalidate the warranty.
24
K21-04.10
5/8 en - 97 - 01
Connection diagram and suitable peripheral devices

T1 digital DC 0 ... 10 V (min. 1,5 mA sink)
NMID
+
+15 GND
Remote control
GND +15
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
92.00160EN
+ + + + + 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
+ + + + + 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
+ + + 1 2 4 6
A
UI01
B
UI02
C
UI03
D
UI04
E
UI05
F
UI06
G
UI07
H
UI08
I
UI09
J
UI10
K
UI11 UO07
AC DC 24 V 15 V L N EE (+) ()
SAPIM I/O number
SAPIM I/O number

UO03 UO01 UO02 UO04 UO05 UO06
Service
3 4 3 4 3 4 5 3 4 5 3 5 3 5 + + + + + + + + 3 = COMMON 4 = DC 0 ... 10 V 5 = digital (DC 0 / 24 V)
Notes: 1. The digital outputs (C, D, E and F) are active-type outputs, DC 0 or 24 V (max. 50 mA). 2. Outputs C and D may be used as both digital and analogue outputs. The digital (24 V) signal switchs on when the analogue output is > 5 V, and off when it is < 3 V. 3. Other input and output types may be connected via the NTIO adapter and suitable input or output modules.
3 4
L N S S
NBRN
(RS485)
AC 24 V 1 23 4
ZM100
Relay, 24 VDC
Suitable peripheral devices (examples) T1 ZM100/A NTIO NATU NMID
GND +15
Documentation S1-02 S1-05.49 K21-06.50 K21-06.52 K21-06.55
Sensors with T1 measuring elements Teminal housing for DC 0 ... 10 V valves Single terminal module carrier Adapter for special signals Multiplexer (to increase the number of digital inputs)
Room operating units, see page 6 Disabling the T1 supply voltage The pull-up resistors (Ri = 10 k) for the T1 supply voltage can be disabled individually at inputs A (UI01) to J (UI10) with jumpers X310 to X420. This process is required whenever devices are connected which are unable to sink current. The jumpers are located on the PCB and can only be adjusted by opening the controller housing. When shipped, the jumpers are positioned to the left (T1 supply ON). To disable the T1 supply, they must be repositioned to the right.
51068A
Inputs and jumpers Input A UI01 B UI02 C UI03 D UI04 E UI05 Jumper X310 X320 X330 X340 X350 Input F UI06 G UI07 H UI08 I UI09 J UI10 Jumper X360 X370 X380 X410 X420
UI01 ... UI05 X301
UI06 ... UI10 X302
Caution The incorrect positioning of jumpers can give rise to offset voltages when active signal transmitters are connected (failure to reach a zero-point).
X310
X320
X330
X340
X350
X360
X370
X380
X410
View of part of the PCB: In this example, apart from X350 and X360 (T1 supply OFF) all the jumpers are shown in their factory-set position.
X420
INTEGRAL RSA Application controllers Operation and service
K21-04.10
6/8 en - 97 - 01
The controller can be operated by various means: Remotely, from a room operating unit Via the RS bus, with an operator terminal or PC NBRN-.. operator terminal or service PC for service and commissioning NRK16-B/A for simple local operation (see page 7) Remote operation Connection terminals K1, K2, K4 and K6 are provided for remote operation from a type KR.. room operating unit. The PB.. operating units should be connected to universal inputs A..J. Suitable room operating units KRT-1B Room temperature measurement Room temperature setpoint adjustment Mode selection (AUT, ON or OFF) Heating time extension (by 1, 2 or 4 hours) KRT-1L Room temperature measurement Room temperature setpoint adjustment Mode selection (AUT, ON or OFF) Holiday mode extension (by 1, 2 or 3 days) KRU-1 Room temperature measurement Mode selection (AUT, ON or OFF) Timer module with independent time function PBA PBC Room temperature measurement Room temperature setpoint adjustment Room temperature measurement Room temperature setpoint adjustment Digital display of room temperature Documentation
S1-03.03
S1-03.04
S1-03.09 S1-03.54
S1-03.56
See the relevant documentation for maximum cable lengths Operation via RS bus Since the controller is compatible with the RS bus, it can be operated remotely from any of the following devices: NBE remote operator terminal (see K21-05.18) NBRN-.. operator terminal (see K21-05.10 and 12) From a PC running the INTEGRAL DIALOG service software, connected via the NITEL.. communications module (see K21-07.30) Where the INTEGRAL RS system is integrated into a higher-level system, the controllers can also be operated as follows: In a INTEGRAL MS2000 building management system: with the Vision and Access application software In a INTEGRAL TS1500 remote buildings management system: from the RC1500A/B management station (or MC1500 mobile management station) In the INTEGRAL MS1000 in-house management system from the RC1500C management station Service and commissioning For service and commissioning purposes an NBRN-.. terminal or a PC can be connected directly to the service socket on the controller. The same socket is used to download an application-specific SAPIM program from a suitable PC (not required for pre-programmed modules). User manuals The following user manuals are available for the operator software described above: K23 NBRN.. operator terminals K8 INTEGRAL DIALOG E38 INTEGRAL MS2000 T23 INTEGRAL TS1500 N23 INTEGRAL MS1000 M5 INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE
Important: For communication on the RS bus, the controller must be assigned the appropriate address, by use of the rotary switch on the cover plate. (Factory-setting: Address 1). Up to 16 controllers may be connected on one RS bus (max. length 2400 m).
INTEGRAL RSA Application controllers Simple local operation with the NRK16-B/A
K21-04.10
7/8 en - 97 - 01
The cover plate of the NRK16-B/A incorporates facilities for direct operation. The functions of the selectable display and switches are defined by the application module selected.
92.00159
1 Rocker switches 2 Four-digit 7-segment LED display 3 Display-selector keys, from top: Measured value 1 Measured value 2 Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 4 Channel LEDs corresponding to selector keys 5 <+> and <> for setpoint entry
Each rocker switch has three positions with functions which vary depending on the application module used. The allocation of the two setpoints and two measured values also depends on the application. These four values can be displayed in the four-digit LED display panel by use of the appropriate selector key. The setpoints can be modified with the <+> and <> keys; these also operate as repeating keys when continuously depressed. Each of the four values is associated with one of the red channel LEDs. With some applications, the setpoints can have upper and lower limits, adjustable from an operator terminal. Temperature display in F with NRK16-B1/A The NRK16-B1/A allows a local temperature indication in degrees Fahrenheit instead of Centigrade. The unit of temperature is defined by the settings of the SAPIM input parameters for the corresponding input registers UI.. (see table below). When using the "Standard" definition ranges (e.g. in existing SAPIM structures) F are shown on the local LED display, but not on the NBRN operator terminal. The use of "Universal" definition ranges allows a display in F on both the local display and the NBRN. Unit of temperature display SAPIM parameters of corresponding inputs Definition ranges Code Definition ranges Measuring range Unit of measurement UI.. "S" T1 "U" 31 35 Local LED display F F NBRN C F
K21-04.10
8/8 en - 97 - 01
LED function test Depressing the two lower selector keys simultaneously should cause all segments of the display panel and the channel LEDs to light up.. Alarm handling Subject to the application selected, the display panel can also be used to indicate alarms. A code between A1 and A9 can be displayed (A1A8 for alarms defined in accordance with the application, and A9 for a common alarm). The operation of the controller is not affected by the presence of an alarm. While the measured value or setpoint is displayed, the associated channel LED will flash, i.e. the alarm remains active. The alarm code can be displayed again by pressing the two upper selector keys simultaneously. Incorporation in specific applications Full details of the additions to the software required to incorporate each of the above features in specific applications are available on request.
K21-04.20
1/5 en - 97 - 01
NRK9/A
Control and interlock device
Application controller with pre-programmed system-specific application modules (NSA). The controllers may be used as stand-alone control and interlock devices for remote process control within a management system Especially suitable for use in small heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems. NRK9/A (with NSA)
Types
NRK9/A NSA Application controller with five universal inputs1) and two analogue and two combined outputs Application modules, varying according to country or region, for plugging into base unit
Technical data
Electrical protection The supply voltage is overload-protected with a PTC thermal element. All DC voltages are electrically isolated from the AC 24 V input. All inputs are protected against overvoltage (max. AC/DC 45 V). Low-pass filters prevent fluctuations in measurement. All outputs are sustained short-circuit proof. High-frequency interference is suppressed by means of filters, and in the case of capacitive interference, discharged via the (earthed) housing or the TE terminal (functional earth). Important For direct connection of AC 24 V 3-wire peripheral devices, 'GND' and 'NS' () must be connected. Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Power consumption Without output peripherals With output peripherals Fuse Supply voltage for peripheral devices and remote operator terminal Output voltage Output current Signal inputs 2) Universal inputs 3) Number Use Input impedance Signal outputs 2) Analogue outputs Number Range Source/sink current Combined outputs Number Type Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % 3 VA Max. 12 VA Thermal element (PTC)
DC 15 V 10%, electrically isolated from AC 24 V Max. 150 mA
5 1) Can be structured as T1, DC 0 ... 10 V, digital volt-free, or for connection of NMID Ri (pull-up resistor) = 10 k to DC +15 V or 100 k to GND (change-over, see p. 4)
2 DC 0 ... 10 V Max. 2 mA 2 One digital and one analogue output per terminal Analogue DC 0 ... 10 V, max. 2 mA Digital DC 0 / 24 V, 20 /+15 %, max. 50 mA High > 50 %, low < 30 % of analogue signal Class 0.5 100 ms 0.2 4 s > 10 years > 12 months EEPROM Type 28C64
1)
The NMID multiplexer enables four digital inputs to connected to one universal input (see K21-06.55). The function is integrated with a structure macro. 2) The NTIO (or NTIOS) single module carrier or a NATU adapter (see K21-06.50 and K21-06.52) are provided for use when connecting peripheral devices with special input or output signals (e.g. Pt100, phase cut or 3-point signals etc.) 3) The T1 supply voltage can be disabled at the inputs (see page 4). 4) Applies to permanently plugged-in modules.
Digital/analogue relationship Product data Accuracy Sampling rate Internal Management system Data protection after power failure Structures and parameters Time / date 4) NSA application module Technical data continued on page 2

Battery In the event of a power failure, data is protcted against loss by a replaceable lithium battery (service life approx. 5 ...10 years). Technical data continued from page 1 Connections Connection terminals Cable type and length Communication RS bus Transmission speed Max. cable length (RS bus) NRK9/A connection to RS bus Service terminal Weight excluding packaging NRK9/A NSA application module Dimensions (W x H x D) NRK9/A NSA application module Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Use Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity
K21-04.20
2/5 en - 97 - 01
2.5 mm2 screw terminals See installation instructions, K21-11.20 Electrically isolated from AC 24 V and signal outputs 9600 baud 2400 m From service socket via 10-core ribbon cable to NARB/A adapter NBRN operator terminal; plugs directly into service socket 1.15 kg 0.06 kg 162 x 252 x 52 mm 24 x 59 x 49 mm Snap-mounted on DIN rails or screwed to a flat surface EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
51069
Brief description
The RSA controllers are microprocessor-based DDC controllers comprising a base unit and a plug-in application module. Each plug-in application module contains an EEPROM preprogrammed with a given application chosen from a wide range of heating, ventilation and air conditioning applications. The application modules are held in application libraries in the various national and regional Staefa offices. They can be selected according to the system and plugged into the base unit. The engineering required is thus minimal, and since suitable default settings are provided for setpoints, parameters etc., commissioning is extremely easy. If no suitable standard solution is available, a program for the specific application can be designed in SAPIM and downloaded to the module from a PC.
Construction
Essentially, the base unit consists of a metal housing and printed circuit board. The housing comprises a base and a cover, and accommodates the PCB and two-part plug-in connection terminals. These terminals are accessible at the top and bottom of the housing, so that peripheral devices can be connected directly without removing the cover plate. Additional terminals and a 10-pin ribbon cable connector are provided for the power supply, operator terminal and RS bus communication (see page 5, Connection diagram and suitable devices). The cover plate incorporates an aperture for the plug-in application module, a rotary switch for setting the RS bus address and three LEDs: Green (power): Yellow (Tx RS): Red (error)
Power supply / basic test (on = OK) Normal operation / RS bus communication (flashing = OK) Error
INTEGRAL RSA Application controllers Mounting and dimensions [mm]
K21-04.20
3/5 en - 97 - 01
The base unit can be fixed with four screws directly onto any surface, or snap-mounted on two rails. If mounting rails are used, proceed as follows: 1. Fix the top rail 2. Fit the bottom rail to the base unit and snap-mount the unit onto the top rail 3. Fix the bottom rail The terminal connections are grouped in blocks, making for easy wiring without the need to remove the unit cover.
149
51070
243
162
52
51071
252
203
59
49
125
15
Caution: The application module is a staticsensitive component. Before inserting or removing the module, the base unit must be disconnected from the power supply. Do not touch the contact pins in the base unit.
Opening the controller 1. Ensure that the necessary EMC precautions have been taken. 2. Undo the four cross-head screws between the terminal blocks. 3. Carefully lift off the cover. Observe similar precautions when re-assembling the controller, paying special attention to the fibre optic cables of the LEDs and the extension of switch S100.
Caution: Do not touch the PCB. Electronic components can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Handling the PCB without observing electrostatic precautions will invalidate the warranty. Subject to technical alteration
24
K21-04.20
4/5 en - 97 - 01
Connection diagram and suitable peripheral devices

T1 digital DC 0 ... 10 V
NMID
+
+15 GND
GND +15
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
+ + + + + 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
51072
A
UI01
B
UI02
C
UI03
D
UI04
E
UI05
SAPIM I/O-Nummer
UO01 UO02 UO03 UO04
Service
AC DC 24 V 15 V L N TE (+) ()
GND +15
3 4 3 4 3 4 5 3 4 5 + + + + + + 4 = DC 0 ... 10 V 5 = digital (DC 0 / 24 V)
3 4
LS NS
NBRN
(RS485)
3 4
ZM100
Relais
Notes: 1. Outputs C and D may be used as both digital and analogue outputs. The digital (24 V) signal switches on when the analogue output is > 5 V, and off when it is < 3 V. 2. Other input and output types may be connected via the NTIO adapter and suitable input or output modules.
Suitable peripheral devices (examples) T1 ZM100/A NTIO NATU NMID
Documentation S1-02 S1-05.49 K21-06.50 K21-06.52 K21-06.55
Sensors with T1 measuring elements Teminal housing for DC 0 ... 10 V valves Single terminal module carrier Adapter for special signals Multiplexer (to increase the number of digital inputs)
Room operating units, see page 6 Disabling the T1 supply voltage
Inputs and jumper Input A B C D E UI01 UI02 UI03 UI04 UI05 Jumper X310 X320 X330 X340 X350
The pull-up resistors (Ri = 10 k) for the T1 supply voltage can be disabled individually at inputs A (UI01) to E (UI05) with jumpers X310 to X350. This process is required whenever devices are connected which are unable to sink current. The jumpers are located on the PCB and can only be adjusted by opening the controller housing. The controllers are shipped with the jumpers positioned to the left (T1 supply ON). To disable the T1 supply they must be repositioned to the right.
UI01 ... UI05 X301
Caution:
X310 X320 X330
The incorrect positioning of jumpers can give riste offset voltages when active signal transmitters are connected (failure to reach a zeropoint).
View of part of the PCB: In this example, apart from X350 (T1 supply OFF) all the jumpers are shown in their factory-set position.
X340
X350
INTEGRAL RSA Application controllers Operation and service
K21-04.20
5/5 en - 97 - 01
The controller can be operated by various means: Via the RS bus, with an operator terminal or PC NBRN-.. operator terminal or service PC for service and commissioning Operation via RS bus Since the controller is compatible with the RS bus, it can be operated remotely from any of the following devices: NBE remote operator terminal (see K21-05.18) NBRN-.. operator terminal (see K21-05.10 and 12) From a PC running the INTEGRAL DIALOG service software, connected via the NITEL.. communications module (see K21-07.30) Where the INTEGRAL RS system is integrated into a higher-level system, the controllers can also be operated as follows: In a INTEGRAL MS2000 building management system: with the Vision and Access application software In a INTEGRAL TS1500 remote buildings management system: from the RC1500A/B management station (or MC1500 mobile management station) In the INTEGRAL MS1000 in-house management system from the RC1500C management station Service and commissioning For service and commissioning purposes an NBRN-.. terminal or a PC can be connected directly to the service socket on the controller. The same socket is used to download an application-specific SAPIM program from a suitable PC (not required for pre-programmed modules). User manuals The following user manuals are available for the operator software described above: K23 NBRN.. operator terminals K8 INTEGRAL DIALOG E38 INTEGRAL MS2000 T23 INTEGRAL TS1500 N23 INTEGRAL MS1000 M5 INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE
Important: For communication on the RS bus, the controller must be assigned the appropriate address, by use of the rotary switch on the cover plate. (Factory-setting: Address 1). Up to 16 controllers may be connected on one RS bus (max. length 2400 m).
K21-04.20
6/5 en - 97 - 01
K21-05
Operation and service
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation and service
K21-05.01
1/1 en - 97 - 01
Contents
Operation with communication on the RS bus NBRN-.. NBRNA-.. NBE INTEGRAL DIALOG and INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE Operator terminal .......................................... 05.10 Operator terminal .......................................... 05.12 Remote operator terminal ............................. 05.15 Service software ............................................. 05.30
Room operating units without communication on the RS bus Overview: KRT-1S, KRT-1L, KRT-1B, KRU-1, PBA, PBC ................................ 05.40
K21-05.10
1/4 en - 97 - 01
NBRN-..
Operator terminal
For service and operation of RS controllers PRONTO interfaces PRONTO ICR individual room controllers The NBRN-.. has three operating levels.
NBRN-..
Types
NBRN-DEFR NBRN-DEIT NBRN-DKNO NBRN-ESEU NBRN-ESGB NBRN-FISE NBRN-FRNL NBRN-GBJP
1)
Language options
German and French German and Italian Danish and Norwegian Spanish and Basque Spanish and English Finnish and Swedish French and Dutch English and Japanese English with Icelandic character set English and Portuguese English and Spanish
With US date format: MM.DD.YY
NBRN-IS NBRN-PTGB NBRN-USES1)
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Power consumption Connection Ribbon cable Length Communication RS bus Operator terminals per bus Transmission speed Product data Display panel Operating levels Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % 6 VA 10-core, connected directly to RS controller or via NARB/A or NABBS/A to RS bus 2m
16 9600 baud 4-line LCD display; 20 characters per line 3 (Op. levels 2 and 3 protected by code) 0.7 kg 119 x 201 x 40 mm In control panel front or wall-mounted EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) For indoor use 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation and service Brief description
K21-05.10
2/4 en - 97 - 01
Note The display panel and keypad are described in detail in the user manual K23, which also contains step-by-step operating instructions. A condensed instruction leaflet is enclosed with the device.
The NBRN-.. can be used to perform all the essential functions associated with operation and service, including the following: Switch plant on and off manually Read measured values Adjust setpoints Modify parameters Programme summer/winter time change Programme and adjust switch times Interrogate and acknowledge alarms Reset run-time totalisers Operating philosophy The NBRN-.. is operated in an interactive process via the keypad and display panel. The display is alphanumeric and the languages available are defined by the type code (see page 1, Types). The keypad incorporates a small number of clearly marked keys. Each key always operates according to the same principle, irrespective of the operating step. The <Info> key can be used at any stage to invoke more information on the current operation. Operation is menu-based in the sense that the operator is always presented with a range of options from which to choose. Each line in the display is associated with one of four menu keys (<A> for line A, etc); pressing the relevant key leads to the next step in the process. The operator is thus guided step by step through a tree-like structure, leading finally to tables of data. Here, the operator can enter new data, and read, modify or delete existing data, as required. Menu structure The system incorporates three tree structures for operation: NBRN-.. configuration (see page 3, NBRN-.. menu tree) Operation of the RS controllers (see page 3, RS controller menu tree) Operation of the pronto interface and the staefa pronto individual room controllers (see page 4, NIPRO menu tree) Operating levels and access authorisation
Op.level assigned while structuring

= Values
Access with NBRN-.. set to op. level 1, 2 and 3

1
To prevent the use of the NBRN-.. for unauthorised operation of the plant, access is protected by three hierarchical operating levels. Operating level 1 allows unrestricted access, while operating levels 2 and 3 can be protected against unauthorised access by use of a three-digit code. The menu items and working values are assigned to the chosen operating level when the modules are structured. When the operator terminal is set at a given operating level, then only values structured at that level or a lower operating level will be displayed.
Construction
The NBRN-.. is supplied in a robust plastic housing, suitable for mounting in various ways. The front plate incorporates the following: LCD display panel: alphanumeric, liquid crystal display for max. 80 characters. Tables of data with more than four lines can be displayed by scrolling the data with the appropriate function keys. The illuminated display ensures legibility even in poor light. Communication LED to indicate communication on the data bus Alarm LED indicating external (RS controllers) or internal (self-test) alarms. The <Buzzer> key can be used to switch off the audible alarm system. If no audible alarms are required, the yellow jumper on the PCB should be set to Off.
K21-05.10
3/4 en - 97 - 01
Keypad, comprising four menu keys (marked with the same letters as the four corresponding lines in the display window) and 14 function keys. The condensed operating instructions can be stored in a slot provided for this purpose at right-angles to the front plate. A 2 m plug-in ribbon cable is provided, to connect the devices or adapters which can be operated from the NBRN-.. terminal. An additional service cable connecting the NBRN-.. and RS controller is available as Part No. Z237.
NBRN-.. menu tree

NBRN-.. menu
9F062 B
RS controller menu tree

NRU.. menu
9F061 A
Op. levels
Operating level 1 Operating level 2 Operating level 3
Alarm flags
Common alarm 1 Common alarm 2
Measure d values
Inputs
Universal Digital
Language
English Japanese
Outputs Universal Digital
Addres s Baud rate 9600 4800 2400 1200
Manual override of outputs
Universal Digital Analogue Digital
Bus inputs
Bus outputs
Analogue Digital
Clock
Date/time/manual
Switch times
Read/Modify
7-day programme
All All from..
Date programme
All All from..
Exception programme
All All from..
Write
7-day programme Date programme

Exception programme
Delete all
7-day programme Date programme

Exception programme
Summer time change
Manual Automatic
Operating mode Operating mode parameters Setpoints Analogue Digital Parameters Analogue Digital Calculated values Analogue Digital Run-time totalisers
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation and service NIPRO menu tree

NIPRO menu
9H259 B
K21-05.10
4/4 en - 97 - 01
pronto part
RS part
Trunk 1
Trunk communication
To controller From controller
Alarm flags
Measured values
Controller 1
Controller data Remote control Data internal Remote control data external Parameters
Controller mode
Clock Setpoints Parameters

Calculated values
Controller 60
Trunk 2 Status
Mounting
A case (type code NHEB) is available for the operator terminal. Alternatively, where required, the NBRN-.. can be mounted as follows: Install in control panel door (use wire bracket supplied) Wall-mounting (with mounting accessory Z400) See K21-10 for detailed mounting instructions.
K21-05.12
1/4 en - 97 - 01
NBRNA-..
Operator terminal
For operation of RS controllers PRONTO interfaces PRONTO IRC individual room controllers
NBRNA-..
Types
NBRNA-DE NBRNA-GB NBRNA-FR NBRNA-IT NBRNA-ES NBRNA-DK German English French Italian Spanish Danish
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Power consumption Connection Ribbon cable Length Communication RS bus Operator terminals per bus Transmission speed Product data Display panel Operating levels Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % 6 VA 10-core, connected directly to RS controller or via NARB/A or NABBS/A to RS bus 2m
1 9600 baud 4-line LCD display; 20 characters per line 1 0.7 kg 119 x 201 x 40 mm In control panel front or wall-mounted EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) For indoor use 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation and service Brief description
K21-05.12
2/4 en - 97 - 01
The NBRNA-.. can be used to perform all the essential functions associated with operation, including the following: Switch plant on and off manually Read measured values Adjust setpoints Modify parameters Programme summer/winter change-over Programme and adjust switch times Interrogate and acknowledge alarms The simple operating philosophy ensures that a user can operate the plant confidently without extensive training. Operating philosophy The NBRNA-.. is operated in an interactive process via the keypad and display panel. The display is alphanumeric and the languages available are defined by the type code (see page 1, Types). The keypad incorporates a small number of clearly marked keys. Each key always operates according to the same principle, irrespective of the operating step.
Note The display panel and keypad are described in detail in the user manual K23, which also contains step-by-step operating instructions. A condensed instruction leaflet is enclosed with the device.
Operation is menu-based in the sense that the operator is always presented with a range of options from which to choose. Each line in the display is associated with one of four menu keys (<A> for line A, etc); pressing the relevant key leads to the next step in the process. The operator is thus guided step by step through a tree-like structure, leading finally to tables of data. The operator can enter new data in these tables, and read, modify or delete existing data, as required. Menu structure The system incorporates two tree structures for operation: Operation of the RS controllers (see page 3, RS controllers menu tree) Operation of the pronto interface and the staefa pronto individual room controllers (see page 4, NIPRO menu tree) Operating levels and access authorisation The NBRNA-.. has one operating level, allowing access to all menu items configured at operating level 1 in the RS controllers software (SAPIM).
Construction
The NBRNA-.. operator terminal is accommodated in a robust plastic housing, suitable for mounting in various ways. The front plate incorporates the following: LCD display panel: alphanumeric, liquid crystal display for max. 80 characters. The illuminated display ensures legibility even in poor light. Communication LEDs to indicate communication on the data bus Alarm LEDs indicating external (RS controllers) or internal (self-test) alarms. The <Buzzer> key can be used to switch off the audible alarm system. If no audible alarms are required, the yellow jumper on the PCB should be set to Off. Keypad, comprising four menu keys (marked with the same letters as the four corresponding lines in the display window) and eight function keys. The condensed operating instructions can be stored in a slot provided for this purpose at right-angles to the front plate. A 2 m plug-in ribbon cable is provided, to connect the devices or adapters which can be operated from the NBRNA-.. terminal.
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation and service RS controller menu tree

NRU.. menu
93.00697
K21-05.12
3/4 en - 97 - 01
Alarm flags
Common alarm I
Common alarm II
Measured values
Inputs
Universal Digital
Outputs
Universal Digital
Manual override of outputs
Universal Digital
Bus inputs
Analogue Digital
Bus outputs
Analogue Digital
Clock
Date/time/manual
Switch times
Read/Modify
7-day programme
All All from...
Date programme
All All from...
Exception progr.
All All from...
Write
7-day programme Date programme Exception progr.
Delete all
7-day programme Date programme Exception progr.
Summertime change-over
Manual Automatic
Operating mode Operating mode parameters Setpoints Analogue Digital Parameters Analogue Digital Calculated values Analogue Digital
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation and service NIPRO menu tree

NIPRO menu
9H259 B
K21-05.12
4/4 en - 97 - 01
pronto part
RS part
Trunk 1
Trunk communication
To controller From controller
Alarm flags
Measured values
Controller 1
Controller data Remote control Data internal Remote control data external Parameters
Controller mode
Clock Setpoints Parameters

Calculated values
Controller 60
Trunk 2 Status
Mounting
A case (type code NHEB) is available for the operator terminal. Alternatively, where required, the NBRNA-.. can be mounted as follows: Install in control panel door (use wire bracket supplied) Wall-mounting (with mounting accessory Z400) See K21-10 for detailed mounting instructions.
K21-05.15
1/6 en - 97 - 01
NBE
Remote operator terminal
For remote operation of INTEGRAL AS1000
NBE
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Power consumption Fuse Connections Connection terminals Communication RS bus Transmission speed Max. cable length (RS bus) Service socket Product data Display Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % Max. 2.5 VA PTC thermistor 1.5 mm2 screw terminals
Electrical protection The AC 24 V input is protected by a PTC thermistor, which acts as a safety device if the connected voltage is too high or the device is faulty. The RS bus is electrically isolated from the AC 24 V supply voltage. A PTC thermistor protects the bus inputs at the terminals up to AC/DC 24 V in the event of incorrect connection.
9600 baud 2400 m 6-pin telephone-type socket, (with Z406 for NBRN-.. connection) 4-digit LCD 0.34 kg 89 x 176 x 31 (41) mm Installed in control panel front or wall-mounted EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) For indoor use 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Brief description
The NBE remote operator terminal can be used to display various states of an HVAC system and to modify the system functions. The NBE is linked to the RS bus, enabling the user to interrogate data from an RS controller. The controller to which access is required (the "target controller") must be defined at the commissioning stage. The display elements and indicators comprise: 1 4-digit LCD display window 1 alarm LED (red) 4 status LEDs (green) The operator controls consist of: 1 potentiometer 4 push-keys Different functions can be assigned to the display and control elements and indicators depending on how the NBE is configured.

Standard configuration
K21-05.15
2/6 en - 97 - 01
The NBE is delivered in a pre-configured and labelled state. The standard configuration incorporates the following display and control functions: The display window shows the measured value from register location UZ01 of controller 1. The potentiometer operates as a setpoint adjuster, acting on US01, controller 1. The alarm LED shows the status of alarm register DY11, module 1. The keys are configured as step switches, acting on register location US03, module 1 (4 steps), The LEDs are correspondingly controlled by register locations DZ0104, controller 1. The appropriate SAPIM macro must be incorporated in the user program of the target controller. This configuration can be used, for example, to control a simple ventilation system. System-specific configuration Where a configuration other than the standard configuration is required, the relevant functions are defined in SAPIM in the application program of the target controller. The data points and registers to which the NBE has access are stored in the NBE. Should it be necessary to change the configuration, the relevant parameters in the NBE can be redefined with the NBRN-.. (see page 4, Parameter adjustment). The LCD window normally displays a measured value. However, the NBE parameters can be set so that when the setpoint is adjusted, it is temporarily displayed in the LCD window (see Parameter list, page 5).
Construction
The NBE operator terminal consists of a two-part plastic housing. The upper section houses the electronic components and the display, indication and control elements, while the base accommodates the connection terminals.
93.00251
C Alar m
Auto 0 1 2
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation and service Labelling
K21-05.15
3/6 en - 97 - 01
An adhesive label on the NBE front plate indicates the functions of the control elements and indicators. On delivery, the label fitted matches the standard configuration. Blank labels (Part No. Z405) are available for remote operator terminals with other, system-specific, configurations.
93.00252
93.00253
Alarm
Auto
Label with standard legend (supplied)
Blank labels Part No. Z405 (10 labels on single DIN A4 sheet)
Mounting
Important: When separating the two sections of the housing, keep them parallel to avoid damaging the internal connectors.
The NBE is suitable for wall-mounting or for installation in a control panel door. For mounting purposes, the two parts can be separated with a screwdriver. Mount and wire the base first. The upper section containing the electronic components can then be replaced. See K21-10 for detailed mounting instructions.
Connection diagram
Terminals 1... 7 are not connected.
51146
T E
TE 8 9 AC 24 V 10 SHD 11 RS1 12 RS2 13 RSG 14
AC 24 V
RS1 RS2
Twisted pairs
See K21-11.20 for RS bus cable specification.
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation and service Parameter adjustment
K21-05.15
4/6 en - 97 - 01
The parameters in the NBE can be adjusted via the NBRN-.. operator terminal. For this purpose the NBRN-.. is either plugged directly into the NBE via a Z406 adapter (see below) or connected to the RS bus in the control panel via the NARB/A.
93.00255
Alarm
Auto
An NBRN-.. connected to the NBE has access to all devices on the same RS bus.
NBE engineering
Tree structure in NBRN-..
Default values 17 NBE BL0004 Adress NBE Target RSModule LCD / LEDs 31 NBE-Addr. 1 RS-Addr.
94.0185A
1 LCD
: DP
1 LED 1 : DP 2 LED 2 : DP 3 LED 3 : DP 4 LED 4 : DP 1 LED-A : REG 1 LED-A : DP 1 Alarm Mode POTI / KEYs 2 POTI : DP 1 KEY 1 : DP 0 KEY 1 : TYP 1 KEY 2 : DP 0 KEY 2 : TYP 1 KEY 3 : DP 0 KEY 3 : TYP 1 KEY 4 : DP 0 KEY 4 : TYP POTI Resolution 1.0 Resolution
SetPoint on LCD
off Display 3 MainSP : DP 0 MainSP : TYP
Access Access to the NBE tree structure is only available at operating level 3.
32 NBE BL0004
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation and service Parameter list

LCD display
93.00256
K21-05.15
5/6 en - 97 - 01
t 1 poin t 1 poin
C
93.00496
Alarm LED LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4
Setpoint adjuster Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Setpoint resolution / point
Alarm
Auto
Description
Reference on NBRN-.. NBE address RS address : DP
Default value 31 1 1 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1.0 Off 3 0
Valid range 17... 32 1...16 1... 99 (UZ) 0 ... 99 (DZ)

2) 2)
Current value ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................
93.00497
NBE address 1) Address of target RS controller
LCD display (measured value) LCD Status LED1 Status LED2 Status LED3 Status LED4 Alarm LED
LED 1 : DP LED 2 : DP LED 3 : DP LED 4 : DP LED-A : REG LED-A : DP Alarm mode POTI : DP KEY 1 : DP KEY 1 : TYP KEY 2 : DP KEY 2 : TYP KEY 3 : DP KEY 3 : TYP KEY 4 : DP KEY 4 : TYP Resolution Display MainSP : DP MainSP : TYP
0 ... 99 (DZ) 02)... 99 (DZ) 02)... 99 (DZ) 1... 2 (DY1. ... DY2.) 02)... 8 (DY.1 ... DY.8) 1... 2 02)... 99 (US) 02)... 99 (US / DS) 0 = US /1 = DS 02)... 99 (US / DS) 0 = US /1 = DS 02)... 99 (US / DS) 0 = US /1 = DS 02)... 99 (US / DS) 0 = US /1 = DS
Setpoint adjuster Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Setpoint resolution / point LCD display (setpoint) Basic setpoint
0.5 ... 50.0 (Steps of 0.5) ................ Off / On 1... 99 (US / UZ) 0 = US /1 = UZ
Alarm mode
Active alarm
................ ................ ................
DP = Data point REG = Register DS DZ DY US UZ

1
Alarm no longer active
= = = = =
Digital setpoint Digital calculated value Alarm memory Universal setpoint Universal calculated value
Mode 2 Mode 1
Alarm LED on Alarm LED on
) It takes approximately 2 minutes for a change in the NBE address to be displayed on the NBRN-.. terminal. Reg. 0: Function not required; no access to RS controller
Alarm condition occurs
Alarm condition no longer present
Alarm acknowledged
2)
INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation and service General notes on NBE engineering
K21-05.15
6/6 en - 97 - 01
Definition ranges 24, 25, 26, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 49 and 53 cannot be displayed. (The LCD display reads: ' '). If the target RS controller or the register referred to is not present, the LCD display reads ' ' and the associated LEDs do not light up. The key-value written to the RS controller is composed of the following: 1 n, where n represents the number of keys referring to the same US register. (Order: 1 ... n = Keys on NBE from top to bottom) 0 and 1, where only one key is assigned to a given US register. Off/On for DS registers. Examples NBE keys: Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : US01 US01 US01 US01 US01 US01 US02 US02 US01 US02 US02 DS01 DS01 DS02 US01 US02 Key value: 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 0/1 1 2 Off/On Off/On Off/On 0/1 0/1
Setpoint adjuster The setpoint adjustment range is determined by the resolution of the setpoint adjuster. The displayed setpoint is calculated by adding or sub tracting the setpoint adjuster value (POTI value) to the basic setpoint (MainSP). A structure to perform a similar calculation in the RS controller must then be provided by use of a summation function (F27.1) or similar. When creating the structure, note that the basic setpoint must be structured as the setpoint. The setpoint adjuster value is structured as the input variable. The example below shows how the measuring range is defined. Example
94.0186 A
POTI
US03 UP07
MainSP US02
xe1 xe2 xe3 w
F27.1/01 + +
NBE-SW
UZ02
1)
MainSP
This value must be set to 50 K (to compensate for the 100 K deviation from US03).
US02 US03
MB = T1 MB = T6 MB = T6
(50 ... 150 C) (100 ... 100 K) (100 ... 100 K) 1)
POT
Parameter UP07
K21-05.30
1/1 en - 97 - 01
INTEGRAL DIALOG
Operation software
For PC-based operation of RS modules pronto interface pronto individual room controllers
The INTEGRAL AS1000 system can be operated from a standard IBM or IBM compatible PC, running the INTEGRAL DIALOG software. This option requires the use of a NITEL.. communication module, to which up to 16 RS modules or pronto interfaces may be connected (see K21-07.30). The software is operated in an interactive process via the screen and keyboard. INTEGRAL DIALOG is based on a menu tree which is largely identical to that of the NBRN-.. operator terminal (see K21-05.10, pages 3 & 4). Operation with INTEGRAL DIALOG is described in the user manual, K8. Changes in topology and alarm events can be printed in table form.
PC specification
Suitable PCs Minimum PC configuration: Memory Hard disk Operating system Interface Graphics adapters: for monochrome monitors for colour monitors Floppy disks: Languages (text disk) IBM AT compatible Min. 640 kB RAM Min. 10 MB MS-DOS / PC-DOS V2.11 or higher RS232 or RS485 Hercules monochrome card Enhanced Graphics Adapter (EGA) 3 1/2 " system disk and text disk English German French
INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE
Service software
For PC-based operation of the RS controllers pronto interfaces
INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE is a software tool for commissioning and set-up of INTEGRAL AS1000 systems. The software will run on most IBM or IBM compatible PCs or laptops with monochrome or (preferably) colour screens. INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE communicates directly with the RS bus via the PC communications port and a suitable RS232/485 converter, giving an extremely fast data point update time. The software can be operated with the mouse or keyboard, and data can be arranged in multiple screen windows as required. The main features of INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE include: Emulation of the NBRN.. service terminal Alarm reporting function Report function Data logging For full instructions, refer to the INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE manual, M5.
K21-05.40
1/1 en - 97 - 01
Overview:
Room operating units without RS bus communication
Type
Application
Controller INTEGRAL
Functions
Data sheet
Heating Ventilation Air cond. KRT-1S
RSA
RSC RSM
Measurement of the room temperature (T1) Room temperature setpoint adjustment Occupancy selector: Occupied / Unoccupied Measurement of the room temperature (T1) Room temperature setpoint adjustment Mode selection: Auto / On / Off Holiday extension switch 1, 2 or 3 days Measurement of the room temperature (T1) Room temperature setpoint adjustment Mode selection Auto / Day / Night Heating time extension 1, 2 or 4 hours Measurement of the room temperature (T1) Mode selection Auto / Day / Night Timer-module, standalone time function Measurement of the room temperature (T1) Room temperature setpoint adjustment
1611
KRT-1L
1613
KRT-1B
1612
KRU-1
1614
PBA
1651
PBC
Measurement of the room temperature (T1) Room temperature setpoint adjustment, digital display of room temperature
1655
K21-06
Adapter
INTEGRAL AS1000 Adapters
K21-06.01
1/1 en - 97 - 01
Contents
NARB/A NARC NABBS/A NARS NTIO NTIOS NATU NMID NAPC RS bus adapter ......................................................................... 06.10 RS bus adapter with interface converter ............................... 06.15 Adapter for operator terminals .............................................. 06.20 Supply voltage adapter ........................................................... 06.30 Single terminal module carrier ............................................... 06.50 Module carrier for two terminal modules, with DC 15 V supply ................................................................ 06.51 Adapter for special signals ...................................................... 06.52 4/1 multiplexer ......................................................................... 06.55 PRONTO IRC adpater ............................................................... 06.60
K21-06.10
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NARB/A
RS bus adapter
Used to connect INTEGRAL RS controllers, pronto interfaces and operator terminals to the RS bus.
NARB/A
Technical data
Connections Connection terminals (RS bus) Connecting cable (RS controller) Length Plug-in connection (NBRN-..) Weight (excluding packaging) Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Screw terminals, 4 mm2 Ribbon cable with 10-pin connector 2m 10-pin ribbon cable connector 0.13 kg 62 x 125 x 44 mm Snap-mounted on DIN rail (EN50022-35 x 7.5) EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This products meets the requirements for marking
Brief description
The NARB/A is used to connect RS controllers and pronto interfaces to the RS bus. The terminals are looped to accommodate incoming and outgoing bus cables. Cable screens, where used, may be capacitively or electrically earthed (See K21-11.20/6 for connection diagram). The earth connection is automatic when fixed to an earthed DIN rail. If the DIN rail is not earthed, Terminal 10 (TE, functional earth) must be connected to earth by as short a wire as possible.
Note
1)
A lightning protection module must be provided for bus cables exposed to a high risk of lightning (gas diverter).
The NARB/A provides protection from transients 1) and protects the RS bus from external voltages up to AC/DC 50 V. The adapter also incorporates a socket for parallel connection of an operator terminal.
INTEGRAL AS1000 Adapters Construction
K21-06.10
2/2 en - 97 - 01
The adapter comprises a metal base and a PCB. The PCB accommodates the following connections: Connection terminals for RS bus Connecting cable to RS controller Plug-in connection for operator terminal
51074
Illustration showing optional RS bus screen
Note The packaging cover is designed for use as a protective cover, to shield the adapter from dust and accidental contact while building works are in progress.
Mounting
The NARB/A is designed for control-panel installation and can be snapmounted on a rail. For detailed mounting instructions, see K21, Section 10.
Connection diagram
Electrically connected screen clamp
TE RSG RSG RS1 RS2 RS1 RS2
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Capacitively connected screen clamp

RSG RSG
51075
Connection to metal base Important: RS1 and RS2 must be cores of the same pair.
10
9 10
7 8
5 6
3 4
1 2
9 10
7 8
5 6
3 4
1 2
RS bus cable specification, see K21-11.20.
K21-06.15
1/3 en - 97 - 08
NARC
RS bus adapter with interface converter
The NARC may be used as an RS232/485 converter for operation of the INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE software see K21-05.30. For the connection of RS controllers, pronto interfaces and operator terminals to the RS bus, either by fibre optic cable or leased-line modem. The NARC is used in systems where the length of the RS bus exceeds 2400 m, or where it is exposed to significant levels of electrical interference.
NARC
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Power consumption Signal inputs/outputs Connections Communication RS bus Transmission speed NARC connection to RS bus Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) via ribbon cable from RS controller or NABBS/A AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % Max. 3.5 VA See page 2, Connections and indicators See page 2, Connections and indicators
9600 baud 4 mm2 screw terminals 0.44 kg 118 x 108 x 52 mm Snap-mounted on DIN rail (EN50022-35 x 7.5) or screwed to a flat surface EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Important: The maximum duration of a signal within an RS bus system with one or more NARC adapters must not exceed 1 ms.
Brief description
The NARC converts the RS485 interface into two RS232 interfaces, to which electrically isolated fibre-optic interfaces, leased-line modems or PCs can be connected. This makes it possible to extend the length of the RS bus significantly. There is no mutual electrical isolation between the RS485, COM1/RS232 and COM2/RS232 interfaces of the NARC. The NARC does not support control signals (the only signals available being RX, TX and GND). It is for this reason that a full duplex modem connection is required between the devices. Dial-up modems are not suitable.

Important: With cables exceeding 20 m in length, one end of jumper J1 should be disconnected from the PCB to prevent EMI coupling.
K21-06.15
2/3 en - 97 - 08
Essentially, the adapter consists of a PCB in metal housing comprising a base, and a cover. The PCB incorporates the connection and display elements (see diagram below). The DIP switches used to set the baud rate are also located on the PCB and are factory-programmed (9600 baud) (Switch 4 ON, Switches 1, 2 and 3 OFF). Other DIP switch settings are for MS2000 applications only (see table below and manual E31-07.60). Bus system RS bus LAN LAN LAN Baud rate 9600 2900 9600 19200 1 OFF ON OFF OFF 2 OFF OFF ON OFF 3 OFF OFF OFF ON 4 ON OFF OFF OFF ............... ..............
Mounting
The adapter can be mounted with four screws on any base (e.g. a control panel base) or on a mounting rail. See K21-10 for detailed installation instructions.
Connections and indicators
3
92.00451
RSG
RS1
RS2
Power
Com 1 / RS232
NARC
Service
Com 2 / RS232
Important: The NARC adapter must be mounted on an earthed DIN rail or earthed via terminal 5 (TE).
1 Screw terminals for RS bus, max. cross-section 4 mm2 2 Power LED 3 25-pin interface port, male (COM1/ RS232), for fibre-optic interface module, leased-line modem or PC 4 25-pin interface port, male (COM2/ RS232), for fibre-optic interface module, leased-line modem or PC 5 10-pin ribbon-cable connector ("Service") for operator terminal 6 10-pin ribbon cable, with connector, for RS module or pronto interface (including power supply for these units). Length approx. 2 m.
Pin layout 25-pin interface port COM1 and COM2 (RS232) Pin (male) 2 3 7 Signal TXD RXD GND

Specification for fibre optic connection
K21-06.15
3/3 en - 97 - 08
The interface modules and the cable must be selected in accordance with the transmission distance. Specification for leased-line modem connection Only electrically-isolated modems should be used. See K21-11.20 for RS bus specification.
Application examples
51147EN 1) Fibre-optic cable 1) 2) 2)
RS bus
NARB/A
NARC
NARC
NARC
NBRN NRU../A NRU../A NRU../A NRU../A
1) Fibre-optic interfaces 2) Leased line modems
K21-06.20
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NABBS/A
RS bus adapter
Used to connect remote operator terminals to the RS bus. With AC 24 V power supply for remote operator terminals.
NABBS/A
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Fuse Connections Connection terminals (RS bus, supply voltage) Plug-in connector (NBRN-..) Weight, excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % PTC thermistor, 0.9 A
Screw terminals, 4 mm2 10-pin ribbon cable connector 0.13 kg 62 x 125 x 44 mm Snap-mounted on DIN rail (EN50022-35 x 7.5) EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Brief description
The supply voltage is transmitted from the screw terminals of the NABBS/A via the PTC thermistor to the integrated socket for the operator terminal. The terminals for the RS bus are looped to accommodate incoming and outgoing bus cables. Cable screens, where used, may be earthed either capacitively or electrically (see K21-11.20/6 for a connection diagram). The earth connection is automatic when fixed to an earthed DIN rail. If the DIN rail is not earthed, Terminal 10 (TE, functional earth) must be connected to earth by as short a wire as possible. The NABBS/A provides protection from transients 1) and protects the RS bus from external voltages up to AC/DC 50 V.
Note
1)
A lightning protection module must be provided for bus cables exposed to a high risk of lightning (gas diverter).
K21-06.20
2/2 en - 97 - 01
The adapter comprises a metal base and a PCB. The PCB accommodates the following connections: Connection terminals for RS bus Connecting terminals for power supply Plug-in connection for operator terminal
51076A
13
Illustration showing optional RS bus screen
Note The packaging cover is designed for use as a protective cover, to shield the adapter from dust and accidental contact while building works are in progress.
Mounting
The NABBS/A is designed for control-panel installation and can be snapmounted on a rail. For detailed mounting instructions, see K21-10.
Connection diagram
Electrically connected screen clamp
TE RSG RSG RS1 RS2 RS1 RS2
NS 10 AC 9 24 V 8 LS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
11
Capacitively connected screen clamp

RSG RSG
51077
Important: RS1 and RS2 must be wires of the same pair.
Connection to metal base
10
9 10
7 8
5 6
3 4
1 2
13 11
NS
RS bus cable specification, see K21-11.20.

LS
K21-06.30
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NARS
Supply voltage adapter
Provides the AC 24 V supply voltage for RS card modules operated without an NTOMS terminal module carrier.
NARS
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Fuse Connections Connection terminals Connection cable (RSM controller) Length Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % T 1.6 A 4 mm2 screw terminals 20-core ribbon cable 2m 0.18 kg 40 x 111 x 43 mm Snap-mounted on DIN rail (EN50022-35 x 7.5) EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing
Brief description
The AC 24 V supply voltage is transmitted from the screw terminals of the NARS via the fuse to the connection cable for the RSM card modules.
Construction
The adapter comprises a plastic housing and a printed circuit board with the following connections: Connection terminals for the power supply Connecting cable for the RSM card module
K21-06.30
2/2 en - 97 - 01
9E174 A
T1,6 A
1 2
AC 24 V
Mounting
The NARS is designed for control panel installation and can be mounted on a standard rail. See K21-10 for detailed installation instructions.
Connection diagram
9E175
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6
20
K21-06.50
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NTIO
Single terminal module carrier
Used in conjunction with the INTEGRAL RSC and RSA ranges as a base plate and power supply for a single terminal module. See K21-02 for details of the terminal modules.
NTIO
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Power consumption Connections Connection terminals Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Overvoltage category Electrical safety Caution If higher voltages than extra low voltage are connected via the NKOD(H) or NKID(H) terminal module, the coding pins supplied must be inserted into the corresponding carrier slots. General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz and/or DC 15 V depending on terminal module type see transformer sizing, K21-11.10 4 mm2 screw terminals with test socket 0.1 kg 40 x 111 x 57 mm Snap-mounted on DIN rail (EN5002235 x 7.5) EN 61010-1 2 II SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Istalled in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing
Brief description
Note With output modules, the terminals used for the hard-wired interlock circuit are not accessible.
The NTIO allows the use of terminal modules in conjunction with compact controllers (INTEGRAL RSC) and application controllers (INTEGRAL RSA). This makes it possible to connect peripheral devices with signals other than those available with the RSC or RSA controllers (e.g. Pt100, phase cut and 3-point signals). The supply voltage(s) and the controller input or output signal are connected via screw terminals 9 14. This connection between the RSA/RSC controller and the module carrier must not exceed 2 m in length. The peripheral device is wired to the module carrier via terminals 14.
Construction
Essentially, the module carrier consists of the following parts: Plastic base, suitable for snap-mounting onto standard rail Printed circuit board with tracks for power supply and signal transmission, AC 24 V connection terminals and measuring terminals for DC +15 V and ground Plastic cover with terminals for the RSA/RSC controller and the peripheral device.
INTEGRAL AS1000 Adapters Mounting
K21-06.50
2/2 en - 97 - 01
The module carrier can be mounted directly onto a standard rail. See K21-10 for detailed installation instructions.
Terminal layout
~ AC 24 V DC +15 V SGND SIG
12 13 14 1 2 3 4
93.00079A
9 10
Max. AC 250 V / 6A with NKOD(H) or NKID(H)
K21-06.51
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NTIOS
Module carrier for two terminal modules, with DC 15 V supply
The NTIOS accommodates and supplies the power to two terminal modules. Electrically isolated DC 15 V power supply for active DC 15 V peripheral devices. For mechanical reasons, the NKIDP/8 cannot be used with the NTIOS. See K21-02 for details of the terminal modules.
NTIOS
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Power consumption Intrinsic consumption With terminal modules Terminal module power supply Output voltage Output current Connections Connection terminals Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Caution If higher voltages than extra low voltage are connected via the NKOD(H) or NKID(H) terminal module, the coding pins supplied must be inserted into the corresponding carrier slots. Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz +15 / 10 % Max. 4 VA see transformer sizing, K21-11.10 DC 15 V 5 %, short circuit proof, electrically isolated from AC 24 V Max. 70 mA 4 mm2 screw terminals 0.4 kg 118 x 108 x 50 mm Snap-mounted on DIN rail (EN50022-35 x 7.5) or screwed to a flat surface EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Note With output modules, the terminals used for a hard-wired safety interlock are not accessible.
Brief description
The NTIOS module carrier allows the use of two terminal modules in conjunction with the INTEGRAL RSC and INTEGRAL RSA controllers or controllers in the CLASSIC range. This makes it possible to connect peripheral devices with signals other than those available with the controllers (e.g. Pt100, phase cut or 3-point signals). The NTIOS can also be used to connect peripheral devices requiring an auxiliary power supply of DC 15 V. The AC 24 V supply is connected via the upper terminal block (NS and LS). The lower terminal block is used for the DC 15 V peripheral devices and the input or output signals from the controller (signal 1 for carrier slot 1 and signal 2 for carrier slot 2). This connection between the module carrier and the controller must not exceed 2 metres. The peripheral devices are connected to screw-terminals 1 to 4 of the two module carrier slots.
K21-06.51
2/2 en - 97 - 01
The module carrier consists of a sheet metal housing with a printed circuit board and electronic components, and two plastic slots for the terminal modules. The terminal blocks are used to connect the following: Power supply Peripheral devices Auxiliary power supply for DC 15 V peripheral devices Input or output signals 1 and 2 for terminal module slots 1 and 2 respectively Signal ground
Mounting
The carrier can be surface-mounted with four screws (e.g. on a control panel base) or rail-mounted.
Terminal layout
40556
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Max. AC 250 V / 6A with NKOD(H) or NKID(H)
SIG1 SIG2 SNGD DC 15 V
TE N () L (~) AC 24 V
o o o
o o o o
K21-06.52
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NATU
Adapter for special signals
Used to connect an NTOMS terminal module carrier to a INTEGRAL RSC or INTEGRAL RSA controller. See K21-02 for details of the terminal modules.
NATU
Technical data
Connections Connection terminals Plug-in connection Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity 2.5 mm2 screw terminals 20-pin ribbon cable connector 0.3 kg 118 x 108 x 50.5 mm Snap-mounted on DIN rail (EN50022-35 x 7.5) or screwed to a flat surface EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing
Brief description
The NATU allows the connection of an NTOMS terminal module carrier to a controller in the INTEGRAL RSC or INTEGRAL RSA range. This makes it possible to connect multiple peripheral devices with signals other than those provided by the RSC or RSA controllers (e.g. Pt100, phase cut or 3-point signals).
Construction
Essentially, the adapter consists of a metal housing and a printed circuit board. The printed circuit board incorporates the following connections: Screw terminals for the power supply Screw terminals for the RSA or RSC controller Ribbon-cable socket for the NTOMS module carrier
Mounting
The adapter can be fitted with four screws onto any surface (e.g. control panel base) or mounted on a standard rail. See K21-10 for detailed installation instructions.
INTEGRAL AS1000 Adapters Connection diagram
K21-06.52
2/2 en - 97 - 01
AC 24 V 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Terminal module carrier
220 V
NTOMS
9G666
AC 24 V +15 +15 GND GND + +15 GND
RS compact controller Analogue outputs Universal inputs

+
NATU
Note The NATU terminals are labelled in the same way as the terminal blocks on the NTOMS carrier (AH), and are connected to the '+' terminals of the RSA or RSC inputs and outputs.
A B C D E F G H
K21-06.55
1/2 en - 97 - 01
NMID
4/1 multiplexer
Used in conjunction with controllers in the INTEGRAL RSC and INTEGRAL RSA ranges to increase the number of digital inputs available. In conjunction with a transducer module, the multiplexer can also be used with INTEGRAL RSM.
NMID
Electrical protection The digital inputs are electrically isolated from each other and from the auxiliary power supply and the signal outputs. Variations in voltage are acceptable in the extra low voltage range. The signal outputs are short-circuit proof (max. 20 mA). The supply voltage input is protected against polarity reversal. A PTC thermistor acts as a fuse.
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Current consumption Fuse Signal inputs Number of digital inputs Range Input impedance Pulse duration Signal outputs Number of universal outputs Range Load Accuracy Signal buffering Product data Transmission time Connections Connection terminals Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Extra low voltage (SELV-E) from RS controller DC 15 V Max. 6 mA PTC thermistor, 95 mA 4 Low < AC/DC 6 V High = AC/DC 15 ... 45 V 10 % 4 k Min. 100 ms 1 DC 0 ... 10 V Max. 2 mA source/sink current 2.5 % of setpoint or 50 mV 6.5 s 1 s Max. 5 s 2.5 mm2 screw terminals 0.4 kg 118 x 108 x 50 mm Snap-mounted on DIN rail (EN50022-35 x 7.5) or screwed to a flat surface EN 61010-1 2 II SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing This product meets the requirements for marking
Important Note that the inputs gained by using the multiplexer are stored as digital calcuated values in the DZ register, and not in the normal input table of the RS controller memory map.
Safety Product safety Contamination level Overvoltage category Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Conformity
Brief description
The multiplexer is specifically designed for use with the RS compact and application controllers, and can accommodate four digital data points at the expense of one universal input. The four digital inputs are connected by means of an opto-isolator to a D/A converter and converted into a DC 0 ...10 V signal (in binary stages - see table on next page). The input signals are stored for 6.5 s. An A/D converter structure is required in the RS controller to evaluate the DC 0 ... 10 V signal.

Inputs A B C D 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Output [V] 0.00 0.67 1.33 2.00 2.67 3.33 4.00 4.67 5.33 6.00 6.67 7.33 8.00 8.67 9.33 10.00 0 = Contact open
K21-06.55
2/2 en - 97 - 01
1 = Contact closed
Construction
The multiplexer consists of a metal housing, comprising a base and a cover with a printed circuit board. The printed circuit board incorporates connection terminals, which are accessible on either side of the housing without the need to remove the cover.
Mounting
The multiplexer can be mounted directly onto any surface (e.g. a control panel base) or on a 35 mm rail. See K21-10 for detailed installation instructions.
Connection diagram
AC / DC 15 ... 45 V
9G665 A
+15 GND
+15 +15 GND GND
A B
NMID
C D
RS compact controller
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
Analouge inputs
+15 +15 GND GND
A B
NMID
C D
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
K21-06.60
1/4 en - 97 - 01
NAPC
PRONTO IRC adapter
The NAPC is used to connect two pronto buses to a NIPRO pronto interface.
NAPC
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Current consumption Input protection Connections Connection terminals for pronto bus and supply voltage Ribbon-cable connection to NIPRO Communication Trunk to NIPRO Interface Transmission speed Hamming distance Max. cable length Input protection Number of NAPCs pronto bus Interface Transmission speed Hamming distance Max. cable length Input protection Number of pronto controllers Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz + 15 / 10% 0.6 A 47 V, PTC 0.9 A
2.5 mm2 screw terminals 10-core (cable Z237)
RS485 9600 Baud 2 2400 m 18 V 1 per trunk Electrically isolated 2 x 15 V current loop 1200 baud 4 800 m for 1 mm2 (see P51-05.20) 22 V, PTC 0.2 A Max. 60 per pronto bus (max. 120 per NAPC) 1.0 kg 215 x 112 x 87 mm Snap-mounted on DIN rail (EN 50022) EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 45 C 25 70 C 10 90 %rh, non-condensing
INTEGRAL AS1000 Adapters Brief description
K21-06.60
2/4 en - 97 - 01
The PRONTO IRC adapter, type NAPC, connects the PRONTO IRC terminal unit controllers on a maximum of two buses (corresponding to HVAC zones) to the NIPRO pronto interface. A maximum of two groups of 60 PRONTO IRC controllers may be connected to each NAPC adapter. The pronto bus communication signals are electrically isolated and converted for use on the NIPRO trunk. The adapter, fitted with a single-chip processor, is designed as a channel multiplexer, and processes one pronto bus at a time.
Location within the system

60131
NIPRO
Z237 NAPC
PR..
Electrical protection
The two pronto bus interfaces are electrically isolated from the AC 24 V power supply.
Construction
The NAPC adapter comprises two parts: the printed circuit board and the housing.
PRONTO IRC terminal unit controllers
92.00019A
RxD
POWER AC 24 V
TxD
R/T
R/T
ON
OF
A B Bus 1
A B Bus 2
NAPC
x
SUPPLY AC 24 V
AC 24 V AC 24 V
NCRS TRUNK
AC 24 AC 24 V V
NIPRO NIPRO
K21-06.60
3/4 en - 97 - 01
The housing consists of a plastic base holding the PCB assembly and a U-shaped cover. The base is designed for easy snap-mounting on all standard DIN-EN rails. All the information required for correct connection is shown on the U-shaped cover, which also serves to protect the electronic components. The printed circuit board is fitted with a 10-pin header for the trunk, and screw terminals for connecting the two pronto buses and the AC 24 V supply voltage, for which an on/off switch is provided.
Description of components
The AC 24 V supply voltage to the adapter can be switched off with switch S1. A green LED located to the right of this switch indicates that the correct supply voltage is present. The supply voltage is protected by a PTC thermistor. This acts as a safety device if the connected voltage is too high, or if the equipment is defective. NIPRO trunk connection The RS485 trunk connection, which is electrically isolated from the pronto buses, is connected to the trunk connection of the NIPRO interface. The baud rate is a fixed 9600 baud. The status of activity on the trunk is indicated by two LEDs, green (Receive Data) and red (Transmit Data). RS485 connection
NIPRO Pin # 6 5 10 + GND Earth Signal NARB/A Terminal # 1 2 3,4 10
Trunk cable
Cable length Inside control panel Outside control panel Max. 2400m 10-core ribbon cable Via NARB/A adapter

pronto bus connection
K21-06.60
4/4 en - 97 - 01
The two pronto bus connections are electrically isolated, both from the AC 24 V supply voltage (internal transformer) and from the NCRS or NIPRO trunk circuit. They are EMI protected and short-circuit-proof (up to 70 mA). External voltages above approximately DC 22 V and AC 3 V can result in damage to the pronto bus. The NAPC is designed as the pronto bus master, and allows for the connection of up to 60 pronto controllers per bus, giving a total of 120 controllers per NAPC. The serial, asynchronous, half-duplex pronto bus operates at 1200 baud. The terminal unit controllers are connected by an interchangeable twowire connection. The two yellow LEDs indicate the status of activities on the pronto bus. pronto bus connection
Terminal # 1 2 3 Signal A B Screen
Terminals 1 + 2 (pronto data) are interchangeable
pronto bus cable For cable specifications and installation regulations, see sheet P51-05.20 in the PRONTO IRC catalogue.
K21-07
Interfaces
INTEGRAL AS1000 Interfaces
K21-07.01
1/1 en - 97 - 01
Contents
NIPRO NITEL.. NICO pronto interface ...................................................................... 07.20 Communications module ........................................................ 07.30 MS2000 interface (brief description) ...................................... 07.50
K21-07.20
1/5 en - 97 - 01
NIPRO
Interface to PRONTO IRC
For integration of the PRONTO IRC individual room control system into the INTEGRAL AS1000 control and interlock system.
NIPRO
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Power consumption Fuse Product data 80186 section: Processor EPROM EEPROM RAM Battery-backed RAM 8032 section: Processor EPROM RAM Battery-backed RAM Back-up battery: Type Voltage Data storage period Watchdog Max. number of pronto controllers Communication RS bus Transmission speed Max. cable length (RS bus) NIPRO connection to RS bus Service terminal pronto bus interface Connection Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range: Operation Storage Ambient humidity Extra low voltage AC 24 V, 50/60 Hz 10 / +15 % Max. 15 VA PTC thermistor, 0.9 A
Intel 80C186, 16 bit 256 kbytes 8 kbytes 256 kbytes Complete RAM Intel 80C32, 8/16 bit structure 64 kbytes 32 kbytes 8 kbytes Lithium BR-2/3 A 3V 3 ... 5 years Yes 120 (connected via NAPC)
9600 baud 2400 m From service socket via 10-core ribbon cable to NARB/A adapter NBRN.. service terminal for direct connection to service socket COM1/RS485 10-core ribbon cable to NAPC adapter 0.34 kg 30 x 262 x 200 mm In NHGB card frame EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41 Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 90 % rh, non-condensing
INTEGRAL AS1000 Interfaces Brief description
K21-07.20
2/5 en - 97 - 01
The NIPRO interface is used for integration of the PRONTO IRC individual room control system, and organises the exchange of data between the RS bus and the individual room control system via the NAPC pronto bus adapter. The pronto data points are mapped as RS data points for this purpose. 60 pronto controllers may be connected to each of the two pronto buses connected to the NAPC adapter, giving a total of 120 pronto controllers per NIPRO. The NIPRO module is based on the NITEL hardware, but uses NIPRO-specific software, with a dual-processor system, comprising an 80186 and an 8032 processor. This permits full operation of the pronto data points by three different methods:
Operator terminal RC1500 management station INTEGRAL DIALOG service software NBRN-.. portable operator terminal Type of operation Graphics-based Menu-driven Menu-driven
The following functions are possible with graphics-based operation: Selection of the pronto controllers via the allocated room number or pronto address Display and manipulation of all values from a selected pronto controller (RS section, see Functions) Individual 7-day programme with up to 16 time blocks per day per pronto controller 31 exception and energy hold-off programmes, which can be assigned individually to each pronto controller 1 exception and energy hold-off programme, applicable to all pronto controllers Copy function for controller settings Monitoring function for the pronto controllers Energy demand signals to the RS controllers Control commands from the RS controllers With menu-driven operation all values from a selected pronto controller can be displayed and modified (RS section). The pronto section can only be displayed. See manual NT21, section 05 for a detailed description of functioning.
INTEGRAL AS1000 Interfaces Construction
K21-07.20
3/5 en - 97 - 01
Essentially, the NIPRO card module consists of a card housing and a plug-in printed circuit board.
The NHGB card housing (see K21-02.18) comprises a bus receptacle and a card frame. The base receptacle serves as a base for the electronic card and is also fitted with contact springs, enabling adjacent modules to be interconnected electrically without the need for wiring. Front plate The printed circuit board and the front plate (accommodating the LED indicators and connectors) form a single unit. The front plate incorporates the following elements:
50657
Top handle with labelling space Service socket/RS bus interface (Service/RS485) LEDs RS bus address switch Interface to NAPC LEDs (not used) (not used) (not used) Power supply Bottom handle with type label NIPRO NIPRO
The factory-mounted type label on the front plate is for the NITEL module, and can be replaced with the NIPRO adhesive label provided.

The service socket may be used to connect any of the following: NBRN-.. manual operator terminal NABBS/A adapter for remote NBRN operator terminal NARB/A RS bus adapter NARC RS bus adapter with interface converter
K21-07.20
4/5 en - 97 - 01
The LEDs indicate normal operation and alarm status. The upper LEDs indicate the following: Green = Power on Yellow = NIPRO transmitting to RS bus The red LED indicates the following states: Red (on) = Fault Red (flashing) = Initialisation Red (off) = Normal operation The lower LEDs (yellow) indicate the communication status: TXC1 = NIPRO transmitting to NAPC TXC2 = reserved RXC2 = reserved Each address switch has 16 possible positions: The Adr RS-Bus switch (1732) is used to set the participant number (RS bus address) of the NIPRO. The marked address range (1732) can be changed to 1...16 with the sticker supplied. Note that the selected RS bus address must be the same as the address in the SAPIM ASCII file used and in the object files for the RC1500 graphics. Any value may be set on the COM1 switch (116). This switch is not used. Printed circuit board The printed circuit board, with the electronic components, and the front plate form a single unit. This can be inserted and removed from the card housing by the two handles. When correctly in place, the front plate locks into the card frame. DIP switches (S2) Four DIP switches on the printed circuit board are used to set the operating mode and the baud rate. (See NT21-05.50 for setting instructions)
DIP switches
1 2 3 4 5
50658
RS bus
4 3 2 1
I O P E N I 0 1
U16
S2
: :
U23 U29 U26
Battery
+
Front plate PCB

Caution: Do not touch the PCB. Electronic components can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Handling the PCB without observing electrostatic precautions will invalidate the warranty. Batteries A replaceable lithium battery provides protection against data losses (battery life approx. 5 years).
K21-07.20
5/5 en - 97 - 01
Mounting
The card modules may be mounted in the control panel in three possible ways: Screw the housing directly onto the control panel base Mount on two DIN rails Mount in a standard fixed or hinged 19" rack For detailed mounting instructions see K21-10. Interfaces and communication
RS bus
Used and faulty batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local requirements.
NIPRO
RS bus
50656EN
RS bus driver
NIPRO functions
Dual port RAM protocol 8032 section Dual port RAM protocol
Real Time Clock
DP RAM-NAPC Parallel-Serial protocol converter 80186 section
Com1/RS485
NAPC
pronto bus 1 pronto bus 2
staefa pronto IRC pronto bus interface This interface provides the connection to the NAPC pronto bus adapter. In the 80186 section, the parallel data from the 8032 section is converted into serial structure and transferred via the COM1/RS485 port. RS bus interface (Service/RS485) This interface provides the connection to the NITEL via the RS bus, and is controlled by the 8032 section. The RS bus is the means by which the RS controllers and the NITEL communicate with each other and with the 8032 section of the NIPRO. Dual port RAM protocol The dual port RAM protocol is used between the 8032 section and the 80186 section in the NIPRO. This protocol enables the 8032 section to import the current Real Time Clock values and exchange data with the parallel-to-serial converter.
K21-07.30
1/6 en - 97 - 01
NITEL..
Communications module
The NITEL.. enables RS controllers pronto interfaces, and PRONTO IRC individual room controllers to be operated from a PC running the INTEGRAL DIALOG service software. It is also used to integrate the INTEGRAL AS1000 control and interlock system into the INTEGRAL MS1000 in-house management system, and the INTEGRAL TS1500 remote buildings management systems The NITEL.. is available in different language versions (NITEL0...NITEL4), see manual NT21. It is also availabe in combination with RS controllers (NRK14-T../A, NRK16-T../A and NRUT../A).
NITEL
Technical data
Supply voltage Nominal voltage Max. tolerance Power consumption Fuse Product data 80186 section Processor EPROM RAM Battery-backed RAM 8032 section Processor EPROM RAM Battery-backed RAM Back-up battery: Type Voltage Data storage period Watchdog Communication RS bus Transmission speed Max. cable length (RS bus) NITEL connection to RS bus Service terminal PC port Connection Local port Connection Weight excluding packaging Dimensions (W x H x D) Mounting Safety Product safety Contamination level Electrical safety General ambient conditions Usage Temperature range Operation Storage Ambient humidity Extra low voltage (SELV-E) AC/DC 24 V, 50/60 Hz 10 / +15% Max. 15 VA PTC thermistor, 0.9 A
Intel 80C186, 16 bit 512 kbytes 256 kbytes Complete RAM Intel 80C32, 8/16 bit structure 64 kbytes 32 kbytes 8 kbytes Lithium BR-2/3 A 3V 3 ... 5 years Yes
1)
COM1/COM2 are factory-set to a transmission speed of 2400 baud.
9600 baud 2400 m From service socket via 10-core ribbon cable to NARB/A adapter NBRN operator terminal for direct connection to service socket COM21) / RS232 for PC operation with staefa dialog 9-pin D-connector COM11) /RS232 for local alarm printer 9-pin D-connector 0.34 kg 30 x 262 x 200 mm In NHGB card frame in control panel EN 61010-1 2 SELV-E (PELV to IEC 364-4-41) Installed in control panel 5 ... 45 C 25 ... 70 C 10 90 % rh, non-condensing
INTEGRAL AS1000 Interfaces Brief description
K21-07.30
2/6 en - 97 - 01
The NITEL.. communication module is used both to integrate INTEGRAL AS1000 into higher level management systems with RC1500 management stations and for PC operation of INTEGRAL AS1000 with the INTEGRAL DIALOG service software. The NITEL.. communications module organises the exchange of data between the management station and the process control level and incorporates a comprehensive range of management functions. The NITEL.. is a dual processor system, incorporating an 80186 and an 8032 processor. The 80186 section processes the user-definable functions and handles the communication via ports COM1 and COM2 (RC1500, MC1500, VT100, alarm printer etc.). The 8032 section handles communication on the RS bus, the interrogation of automated data points and the direct access to RS data. The NITEL.. scans and stores all the relevant plant data and prepares it for further processing at the management station. The main functions are as follows: Easy integration of RS data points, using the INDAGEN software or the Staefa CAE tool, INTEGRAL PLAN Scope for grouping important values into a maximum of ten menus Display of up to 900 data points Facility to modify setpoints, modifiable outputs and switch-time programmes Integration of RS data points into the management station graphics Definition of up to 100 alarm messages each with its own priority level and transmission instructions Definition of up to ten history samples each with ten inputs Three levels of operator access with password protection See NT21-04 for a detailed description of functions The NITEL.. can also be used as an interface for PC operation, using INTEGRAL DIALOG service software. See K21-12.50 for commissioning
INDAGEN INDAGEN (INtegrated DAtabase GENerator) is a program developed by Staefa Control System for selecting and creating a list of data points from the individual RS module SAPIM structures.
Construction
Essentially, the NITEL.. card module consists of a card housing and a plug-in printed circuit board.
The NHGB housing (see K21-02.18) comprises the card frame and a base receptacle. The latter provides the plug-in base for the electronic card and, at the same time, enables the NITEL.. to be electrically connected to any directly adjacent RS card modules without additional wiring.

Front plate
K21-07.30
3/6 en - 97 - 01
The printed circuit board and the front plate form a single unit. The front plate incorporates the following elements:
92.00063
Top handle with labelling space Service socket / RS bus interface ('Service'/RS485) LEDs RS bus address switch (not used) LEDs COM1 address switch Local comms interface (COM1/RS232) PC / modem port (COM2/RS232) Power supply socket Bottom handle with type label
NITEL
Any of the following may be plugged into the service socket: NBRN.. operator terminal NABBS/A adapter for remote NBRN.. operator terminal NARB/A adapter for RS bus NARC adapter with interface converter for RS bus The LEDs indicate normal operation and faults. The upper group generally indicates the following: Green = Power on Yellow = Communication TXRS (lights up to indicate data transmission on RS bus) Red = Status The lower group of LEDs indicates communication as follows: Yellow TXC1 (lights up to indicate transmission to local port, COM1) TXC2 (lights up to indicate data transmission to PC port, COM2) RXC2 (lights up to indicate data received from PC port, COM2) Each of the address switches has 16 positions: The Addr COM1 switch (1 ... 16) is set to 16 for applications using INTEGRAL DIALOG. For RC1500 applications any address may be selected. The Addr RS bus switch (1732) is used to set the "participant address" (the address of the RS bus user). It is important to ensure, however, that the address selected will not clash with an existing address when the NITEL is connected to the RS bus. The connection sockets may be used for the following: COM1/RS485 (not used) COM1/RS232 Local alarm printer COM2/RS232 Modem, RC1500, MC1500, VT100 terminal for external operation, Minitel or INTEGRAL DIALOG The last socket (above the type label) is used for the power supply to the NITEL.. . All the connectors can be secured mechanically. See page 6 for a detailed desription of the COM ports and interfaces.

Caution: Do not touch the PCB! Electronic components can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Handling the PCB without observing electrostatic precautions invalidates the warranty.
K21-07.30
4/6 en - 97 - 01
Printed circuit board The printed circuit board and the front plate form a single unit which can be inserted and removed from the card housing by the two handles. When correctly in place, the front plate locks into the card frame. DIP switch (S2) There are four DIP switches on the printed circuit board, used to set the RS bus address, the operating mode and the transmission speed (baud rate).
DIP switches Battery A replaceable lithium battery provides protection against data losses (battery life approx. 5 years). RS bus
1 2 3 4 5
92.00348
4 3 2 1
I O P E N I 0 1
U18
U16
S2
: :
U25 U23 U26
Used and faulty batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations. Battery
Front plate
Printed circuit board
1)
Factory setting; other baud rates should only be used in special cases, e.g. for service purposes.
RS bus address settings 1 0 1 Addresses 1 ... 16 Addresses 17 ... 32 (as engraved)
Mode settings staefa dialog 2 0 1 Service mode Normal operation
Baud rate settings RS bus 3 1 0 1 0 : 4 1 1 0 0 9600 baud 1) 4800 baud 2400 baud 1200 baud
Mounting
The card modules can be installed in the control panel as follows: Housing screwed directly to control panel base Mounting on two rails Mounting in a 19" fixed or hinged rack See K21-10 for detailed mounting instructions
INTEGRAL AS1000 Interfaces Interface ports and communication system

RC1500 MC1500
94.0407
K21-07.30
5/6 en - 97 - 01
RC1500 functions
VT100
INTEGRAL PORT converter
Minitel
VT100 Emulation
INTEGRAL DIALOG
NITEL
INTEGRAL PORT converter
COM2
INTEGRAL DIALOG
VT100 Terminal
VT1000
Minitel
COM1
Local alarm printer
NITEL functions
Trunk converter
80186 section
Trunk protokoll
8032 section RS-Bus
INTEGRAL AS1000

Modem port (COM2/RS232)
K21-07.30
6/6 en - 97 - 01
As shown in the diagram on the previous page, the NITEL.. uses this port to communicate with the various devices and protocols. When the management station is operated in conjunction with the NITEL.., the INTEGRAL PLAN protocol is used for data protection and synchronisation. As soon as the first valid digit of a communication is received, the NITEL.. is able to determine whether or not this protocol is being used. If not, then VT100 sequences are received, enabling a VT100 terminal or Minitel to establish communication with the NITEL.. via this port. RC1500 communication: The RC1500 may be connected to the NITEL.. either by modem, or directly (with a null modem cable). VT100 emulation: The NITEL.. can be operated remotely from a PC terminal Minitel communication: In countries where this facility is available, the NITEL.. can be operated remotely by Minitel staefa dialog: This port can also be used for the staefa dialog service software for the interrogation of the RS controllers (NIBB emulation) Access from a terminal via the COM2 port can be disabled in the NITEL.. Communication menu.
NRK14-T../A and NRK16-T../A The NRK14-T../A and the NRK16-T../A have no local port. However, in the NITEL.. "Interfaces" menu, it is possible to configure COM2 to enable a VT100 terminal or local printer to be connected for local operation.
Local port (COM1/RS232) The NITEL.. (and NRUT../A) have a second RS232 port which can be used to connect a VT100 terminal directly for local operation, or to connect a local alarm printer. The simultaneous use of ports COM1 and COM2 is governed by certain restrictions. As a general rule: The local terminal cannot be used while the RC1500 is communicating with the NITEL.. . The RC1500 cannot establish communication with the NITEL.. while local operation is progress (i.e. as soon as the user has logged into the NITEL.. menus) These measures are designed to avoid conflicts such as would occur if the RC1500 and local terminal were operated simultaneously. Exception: Even while local operation is in progress, the NITEL.. can establish communication with the RC1500 for the purpose of transmitting alarm messages. RS bus interface (Service/RS485) This interface is controlled by the 8032 section of the NITEL.. and is used to connect the RS controllers. It enables the RS controllers to communicate with each other and with the 8032 section. The 8032 section uses this bus to sample current data points at regular intervals. Internal trunk The trunk protocol is used between the 80186 and 8032 sections inside the NITEL.. . The protocol allows the 80186 section to collect the current data point values from the 8032 section. The "Infolist" (points list of AS1000 data values) is also downloaded via the internal trunk.
K21-07.50
1/1 en - 97 - 01
NICO
MS2000 interface
The NICO is used to integrate INTEGRAL AS1000 into the INTEGRAL MS2000 building management system. The interface also serves as a defined gateway for the integration of INTEGRAL AS1000 into higher level third-party systems.
NICO
Brief description
The NICO interface coordinates the exchange of data between the NCRS system controller and the process control level. Principal functions: Updating the plant memory to take account of the priority levels assigned to the installed RS data points. Preparation of modified values for transfer to the higher level system Provision of access from a higher level system to the installed data points In conjunction with the NCRS system controller, monitoring of topology and communication with the RS system Expression of values in IEEE format Conversion of the logical (NCRS) addresses into physical addresses (via the "Infolist") Synchronisation of the date and time in the higher order management system with that in the RS system. See manual E21 for technical data.
K21-08
INTEGRAL AS1000 SAPIM basic functions
K21-08.01
1/2 en - 97 - 01
Contents
Overview of the SAPIM basic function Register and definition ranges 08.10 08.20
Register limits (RS controller) ............................................................................. 1 Definition ranges ................................................................................................ 3
SAPIM basic functions ............................................................... 08.30

F1.3 F2.1 F3.1 F3.2 F4.3 F5.1 F5.2 F6.1 F6.2 F7.1. F7.2. F8.1 F8.2 F9.1 F9.2 F10.1 F10.2 F11.1 F11.2 F11.3 F11.4 F12.1 F12.2 F12.3 F12.4 F13.1 F14.1 F14.2 F16.1 F16.2 F16.3 F17.1 F17.2 F17.3 F18.1 F19.1 F20.1 F20.2 F20.3 F21.1 F21.2 F21.3 Reset function ...................................................................................... Analogue switch function ................................................................... Addition switch .................................................................................... Subtraction switch ............................................................................... Summation within limits ..................................................................... P controller (reverse acting) ................................................................ P controller (direct acting) ................................................................... 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
PI controller (reverse acting) ............................................................... 5 PI controller (direct acting) .................................................................. 5 PID controller (reverse acting) ............................................................. 7 PID controller (direct acting) ............................................................... 7 PI-Off controller (reverse acting) ...................................................... 10 PI-Off controller (direct acting) ......................................................... 10 On/off controller (reverse acting) ..................................................... 12 On/off controller (direct acting) ........................................................ 12 Proportional auxiliary sequence (reverse acting) ............................. 13 Proportional auxiliary sequence (direct acting) ............................... 13 Fixed value function digital "ON" ................................................. Fixed value function digital "OFF" ................................................ Fixed value function analogue "100 %" ....................................... Fixed value function analogue "0 %" ........................................... 14 14 14 14
Memory link function digital ......................................................... 15 Memory link function analogue .................................................... 15 Memory link function analogue / digital ....................................... 16 Memory link function digital / analogue ....................................... 16 Ring counter ....................................................................................... 16 Timer, switch-on delay ....................................................................... 17 Timer, switch-off delay ...................................................................... 18 Logic "AND 2" .................................................................................... 18 Logic "AND 3" .................................................................................... 18 Logic "AND 4" .................................................................................... 18 Logic "OR 2" ....................................................................................... 19 Logic "OR 3" ....................................................................................... 19 Logic "OR 4" ....................................................................................... 19 Logic "EXOR" ..................................................................................... 19 Logic "NOT" ....................................................................................... 20 Maximum value "2" ........................................................................... 20 Maximum value "3" ........................................................................... 20 Maximum value "4" ........................................................................... 20 Minimum value "2" ........................................................................... 21 Minimum value "3" ........................................................................... 21 Minimum value "4" ........................................................................... 21

F22.1 F22.2 F22.3 F23.1 F23.2 F24.1 F25.1 F26.1 F27.1 F28.1 F29.1 F30.1 F52.1 F52.2 F53.1
K21-08.01
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Average value "2" ............................................................................. 22 Average value "3" ............................................................................. 22 Average value "4" ............................................................................. 22 Energy recovery logic ......................................................................... 22 Enthalpy calculator ............................................................................ 24 Universal curve ................................................................................... 25 Self-adaptive optimiser ...................................................................... 26 Slow filter ........................................................................................... 28 Addition / subtraction function ........................................................ 29 Slew rate limit .................................................................................... 30 Totalising ring counter ...................................................................... 30 Hysteresis ............................................................................................ 31 Digital output function (with DO) .................................................... 32 Digital output function (with UO) .................................................... 32 Analogue output function ................................................................ 34
K21-08.10
1/1 en - 97 - 01
Overview of RS functions
F1.3 Proportional reset function
y
F2.1 Analogue switch function

y
F3
Offset switches
F4.3 Summation within limits

xe1 xe2 xe3 w
xe xs
xe
xs
+/
F5
P control sequences
F6
PI control sequences
F7
PID control sequences
F8
PI-off control sequences
w x
w x
PI
w x
PID
w x xs
PI off
F9
On/off control sequences

y
F10
Proportional auxiliary sequences

y
F11
Fixed value functions

y
F12
Memory link functions

y
w x
xe
xe
F13.1 Ring counter

y1 xe y8
F14
Timers
F16
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
AND operations
F17
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
OR operations
xe
TIM
AND
OR
F18.1 Logic EXOR
F19.1 Logic NOT
F20
Maximum value selection
F21
Minimum value selection
xe1 xe2
EXOR
xe
NOT
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
F22
Calculation of average value
F23.1 Energy recovery logic

xe1 xe2
F23.2 Enthalpy calculator
F24.1 Universal curve
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
xeT xeK xeH xeE
h, x
yh ya y
xe1 xe2
xe
F25.1 Self-adaptive optimiser

xs xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4 y1 y2 y3
F26.1 Slow filter
F27.1 Addition / Subtraction
F28.1 Slew rate limit
OSSC
xe1
med
xe1 xe2 xe3 w
xe
F29.1 Totalising ring counter

y1 xe
TIM
F30.1 Hysteresis function
F52
Digital output function
F53.1 Analogue output function
xe y8
xe1
DO
xe1
AO
Xs Xe2 Xe3
Xs Xe2 Xe3
K21-08.20
1/5 en - 97 - 01
Register and definition ranges

Register limits (RS controller)
Universal register plant memory The universal registers contain a total of 255 spaces, of which 32 are permanently allocated to the first two registers. In each of the remaining five registers a maximum of 99 spaces may be used, but the total must not exceed 223 (255 32). Permanently allocated registers
15 16
Inputs
Analogue or digital
UI01
(16) Outputs
Analogue or digital
UI16 UO01
31
(16)
UO16
Registers with variable partitions 32
Setpoints
Analogue
US01
(max. 99)
US.. UP01
m+1 Parameters
Analogue
(max. 99)
UP..
n+1
Calculated values UZ01

Analogue
(max. 99) RS bus inputs

Analogue
UZ.. UE01
p+1
(max. 20) RS bus outputs

Analogue
UE.. UA01
q+1
(max. 99)
UA..
INTEGRAL AS1000 SAPIM basic functions Digital register plant memory
K21-08.20
2/5 en - 97 - 01
The digital registers contain a total of 255 spaces, of which 84 are permanently allocated to the first ten registers. A maximum of 99 spaces is available in each of the remaining five registers, but the total used must not exceed 171 (i.e. 255 84). Permanently allocated registers Registers with variable partitions 84
7 8
Inputs (8) Outputs (8) Time channels (8) Alarm set I (7) Alarm set II (7) Alarm reset I (7) Alarm reset II (7) Alarm memory I (8)
DI01
Setpoints (max. 99) Parameters (max. 99) Calculated values (max. 99) RS bus inputs (max. 20) RS bus outputs (max. 99)
DS01
DI08 DO01
m m+1
DS.. DP01
15 16
DO08 DU01
UP.. DZ01
n+1
23 24
DU08 DX11
DZ.. DE01
p+1
30 31
DX17 DX21
DE.. DA01
q+1
37 38
DX27 DR11
DA..
44 45
DR17 DR21
51 52
DR27 DY11
59 60
DY18
Alarm memory II DY21
67 68
(8)
DY28
Operating modes DW01
83
(16)
DW16
INTEGRAL AS1000 SAPIM basic functions Definition ranges
K21-08.20
3/5 en - 97 - 01
"S" (Standard) definition ranges Measuring range Temperature: 50 ... 150 0 ... 100 0 ... 200 0 ... 500 +/ 50 +/ 100 +/ 250 Relative humidity: 0 ... 100 +/ 50 Velocity: 0 ... 15 +/ 7.5 Pressure: 0 ... 100 0 ... 300 0 ... 1000 +/ 50 +/ 150 +/ 500 Air quality: 0 ... 100 +/ 50 Enthalpy: 50 ... 100 +/ 100 P band: 1.0 ... 2000 0.5 ... 1000 0.1 ... 150 1 ... 1000 3 ... 3000 10 ... 10000 0.5 ... 1000 0.5 ... 1000 1 ... 5000 Position: 0 ... 100 100 ... 0 +/ 50 +/ 100 Digital signal: 0/1 Off / On 1/0 On/ Off Unit of measurement C C K C K K K % rh % rh m/s m/s Pa Pa Pa Pa Pa Pa % % kJ/kg kJ/kg K %rh m/s Pa Pa Pa % K K % % % % (T1/T2) (H1) (U1) (P1) (P2) (P3) (Uni) Code T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 H1 H2 V1 V2 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 Q1 Q2 E1 E2 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 U1 U2 U3 U4 D1 D2 D3 D4
K21-08.20
4/5 en - 97 - 01
"U" (Universal) definition ranges Measuring range Analogue: 500 ... 500 250 ... 250 150 ... 150 100 ... 100 50 ... 50 50 ... 50 50 ... 150 10 ... 50 7.5 ... 7.5 0 ... 10 0 ... 15 0 ... 20 0 ... 100 0 ... 100 0 ... 127 0 ... 150 0 ... 200 0 ... 255 0 ... 300 0 ... 500 0 ... 1000 0 ... 1000 0 ... 2000 0 ... 3000 0 ... 10000 0 ... 65535 50 ... 50 100 ... 0 0 ... 5000 0 ... 25 58 ... 302 32 ... 212 0 ... 360 32 ... 932 90 ... 90 180 ... 180 450 ... 450 Code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Resolution 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 4 2 5 2 2 2 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 3 1 3 6 7 1 2 2 1 2 3 2 3 1 2 2 1 Unit None C K %rh g/kg Pa bar kPa m/s kJ kJ/kg W/m2 W/m2 x K m3/h L/s m3/s % ppm s min. h d mV V mA A mW W kW k L/s L/min L/h F "WC psiq Code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
K21-08.20
5/5 en - 97 - 01
"U" (Universal) definition ranges
Measuring range
Analogue: 0 ... 2952 1476 ... 1476 0 ... 0.4 0 ... 1.2 0 ... 4 0.2 ... 0.2 0.6 ... 0.6 2.0 ... 2.0 14 ... 72 43 ... 43 0 ... 3600 0 ... 29527 0 ... 12 0 ... 40 0 ... 1800 0 ... 9000 Digital: 1/0 On / Off Off/ On 0 / 100 0 / 10 0/1
Code
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 58 59 60 61 62 63
Resolution
1 1 8 8 8 8 8 5 2 2 3 1 5 9 3 3
Unit
psig fpm Btu Btu/# B/sftt cfm gpm #/#a Ibs Ibs/h ph
Code
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
None
01
Measuring ranges 31-53 are American ranges and can be read only on a new type NBRN operator terminal. Resolution: 1=1 2 = 0.1 3 = 0.1 / 1 (>100) 4 = 0.5 5 = 0.01 6 = 1 (-999) / 0.1 (>= 1k) 7 = 1 (-999) / 0.1 (>= 1k) 8 = 0.0001 9 = 0.001 / 0.1
K21-08.30
1/36 en - 97 - 01

F1.3 Reset function
9E541
xe
This function determines a reset value y on the basis of input variable xe, using a reset curve. The shape of the reset curve is determined by defining cut-in points Xe1 and Xe2, end points Xa1 and Xa2 and reset heights H1. Typical application Summer / winter compensation
y 9E544 100%
Xe1 Xa1 Xe2 Xa2 H1 H2
H1 xe y H2
0% Xa1 100% Xe1 Xe2 Xa2
xe
Function F1.3
Parameters
Definition Input variable Cut-in point 1 End point 1 Reset height 1 Cut-in point 2 End point 2 Reset height 2 Reset value Symbol xe Xe1 Xa1 H1 Xe2 Xa2 H2 y :U :U :U :U :U :U :U :U Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB as for xe, ME as for xe. MB as for xe, ME as for xe. MB as for y, ME as for y. MB as for xe, ME as for xe. MB as for xe, ME as for xe. MB as for y, ME as for y. MB from "S" or "U". Range to start at 0 and ME C.
U D MB ME "S" "U"
: : : : : :
Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard"definition range "Universal"definition range
Notes Any analogue measuring range from the "S" and "U" tables may be used for the reset value y, provided that it is a range which starts at 0 and is not expressed in C. If only one side of the reset is required, the unused parameters should be set to true zero. To save memory space, choose the same register address for all unused parameters. If function F4.3 (summation within limits) or F27.1 (addition/subtraction) are structured next, the value can be added to, or subtracted from the setpoint value.
INTEGRAL AS1000 SAPIM basic functions F2.1 Analogue switch function

9E545
K21-08.30
2/36 en - 97 - 01
This function allows the transmission of an analogue value under control of the digital input variable xs. If xs = logic 0, then output y If xs = logic 1, then output y Typical applications: Analogue switch Setpoint steps, e.g. night set-back, boost, stand-by, etc. = 0. = H.
xs
y 9E546 100% H
H xe y
0% "0" "1"
xs
Function F2.1 U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard"definition range "Universal"definition range
Parameters
Description Input variable Analogue input variable Output Symbol xs: D H: U y: U Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB as for y, ME as for y. MB from "S" or "U".
F3.1 Addition switch

9E547
xe xs
+/
The addition switch increases the input variable xe by the amount H, as a function of the digital variable xs. If xs = logic 0, then output y = xe If xs = logic 1, then output y = xe + H.
9E548 xe xs="0" H y
xe y xs +H xs="1"
xe y
+H
Funktion F3.1
INTEGRAL AS1000 SAPIM basic functions F3.2 Subtraction switch
K21-08.30
3/36 en - 97 - 01
The subtraction switch decreases the input variable xe by the value H, as a function of the digital variable xs. If xs = logic 0, then output y = xe If xs = logic 1, then output y = xe H.
9E549 xe xs="0" H y
xe y xs -H xs="1"
xe y -H
Function F3.2
Parameters
Description U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard"definition range "Universal"definition range Input variable Digital input variable Value Output Symbol xe : U xs : D H :U y :U Definition range MB from S or U. MB from S or U. 0 ... relative MB of xe, ME as for xe. (Exception: MExe = C MEH = K) MB as for xe, ME as for xe.
Notes The value H is allocated an analogue measuring range starting at 0 from the S or U table. The end of the range is the relative measuring range of xe. (Example: MBxe = 50 ...150 C MBH = 0 ... 200 K)
F4.3 Summation within limits

9E550
xe1 xe2 xe3 w
This summation function is normally required to process setpoint resets or setpoint steps. The sum, xa, of input variables xe1, xe2 and xe3 can be assigned a high limit of Y2 (Ymax) and a low limit of Y1 (Ymin). When the signal thus determined, reset signal ya, is added to setpoint w, this gives the effective operating setpoint, y.
Y2 (Ymax)
Y1 (Ymin)
9E554
100%
ya
9E552
xe1 + xe2 + xe3 w xa + ya + +

Y2 Y1 0%
9E555 w ya
xa 100%
Function F4.3

Parameters
Description Setpoint Input variable Input variable Input variable Low limit High limit Operating setpoint Symbol w xe1 xe2 xe3 Y1 Y2 y :U :U :U :U :U :U :U Definition range MB from "S" or "U".
K21-08.30
4/36 en - 97 - 01
U D MB ME "S" "U"
: : : : : :
0 ... relative MB of w, ME as for w. (Exception: MEw = C # MExe1=K)
MB as for w, ME as for w.
Notes
The same measuring range from the "S" or "U" tables is assigned to the input variables xe1, xe2 and xe3 and to the limit parameters Y1 and Y2. The low limit of the range is 0 and the high limit is the relative measuring range of the setpoint. (Example: MBw = 50 ... 150 C MBxe1 = 0 ... 200 K) Input variables which are not required are structured as parameters, and the low limit of the measuring range (true zero) is assigned to them. To save memory space, use the same register address for all parameters which are not needed. If no specific limits are to be assigned to the function, the lower limit of the measuring range is selected for Y1 and the higher limit for Y2.
F5.1 P controller (reverse acting) F5.2 P controller (direct acting)

These two function generate conventional P-control sequences, either reverse or direct acting. The sequence is shifted by entering an offset, Of.
9E556
w x
y
100% Of Xp y Xp 9E557
w + x
wr + P
0% wr w -Of +Of
Function F5.1
wr
100% Of Xp
Xp
9E558
w x
wr + P
0% wr -Of w wr +Of
Function F5.2

Parameters
Description Measured value Setpoint Offset P-band Controller output signal Symbol x :U w :U Of : U Xp : U y :U Definition range
K21-08.30
5/36 en - 97 - 01
U D MB ME "S" "U"
: : : : : :
MB from "S" or "U". MB as for x, ME as for x. half of relative MB of x, ME as for x. (Exception: MEx = C MEOf = K) MB from "S" (Code X1...X9). MB from "S" or "U".
Notes The measuring ranges from the "S" and "U" tables admissible for the offset, are those which are symmetrical about zero. In addition, the relative measuring range of the offset must correspond to that of the measured value. (Example: MBx = 50 ...150 C MBOf = 100 K) The "S" table includes a separate group of measuring ranges valid for the proportional band Xp. In principle, the measuring range of Xp is defined using 0.5 1000 % of the relative measuring range of y. (Example: MBy = 50 ...150 C MBXp = 1 ... 2000 K)
F6.1 PI controller (reverse acting) F6.2 PI controller (direct acting)

These two functions generate conventional PI control sequences, either reverse acting or direct acting. The sequence is shifted by entering an offset value (Of). The ARW circuit, incorporated to improve start-up response, limits the active I-component via parameters Y1 and Y2.
9E559
w x
PI
Xp Tn Y1 (Ygmin) Y2(Ygmax)
100%
Xp
9E743
Of
w x
wr + PI
0% wr w wr -Of +Of
Function F6.1
Xp 9E744
100%
Of
w x
wr + PI
0% wr w -Of +Of
Function F6.2
wr

Parameters
Description Measured value Setpoint Offset P band Integral action time Low ARW limit. High ARW limit Controller output signal Symbol x :U w :U Of : U Xp Tn Y1 Y2 y :U :U :U :U :U Definition range
K21-08.30
6/36 en - 97 - 01
U D MB ME "S" "U"
: : : : : :
MB from "S" or "U". MB as for x, ME as for x. half relative MB of x, ME as for x. (Exception: MEx = C MEOf = K) MB from "S" (Code X1 ... X9). MB software-defined (U:23:19) MB = 100 % from "U". (U:04:17) MB = 100 % from "U". (U:04:17) MB from "S" or "U".
Notes The measuring ranges from the "S" and "U" tables which may be used for the offset, Of, are those which are symmetrical about zero. In addition, the relative measuring range of the offset must correspond to that of the measured value. (Example: MBx = 50 ... 150 C MBOf = 100 K) The "S" table includes a separate group of measuring ranges valid for the proportional band, Xp. In principle, the measuring range of Xp is defined with 0.51000 % of the relative measuring range of y. (Example: MBy = 50 ... 150 C MBXp = 1 ... 2000 K) The measuring range for the integral action time Tn is predefined in software. Tn may be entered in minutes (m) and/or seconds (s). Entering Tn = 0 seconds suppresses the I-component and the function is reduced to that of a P controller. The reference and limit parameters of the ARW circuit have a fixed measuring range (100 %) from the "U" table (U:04:17). If no limit is required for the I-component, the following values are allocated to the parameters: Heating sequence: Y1 = 0 %; Y2 = 100 % Cooling sequence: Y1 = 0 %; Y2 = 100 % ARW circuit Start-up behaviour is improved by limiting the active I-component. At the same time, limit parameters Y1 and Y2 must correspond to the operating range of the controlled device connected. Example: Landis & Staefa M3P magnetic valve.. ARW limit parameters (F6.1) ARW limit parameters (F6.2) Operating range: 10 ... 15 V Y1 = 50 %; Y2 = 75 % Y1 = 50 %; Y2 = 75 %
y
100 % Y2 = 75 % Y2 = 75 %
9F234 A
75 % 50 %
Y1 = 50 %
Y1 = 50 %
25 %
0%
ARW circuit

Step response
K21-08.30
7/36 en - 97 - 01
The controller output signal y is a combination of the P and I-components. The high limit, Y2, allows for a maximum I-component of 75 % of the measuring range of y, while the low limit, Y1, always sets the active Icomponent at a minimum of 50 %.
xd
9F235
t xd
100%
dynamic I-component Y2-Y1 = 25% P-component y =Y2+PComponent
Y1 = 50%
Step response
Principle of operation With a constant control deviation of + xd, the I-component increases without ARW until the controller output signal reaches y = 100 % . This applies despite the fact that the magnetic valve is fully open when y = 75 %. The result of a subsequent control deviation of xd is that integration up to controller output signal y = 75 % has no effect on the valve position. Restricting the I-component to the actual control range (in this case 50 % 75 %) eliminates the effect described above, and so improves control action with large setpoint steps.
F7.1. PID controller (reverse acting) F7.2. PID controller (direct acting)
These two functions generate conventional PID control sequences, either reverse acting or direct acting. The sequence is shifted by entering an offset value (Of). The ARW circuit, incorporated to improve start-up response, limits the active I-component via parameters Y1 and Y2.
9E561
w x
PID
y
Xp Tn Tv Y1 (Ygmin) Y2(Ygmax)
100%
Xp
9E745
Of
w x
+ +
wr + PID
0% wr w -Of +Of
Function F7.1
wr

Xp Tn Tv Y1 (Ygmin) Y2(Ygmax)
K21-08.30
8/36 en - 97 - 01
100%
Xp
9E746
Of
w x
+ +
wr + PID
0% wr w -Of +Of
Function F7.2
wr
Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard"definition range "Universal"definition range Description Measured value Setpoint Offset P band Integral action time Derivative action time Low ARW limit High ARW limit Controller output signal Symbol x :U w :U Of : U Xp : U Tn : U Tv Y1 Y2 y :U :U :U :U Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB as for x, ME as for x. half relative MB of x, ME as for x. (Exception: MEx = C MEOf = K) MB from "S" (Code X1 ... X9). MB defined in software. (U:23:19) defined in software (U:23:19) MB = 100 % from "U". (U:04.17) MB = 100 % from "U". (U:04.17) MB from "S" or "U".
Notes The measuring ranges from the "S" and "U" tables admissible for the offset, Of, are those which are symmetrical about zero. In addition, the relative measuring range of the offset must correspond to that of the measured value. (Example: MBx = 50 ... 150 C MBOf = 100 K) The "S" table includes a separate group of measuring ranges valid for the proportional band, Xp. In principle, the measuring range of Xp is defined with 0.5 1000% of the relative measuring range of y. (Example: MBy = 50 ... 150 C MBXp = 1 ... 2000 K) The measuring range for the integral action time Tn and derivative action time Tv, is predefined in software. Tn and Tv may be entered in minutes (m) and/or seconds (s). If Tv = 0, the function is that of a PI controller If Tn = 0, the function is that of a PD controller If Tn = Tv = 0, the function is that of a P controller The reference and limit parameters of the ARW circuit have a fixed measuring range (100 %) from the "U" table (U:04:17). If no limit is required for the I-component, the following values are allocated to the parameters: Heating sequence: Y1 = 0 %; Y2 = 100 % Cooling sequence: Y1 = 0 %; Y2 = 100 %

ARW circuit
K21-08.30
9/36 en - 97 - 01
Start-up behaviour is improved by limiting the active I-component. At the same time, limit parameters Y1 and Y2 must correspond to the operating range of the controlled device connected. Example: Landis & Staefa M3P magnetic valve ARW limit parameters (F7.1) ARW limit parameters (F7.2)
y
100 % Y2 = 75 % Y2 = 75 %
9F234 A
Operating range: 10 ... 15 V Y1 = 50 %; Y2 = 75 % Y1 = 50 %; Y2 = 75 %
75 % 50 %
Y1 = 50 %
Y1 = 50 %
25 %
0%
ARW circuit
Step response The controller output signal y is a combination of the P and I-components. The high limit, Y2, allows for a maximum I-component of 75 % of the measuring range of y, while the low limit, Y1, always sets the active I-component at a minimum of 50 %.
xd
9F235
t xd
100%
dynamic I-component Y2-Y1 = 25 % P-component y =Y2+Pcomponent
Y1 = 50 %
t
Step response

Principle of operation
K21-08.30
10/36 en - 97 - 01
With a constant control deviation of + xd, the I-component increases without ARW until the controller output signal reaches y = 100 %. This applies despite the fact that the magnetic valve is fully open when y = 75 %. The result of a subsequent control deviation of xd is that integration up to controller output signal y = 75 % has no effect on the valve position. Restricting the I-component to the actual control range (in this case 50 % 75 %) eliminates the effect described above, and so improves control action with large setpoint steps.
F8.1 PI-Off controller (reserve acting) F8.2 PI-Off controller (direct acting)
These two functions generate conventional PID control sequences, either reverse acting or direct acting. The sequence is shifted by entering an offset value (Of). The ARW circuit, incorporated to improve start-up response, limits the active I-component via parameters Y1 and Y2. The I-component can be switched on and off during operation via the interlock input xs. If xs = logic 0, the function is that of a PI controller. If xs = logic 1, the function is that of a P controller.
Xp Tn Y1 (Ygmin) Y2(Ygmax) 100% y Xp 9E747A
Of
9E563
w x xs
+ +
wr + PI I off
PI off
y
x xs
0% wr w wr -Of +Of
Function F8.1
100%
Xp
9E748A
Of
w x xs
+ +
wr + PI I off
0% wr w wr -Of +Of
Function F8.2

Parameters
Description Measured value Setpoint Offset P band Interlock signal Integral action time Symbol x : w : Of : Xp : xs : Tn : Definition range U U U U D U U U U
K21-08.30
11/36 en - 97 - 01
U D MB ME "S" "U"
: : : : : :
Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range
Low ARW limit Y1 : High ARW limit Y2 : Controller output signal y :
MB from "S" or "U". MB as for x, ME as for x. half relative MB of x, ME as for x. (Exception: MEx = C MEOf = K) MB from "S" (Code X1 ... X9). 0 ... relative MB of x, ME as for x. MB defined in software. (U:23:19) MB = 100 % from "U". (U:04:17) MB = 100 % from "U". (U:04:17) MB from "S" or "U".
Notes The measuring ranges from the "S" and "U" tables admissible for the offset, Of, are those which are symmetrical about zero. In addition, the relative measuring range of the offset must correspond to that of the measured value. (Example: MBx = 50 ... 150 C MBOf = 100 K) The "S" table includes a separate group of measuring ranges valid for the proportional band, Xp. In principle, the measuring range of Xp is defined with 0.51000 % of the relative measuring range of y. (Example: MBy = 50 ... 150 C MBXp = 1 ... 2000 K) The measuring range for the integral action time Tn is predefined in software. Tn may be entered in minutes (m) and/or seconds (s). Entering Tn = 0 seconds suppresses the I-component and the function is reduced to that of a P controller. The reference and limit parameters of the ARW circuit have a fixed measuring range (100 %) from the "U" table (U:04:17). If no limit is required for the I-component, the following values are allocated to the parameters: Heating sequence: Y1 = 0 %; Y2 = 100 % Cooling sequence: Y1 = 0 %; Y2 = 110 %
ARW circuit Start-up behaviour is improved by limiting the active I-component. At the same time, limit parameters Y1 and Y2 must correspond to the operating range of the controlled device connected. Example: Staefa M3P magnetic valve ARW limit parameters (F8.1) ARW limit parameters (F8.2)
y
100 % Y2 = 75 % Y2 = 75 %
9F234 A
Operating range: 10 ... 15 V Y1 = 50 %; Y2 = 75 % Y1 = 50 %; Y2 = 75 %
75 % 50 %
Y1 = 50 %
Y1 = 50 %
25 %
0%
ARW circuit

Step response
K21-08.30
12/36 en - 97 - 01
The controller output signal y is a combination of the P and I-components. The high limit, Y2, allows for a maximum I-component of 75 % of the measuring range of y, while the low limit, Y1, always sets the active I-component at a minimum of 50 %.
xd
9F235
t xd
100%
dynamic I-component Y2-Y1 = 25 % P-component y = Y2 + Pcomponent
Y1 = 50 %
Step response
Principle of operation With a constant control deviation of + xd, the I-component increases without ARW until the controller output signal reaches y = 100 %. This applies despite the fact that the magnetic valve is fully open when y = 75 %. The result of a subsequent control deviation of xd is that integration up to controller output signal y = 75 % has no effect on the valve position. Restricting the I-component to the actual control range (in this case 50 % 75 %) eliminates the effect described above, and so improves control action with large setpoint steps.
F9.1 On/off controller (reverse acting) F9.2 On/off controller (direct acting)
These two functions generate conventional on/off control sequences, either reverse or direct acting. The sequence is shifted by entering an offset value (Of).
"1" Of XD y Xp 9E566A
9E565
w x
w x
+ wr 2P. + -
"0" wr w wr -Of +Of
Function F9.1

y Xp
K21-08.30
13/36 en - 97 - 01
9E567A
"1" Of XD
w x
+ wr 2P. + -
"0" wr w wr -Of +Of
Function F9.2
Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Description Measured value Setpoint Offset Switching differential Symbol x : U w : U Of : U XD: U Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB as for x, ME as for x. half relative MB of x, ME as for x. (Exception: MEx = C MEOf = K) 0 ... rel. MB of x, ME as for x. (Exception: MEx = C MEXD = K) MB from "S" or "U".
Controller output signal y : D
Notes The measuring ranges from the "S" and "U" tables admissible for the offset, Of, are those which are symmetrical about zero. In addition, the relative measuring range of the offset must correspond to that of the measured value. (Example: MBx = 50 ... 150 C MBOf = 100 K) The switching differential XD is assigned an analogue measuring range which starts at zero from the "S" or "U" table. The high limit is the relative measuring range of the measured value x. (Example: MBx = 50 ...150 C MBXD = 0 ... 200 K) Function blocks F9.1 or F9.2 must not be followed directly by a DW register. The solution is to use an F12.1 memory link function after the F9.** block.
F10.1 Proportional auxiliary sequence (reverse acting) F10.2 Proportional auxiliary sequence (direct acting)
These two functions generate a proportional auxiliary sequence which can be shifted by defining an offset value (Of).
9E568
Typical applications: Formation of additional sequences Inversion of analogue signals

y 100% Of Xe1 Xa1 9E569
xe
xe
0% Xa1 Xe1 -Of +Of
xe
Function F10.1

y 100% Of Xe1 Xa1
K21-08.30
14/36 en - 97 - 01
9E570
xe
0%
Xe1 Xa1 -Of +Of
xe
Function F10.2
Parameters
Description U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Input variable Cut-in point End point Offset Output signal Symbol xe : Xe1 Xa1 Of : U : : U Definition range MB from "S" or "U". U MB as for xe, ME as for xe. U MB as for xe, ME as for xe. half relative MB of xe, ME as for xe. (Exception: MExe = C MEOf = K) (MB from "S" or "U".
y : U
Notes The measuring ranges from the "S" and "U" tables admissible for the offset, Of, are those which are symmetrical about zero. In addition, the relative measuring range of the offset must correspond to that of the measured value. (Example: MBx = 50 ...150 C MBOf = 100 K)
F11 F11.1 F11.2 F11.3 F11.4

9E571
Fixed value function Digital "ON" Digital "OFF" Analogue "100 %" Analogue "0 %"
The fixed value functions are used to hold analogue or digital values high or low.
Typical application: Driving outputs for paging

9E572
9E573
y "1"
y "0"
Function F11.1
Function F11.2
9E574
9E575
y 100%
0%
Function F11.3
Function F11.4

Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal"definition range Function / Description F11.1 : Output variable F11.2 : Output variable F11.3 : Output variable F11.4 : Output variable Symbol y:D y:D y:U y:U Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB from "S" or "U". MB from "S" or "U". MB from "S" or "U".
K21-08.30
15/36 en - 97 - 01
Notes The constant output values shown in the diagrams refer to the operating range of the RS module. The measuring range selected determines the absolute output variable y, which can be read on the NBRN operator terminal. (Example: F11.3: MBy = 50 ...150 C y =150 C) For analogue function blocks, a default parameter must be entered in accordance with the next function block.
F12.1 Digital memory link function F12.2 Analogue memory link function
These functions are used to transfer data into other registers of the same data type. Typical application:
9E576
Transfer of values across operating modes

9E577
9E578
xe
y
xe y: = xe y
xe y: = xe
Function F12.1;
F12.2
U D MB ME "S" "U"
: : : : : :
Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal"definition range
Parameters
Function / Description F12.1 : Input variable *Output variable F12.2 : Input variable *Output variable Symbol xe : D y : D xe : U y :U Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB as for xe, ME as for xe. MB from "S" or "U". MB as for xe, ME as for xe.
* Can be modified if required. If not changed here, account must be taken of the internal conversion mechanism.
INTEGRAL AS1000 SAPIM basic functions F12.3 Analogue-Digital memory link F12.4 Digital-Analogue memory link
9E576
K21-08.30
16/36 en - 97 - 01
Function F12.3 converts a two-state analogue signal (0 % or 100 %) into a true digital signal (logic 0 or logic 1). Function F12.4 converts a digital signal (logic 0 or logic 1) into an analogue signal (0 % or 100 %).
9E580
xe
Note: The memory link function must be used for all signal conversions.
9E579
xe y: = xe
xe y: = xe
> 50% = "1"
Function F12.3
F12.4
Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal"definition range Function / Description F12.3 : Input variable Output variable F12.4 : Input variable Output variable Symbol xe : U y :D xe : D y :U Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB from "S" or "U". MB from "S" or "U". MB from "S" or "U".
F13.1 Ring counter

9E581
y1 xe y8
This function has a digital input xe and two to eight digital outputs ranging from y1...y2 to y1...y8. The number of outputs required and their initial logic states is defined during the structuring process or when setting the parameters. Whenever input variable xe changes from logic 0 to logic 1, the counter shifts all the output values by one place. Typical application: Boiler lead/lag
9E582A
1 xe 0
0 0 0 1 1 1 x x
y1 y2 y3 y4 y5 y6 y7 y8
Function F13.1

Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal"definition range Description Input variable Output variable Output variable Output variable Output variable Output variable Output variable Output variable Output variable Symbol xe y1 y2 y3 y4 y5 y6 y7 y8 : : : : : : : : : D D D D D D D D D Definition range MB from "S" or "U"
K21-08.30
17/36 en - 97 - 01
MB software-defined (U:63:01)
Notes In the event of a power failure, or when the operating mode changes, the current output pattern will be lost. When the function is restarted, the predefined output pattern is active. Several versions of this function are available in staefa plan, so that if, for instance, a structure requires 5 outputs, function F131_5 can be invoked, and so on. If a change of application results in a change in the number of outputs required, then the existing block must be deleted, and a new one, with the required number of outputs, must be inserted. Do not, under any circumstances, just delete an output with its register.
9E583
F14.1 Timer, switch-on delay

If the input variable xe changes from logic 0 to logic 1, this value is transmitted to output y after a delay-time of TL. When xe switches back to logic 0, y will also return to logic 0.
xe "1" 9E584
xe
TIM
xe
"0" xe "1"
TL t TL
"0"
Function F14.1
INTEGRAL AS1000 SAPIM basic functions F14.2 Timer, switch-off delay
K21-08.30
18/36 en - 97 - 01
If the input variable xe changes from logic 1 to logic 0, this value is transmitted to output y after a delay-time of TL. When xe switches to logic 1, y will also switch to logic 1.
xe "1" 9E585
xe
"0" xe "1"
TL t TL
"0"
Function F14.2
Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Description Input variable Delay time Output variable Symbol xe : D TL : U y : D Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB software-defined. (U:26:19) MB from "S" or "U".
Notes The measuring range of delay time TL is predefined in the software. TL may be entered in hours (h), minutes (m) and/or seconds (s). The timer is only active in the operating mode in which it was defined. If the operating mode changes, or if the power fails, the current timer status will be lost. If TL is set at 0, the function will not operate, with the result that the status of the next register will never change. TL must therefore always be > 0.
Note: "On" and "Off" pulses may be implemented by structuring other basic functions.
16.1 Logic "AND 2" 16.2 Logic "AND 3" 16.3 Logic "AND 4"
Principle of the AND operation: Output y = logic 1 only if the status of all the xe inputs is logic 1.
9E589
9E590
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
xe1 xe2
AND
AND 2
xe1 xe2 xe3
AND 3
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
AND 4
y Function F16.1; F16.2; F16.3

Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Description Input variable Input variable Input variable Input variable Output variable Symbol xe : D xe2 : D xe3 : D xe4 : D y : D Definition range MB as for y, ME as for y.
K21-08.30
19/36 en - 97 - 01
MB from "S" or "U".
F17.1 Logic "OR 2" F17.2 Logic "OR 3" F17.3 Logic "OR 4"
Principle of the OR operation: Output y = logic 1 when the status of at least one of the xe inputs is logic 1.
9E591
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
9E592
OR
xe1 xe2
OR 2
xe1 xe2 xe3
OR 3
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
OR 4
Function F17.1; F17.2; F17.3
Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Description Input variable Input variable Input variable Input variable Output variable Symbol xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4 y : : : : : D D D D D Definition range MB as for y, ME as for y.
MB from "S" or "U".
9E593
F18.1 Logic "EXOR"

Principle of the EXOR operation (exclusive OR): Output y = logic 1 if the status of either one of the xe inputs (but not both) is logic 1.
9E594 xe1 = "1" xe2 = "1" xe1 EXOR xe2 y xe1 = "0" xe2 = "0" xe1 = "1" xe2 = "0" xe1 = "0" xe2 = "1" y = "0" y = "0" y = "1" y = "1"
xe1 xe2
EXOR
Function F18.1

Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Description Input variable Input variable Output variable Symbol xe1 : D xe2 : D y : D Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB as for xe1, ME as for xe1. MB as for xe1, ME as for xe1.
K21-08.30
20/36 en - 97 - 01
F19.1 Logic "NOT"

9E595
xe
NOT
Principle of the NOT operation: Output y always assumes the status opposite to that of input xe.
9E596A xe1 = "1" xe NOT y xe1 = "0" y = "0" y = "1"
Function F19.1
Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Description Input variable Output variable Symbol xe y : D : D Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB as for xe, ME as for xe.
F20.1 Maximum value "2" F20.2 Maximum value "3" F20.3 Maximum value "4"
The xe input values are compared, and in each case the highest value is transmitted to output y.
9E598
9E597
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
xe1 xe2
>2
xe1 xe2 xe3
>3
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
>4
Function F20.1; F20.2; F20.3

Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Description Input variable Input variable Input variable Input variable Output variable Symbol xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4 y : : : : : U U U U U Definition range MB as for y, ME as for y.
K21-08.30
21/36 en - 97 - 01
MB from "S" or "U".
F21.1 Minimum value "2" F21.2 Minimum value "3" F21.3 Minimum value "4"
Input values xe are compared, and in each case, the lowest value is transmitted to output y.
9E599
9E600
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
xe1
y
xe2
<2
xe1 xe2 xe3
<3
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
<4
Function F21.1; F21.2; F21.3
Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Description Input variable Input variable Input variable Input variable Output variable Symbol xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4 y : : : : : U U U U U Definition range MB as for y, ME as for y.
MB from "S" or "U".
INTEGRAL AS1000 SAPIM basic functions F22.1 Average value "2" F22.2 Average value "3" F22.3 Average value "4"
K21-08.30
22/36 en - 97 - 01
The average is derived from input values xe, and transmitted to output y.
9E633
9E634
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
xe1
xe2
xe1 xe2 xe3
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
Function F22.1; F22.2; F22.3
Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Description Input variable Average value Average value Average value Output value Symbol xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4 y : : : : : U U U U U Definition range MB as for y, ME as for y.
MB from S or "U".
F23.1 Energy recovery logic

xe1 xe2
9F254
With this function, the energy recovery output signal y is selected in accordance with a given algorithm (see truth table). The digital outputs available assume logic 1 status in the following circumstances: Positive enthalpy signal y + h = logic 1, if the outside air (or outside temperature only or humidity only) is higher than the enthalpy in the extract air. Alarm output ya = logic 1, if there is a simultaneous demand for heating and cooling or a simultaneous demand for humidification and dehumidification.
xeT xeK xeH xeE
h, x
yh ya y

Typical application: All types of energy recovery systems
9F255 xeT xeH xeK xeE xeTH 0% xeKE y
K21-08.30
23/36 en - 97 - 01
XEE XEK XEH XET
^ ED "0" = xeE < XEE = > ED "1" ^ xeE = XEE = KD "0" ^ xeK < XEK = = > KD "1" ^ xeK = XEK = ED KD
^ TD "0" = xeT < XET = > TD "1" ^ xeT = XET = ^ HD "0" = xeH < XEH = > ^ HD "1" = xeH = XEH HD TD ya
BA0164 y+h xe1 xe2 ^ y + h "0" = xe1 < xe2 > ^ y + h "1" = xe1 = xe2
y+h
Function F23.1
Parameters
Description Outside air enthalpy or temperature Extract air enthalpy or temperature Heating demand Cooling demand Humidification demand Dehum. demand Cut-in value of xeT Cut-in value of xeK Cut-in value of xeH Cut-in value of xeE Positive enthalpy Alarm output Energy recovery output Symbol xe1 : U xe2 : U xeT : xeK : xeH : xeE : XET : XEK : XEH : XEE : y+h : ya : y : U U U U U U U U D D U Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB as for xe1, ME as for xe1. MB from "S" or "U". MB as for xeT, ME as for xeT. MB as for xeT, ME as for xeT. MB as for xeT, ME as for xeT. MB as for xeT, ME as for xeT. MB as for xeT, ME as for xeT. MB as for xeT, ME as for xeT. MB as for xeT, ME as for xeT. MB from "S" or "U". MB from "S" or "U". MB as for xeT, ME as for xeT.
U D MB ME "S" "U"
: : : : : :
Notes It is useful to select the same measuring range and unit of measurement (ideally 0 100 %) for the demand-signals, cut-in values and energy recovery output signal. If y + h and ya are allocated to a location in the alarm register (DY..), the measuring range and unit of measurement are fixed. There is no internal hysteresis within the function block. It is therefore advisable to engineer an F30.1 function block in front of each enthalpy or demand input used. This will prevent hunting when the input statuses are nearly the same.

Definition / Truth table
Demand Heating Cooling Humidif. Dehum. demand demand demand demand Supply Outputs y Cooling energy more costly TD "0" "0" "0" "0" "0" "0" "0" "0" "1" "1" "1" "1" "1" "1" "1" "1" KD "0" "0" "0" "0" "1" "1" "1" "1" "0" "0" "0" "0" "1" "1" "1" "1" HD "0" "0" "1" "1" "0" "0" "1" "1" "0" "0" "1" "1" "0" "0" "1" "1" ED "0" "1" "0" "1" "0" "1" "0" "1" "0" "1" "0" "1" "0" "1" "0" "1" y + h = "1" y + h = "0" xeKE xeKE xeKE xeKE xeKE xeKE xeKE xeKE xeKE xeKE xeKE xeKE xeKE xeKE xeKE xeKE xeTH xeTH xeTH 0% xeTH xeTH 0% 0% xeTH 0% xeTH 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%
K21-08.30
24/36 en - 97 - 01
ya Heating energy more costly y + h = "1" y + h = "0" xeKE xeKE xeKE 0% xeKE xeKE 0% 0% xeKE 0% xeKE 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% xeTH xeTH xeTH xeTH xeTH xeTH xeTH xeTH xeTH xeTH xeTH xeTH xeTH xeTH xeTH xeTH 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
Truth table
Code definition In addition to register scaling, the following codes must be set: Code: C1: 1 2 3 0 1 0 1 0 1 = Temperature = Humidity = Enthalpy = Cooling more costly = Heating more costly = Without alarm output ya = With alarm output ya = Without output y+h = With output y+h
C2 : C3 : C4 :
F23.2 Enthalpy calculator

9F257
xe1 xe2
Using the formula below, this function calculates the specific enthalpy of a given point at constant pressure (1013 mbar). Input xe1 is defined for the temperature in C, and input xe2 for humidity in %rh. Typical application: Full air conditioning systems with energy recovery control by enthalpy comparison.
K21-08.30
25/36 en - 97 - 01
9F278A P=980 mbar 60 100%rH 50

kJ /k g( y)
70% 50%
39 ,1
40
30% 30
xe 2
20
10 h (kJ/kg) 0
10%
H = k1t + xs(t) (k2 t + k3) h k 1, k2, k3 xs(t) t Specific enthalpy Constants Moisture content at saturation Relative humidity Temperature
-15
-10
-5
10
15
20 xe1
25
30
35
40 tsic(C)
Function F23.2
Example: 20 C / 50 %r.h. : 38.5 kJ / kg
Parameters
Description Temperature input U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Humidity input Enthalpy output Symbol xe1 : U xe2 : U y : U Definition range MB = 50 ...150 C (U:07:02) MB = 0 ...100 %rh (U:13:04) MB = 50 ...150 kJ / kg. (U:07:11)
Notes The definition ranges for all the function variables are predefined in the software and cannot be influenced.
F24.1 Universal curve

This function can form the core of a defined heating curve. In this application it determines the relationship between the outside temperature xe and the flow temperature y. Other influences on the heating curve (e.g. limit control, night setback etc.) can be achieved by structuring additional basic functions as appropriate (see Section 8). The function can also be used for other reset or mathematical functions. There is no restriction on the shape of the curve (i.e. Xan may be > Xan1 or Xan may be < Xan1) except that Xe1 Xe2 Xe3 Xe4.
y 9F259
9F258
xe
Xa1 Xa2
Xa3
Xa4 Xa4 Xa3 y
xe
Xa2 Xa1 Xe4 Xe3
xe
Xe1 Xe2
Xe3
Xe4 Xe2 Xe1
Function F24.1

Parameters
Description Input variable Cut-in point 1 Height variable 1 Cut-in 2 Height variable 2 Cut-in 3 Height variable 3 Cut-in 4 Height variable 4 Output signal Symbol xe : Xe1 : Xa1 : Xe2 : Xa2 : Xe3 : Xa3 : Xe4 : Xa4 : y : U U U U U U U U U U Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB as for xe, ME as for xe. MB as for y, ME as for y. MB as for xe, ME as for xe. MB as for y, ME as for y. MB as for xe, ME as for xe. MB as for y, ME as for y. MB as for xe, ME as for xe. MB as for y, ME as for y. MB from "S" or "U".
K21-08.30
26/36 en - 97 - 01
U D MB ME "S" "U"
: : : : : :
xs
9F261
F25.1 Self-adaptive optimiser

y1 y2 y3
xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4
OSSC
The following optimiser functions are available for use with heating and/or cooling applications: adaptive optimum start control adaptive optimum stop control With optimum stop control, the acceptable room temperature / setpoint differential after the end of occupancy can be defined. Additional measures such as low temperature limit control are implemented with other basic functions.
xs
9F260
xe1
xe2 "1" xe3 xe4
x1 y2 y3
Boost Forced cooling Normal control
Function F26.1
Parameters
Description Room temperature Outside temperature Room setpoint Temp. differential (xe3-xe1) Data reset Boost Forced cooling Normal control Symbol xe1 xe2 xe3 xe4 xs y1 y2 y3 : : : : : : : : U U U U D D D D Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB as for xe1, ME as for xe1. MB as for xe1, ME as for xe1. 0 ... relative MB of xe1, ME as for xe1. (Exception: MExe1 = C MExe4 = K) MB from "S" or "U". MB from "S" or "U". MB from "S" or "U". MB from "S" or "U".
U D MB ME "S" "U"
: : : : : :

Notes
K21-08.30
27/36 en - 97 - 01
An analogue measuring range starting at zero from the "S" or "U" table is assigned to temperature differential xe4. The end of the range is the relative measuring range of xe1. If both heating and cooling optimisation are required, then separate function blocks should be structured. When the function is not required to operate, the block should be disabled. This can be achieved either by ensuring that the mode in which it is structured is off, or by switching the room temperature input (Xe1) to the setpoint (Xe3) by means of other function blocks. Otherwise, erroneous adaption will occur. When the heating is in operation, digital output y1 or y3 is active. Output y1 controls the boost (e.g. at maximum flow temperature) after which output y3 enables normal control. At the end of occupancy, i.e. when optimum stop control takes effect, y3 is reset. When cooling is in operation, digital output y2 or y3 is active. Output y2 controls the forced cooling, after which y3 enables normal control. At the end of occupancy, i.e. when optimum stop control takes effect, y3 is reset. Boost or forced cooling remain in operation until the room temperature reaches the setpoint. The reset signal xs deletes all the adaptive values. The occupancy times are entered via the NBRN operator. The number of the time channel for this purpose must be reserved at the structuring stage. The calculated boost time is limited to a maximum of 6 hours and to a minimum of 6 minutes. Code definition In addition to register scaling, the following codes (15) must be set: 1. Time channel (1 8) 2. Stop Control Yes / No 3. Start Control Yes / No 4. Cooling system Yes / No 5. Heating system Yes / No Heating Start control
9F262
Stop control
xe1
9F264
xe3
xe3
xe4
t "1"
t "1"
"0"
"0"
"1" y1 "0" t
"1" y2 "0" t
"1" y3 "0" t
"1" y3 "0" t
- - - - - - Switch-on signal too early - - - Switch-on signal too late Switch-on signal optimised
- - - - - - Switch-off signal too early - - - Switch-off signal too late Switch-off signal optimised

Cooling Start control
xe1
9F263
K21-08.30
28/36 en - 97 - 01
Stop control
xe1
9F265
xe3 t "1"
xe4 xe3 t "1"
"0"
"0"
"1" y2 "0" t
"1" y2 "0" t
"1" y3 "0" t
"1" y3 "0" t
- - - - - - Switch-on signal too early - - - Switch-on signal too late Switch-on signal optimised
- - - - - - Switch-off signal too early - - - Switch-off signal too late Switch-off signal optimised
F26.1 Slow filter

The input variable is measured at a scanning interval of TL1 and included in the calculation of the filtered value. The value filtered over the selected response time, TL, is transmitted to output y and remains constant until the input is measured again. Typical application: Filtered outside temperature for Summer / Winter change-over
xe1 1K t = = = TL TL1 TL xe1 y y 9F267 1K t
9F266
xe1
med
xe1
TL1 (xe1, y)
TL1
TL1
xe1 Yn
t TL TL1 TL TL1 TL1 + TL 4 TL1
Yn = Yn-1 + (xe1 - Yn - 1)
Function F26.1

Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Description Input variable Response time Output variable Scanning interval: Symbol xe1 : U TL : U y : U h Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB software-defined (U:26:21) MB as for xe1, ME as for xe1. (1256 h)
K21-08.30
29/36 en - 97 - 01
Notes When the function starts for the first time, output variable y corresponds to input variable xe1. The filtered value calculated is stored in the EEPROM. After a power failure or a change of operating mode, the new filtered value Yn is calculated from the last filtered value Yn-1 and the first input variable xe1, and transmitted to output y. Care should therefore be taken during the commissioning stage, if this function block is used, and it may be necessary to structure some means of by-pass. If the response time, parameter TL, is set to 0, the momentary value is stored rather than the filtered value.
F27.1 Addition / subtraction function

9E601
xe1 xe2 xe3 w
This function is generally used where several setpoint resets or step changes are operative at the same time. Input variable xe1 is added to setpoint w, while input variables xe2 and xe3 are subtracted from setpoint w.
9E602 xe1 xe2 xe3 w + + y y w -xe3 +xe1 -xe2
Function F27.1
Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Description Setpoint Input variable Input variable Input variable Output variable Symbol w xe1 xe2 xe3 y : : : : : U U U U U Definition range MB from "S" or "U". 0 ... relative MB of w, ME as for w. (Exception: MEw = C MExe1 = K) MB as for w, ME as for w.
Notes The same measuring range from the "S" or "U" table is assigned to input variables xe1, xe2 and xe3. The range starts at 0, and the upper end of the range is the relative measuring range of the setpoint. (Example: MBw = 50 ... 150 C MBxe1 = 0 ... 200 K) Input variables which are not required are structured as parameters and assigned the low limit of the range. To save memory space, use the same register address for all parameters which are not required.
INTEGRAL AS1000 SAPIM basic functions F28.1 Slew rate limit

9E603
K21-08.30
30/36 en - 97 - 01
xe
This function allows for continuous, time-dependent transmission of input variable xe to output y. The value to be entered, TL corresponds to the positioning time with an input step of 100 %. Typical application: Switch-on or switch-off damping for controlled devices Ramp generation
100% xe 9E604A
y xe y
0% TL max. 50000 TL = max. 10000 s s TL
TL
Function F28.1
Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Description Input variable Positioning time Output variable Symbol xe : U TL : U y : U Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB software-defined (U:26:19) (max. 50 000 s) MB as for xe, ME as for xe.
Notes The measuring range of positioning time TL is predefined in the software. TL may be entered in hours (h), minutes (m) and/or seconds (s). Although the measuring range defined allows for a theoretical positioning time of 65 535 s, note that the actual positioning time must not exceed 50 000 s.
F29.1 Totalising ring counter

9F268
y1 xe
TIM
This function has one digital input xe and two to eight digital outputs (y1y2 to y1y8). The number of outputs required and their initial logic status is defined during structuring or when setting parameters. The totaliser is active only when xe = logic 1. When the current totaliser status Yz reaches the predefined run-time TL, the outputs are shifted by one place and Yz starts again at zero. It is also possible to use reset input xs to reset the totaliser at any time.
(165535 h) TL xs (Reset)
9F269
y8
1 xe TIM 0 000 h
0 0 0 1 1 1 x x
y1 y2 y3 y4 y5 y6 y7 y8
Yz
Function F29.1

Parameters
Description Input variable Run-time Totaliser status Reset Output variable Output variable Output variable Output variable Output variable Output variable Output variable Output variable Symbol xe TL Yz xs y1 y2 y3 y4 y5 y6 y7 y8 : : : : : : : : : : : : D U U D D D D D D D D D Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB software-defined (U:26:21) MB as for TL, ME as for TL. MB from "S" or "U".
K21-08.30
31/36 en - 97 - 01
U D MB ME "S"
: : : : :
Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range
MB software-defined (U:63:01)
Notes Both the current pattern of outputs and the current totaliser status are stored in the EEPROM. If the operating mode changes, the output pattern and totaliser status are retained. Fractions of an hour are lost unless the function was defined in the basic operating mode. Similarly, in the event of a power failure the output pattern and totaliser status are retained but fractions of an hour are lost. If the xe input is used to effect an override reset of the totaliser, it is important to ensure that xs regains the logic 0 status. Several versions of this function block are available in INTEGRAL PLAN. Hence, if, for example, the structure requires 5 outputs, this can be achieved by invoking Function F291_5 etc. If a change of application results in a change in the number of outputs required, then the existing block must be deleted, and a new one, with the required number of outputs, must be inserted. Do not, under any circumstances, just delete an output with its register. After every download all F29.1 totalising ring counters in the SAPIM structure must be set manually to zero.
9F270
F30.1 Hysteresis
This function enables minor instabilities of input variable xe to be absorbed without affecting the output variable y. If the deviation exceeds the measurement H/2, the current input variable provides both the new basis for the hysteresis and the new output variable. Typical application: Stabilisation for: Cascade with high amplification Control loops with remote resets Control of 3-point output steps For use in conjunction with Function F23.1
y 100% 9F271
xe
xe1
y H xe y
0% H
Function F30.1

Parameters
U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Description Input variable Hysteresis limit Output variable Symbol xe H y : U : U : U Definition range
K21-08.30
32/36 en - 97 - 01
MB from "S" or "U". 0 ... relative MB of xe, ME as for xe. (Exception: MExe = C MEH = K) MB as for xe, ME as for xe.
Notes An analogue measuring range from the "S" or "U" starting at zero is assigned to he hysteresis limit H. The end of the range is the relative measuring range of xe. (Example: MBxe = 50 ... 150 C MBH = 0 ... 200 K)
F52.1 Digital output function (with DO) F52.2 Digital output function (with UO)
One output function is allocated to each hardware output. The digital output function is divided into three partial functions connected in a fixed sequence.
9F275
xe1
DO
Manual control allows for direct access to the output function from the operator terminal. In this case, instead of the input signal xe1, the value entered is transmitted to the next partial function. The interlock function block allows for direct influence of the output function via an interlock variable Xs. The desired output signal is achieved in the interlock status by selecting the appropriate C1 code. The time function block is used to assign a switch-on and/or switch-off delay to the output. The same delay time, TL will apply to all delays. If required, a run-time totaliser may be structured for each output function. The choice of the appropriate C4 code determines whether counting is to occur when the output status is logic 0 or logic 1. Notes The measuring range for delay-time TL is pre-defined in the software. TL may be entered in hours (h), minutes (m) and/or seconds (s). Intermediate values ya1 and ya2 are not accessible. The maximum capacity of the totaliser is 99 999.9 hours. The interlock functions should not be used when there is a requirement to allow manual override (e.g. from an MS2000 system) under all conditions. Conversely, these interlock functions should be used where there is a requirement that safety interlocks should not be overridden. The use of interlock functions is a matter of careful judgement and varies from system to system, the primary considerations being safety and the prevention of damage to equipment. If included, interlocks should preferably be incorporated directly in the structure.
9F276 A
Xs Xe2 Xe3
xe1
ya1
C1
Xs Xe3 Xe2
ya2
C2
TL
C3, C4
Function F52.1; F52.2

Parameters
Description U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Input variable Interlock variable Interlock input Interlock input Run time Output variable Symbol Xe1 : Xs : Xe2 : Xe3 : TL : y : D D U U U D/U Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB from "S" or "U". MB from "S" or "U". MB as for Xe2, ME as for Xe2. MB software-defined (U:26:19) MB from "S" or "U"
K21-08.30
33/36 en - 97 - 01
Codes C1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 C2 0 1 2 3
1 ya2 TL y y y
Interlock signal No interlock Xs = 0 Xs = 0 Xs = 1 Xs = 1 Xe2 > Xe3 Xe2 > Xe3 Time function No time delay Switch-on delayed by TL Switch-off delayed by TL Switch-on and switch-off both delayed by TL
2 TL ya2 ya2 TL TL 3
9F277
ya2 = ya2 = ya2 = ya2 = ya2 = ya2 = ya2 =
ya1 0 1 0 1 0 1
C2: Code 1; Code 2; Code 3
C3 0 1 C4 0 1
Run-time totaliser (RTT) No run-time totaliser Run-time totaliser RTT operation (where C3 = 1) Counts when output status = logic 0 Counts when output status = logic 1
INTEGRAL AS1000 SAPIM basic functions F53.1 Analogue output function

9F272
K21-08.30
34/36 en - 97 - 01
xe1
AO
One output function is allocated to each hardware output. The analogue output function is divided into four partial functions connected in a fixed sequence. Manual control allows for direct access to the output function from the operator terminal. In this case, instead of the input signal xe1, the value entered is transmitted to the next partial function. The interlock function allows for direct influence of the output function via an override variable Xs. The desired output signal in the interlock state is achieved by selecting the appropriate C1 code. The slew rate limit function allows continuous time-dependent transmission of the signal to the next function block (see F28.1). The value to be entered, TL1 corresponds to the slew rate limit fro an input step of 100 %. There are four options for defining the output characteristic required. These are defined by selecting the appropriate C3 code. Notes The measuring ranges for the slew rate limit TL1 and the cycle/run time TL2 are predefined in the software. TL1 and TL2 may be entered in hours (h), minutes (m) and/or seconds (s). Although the defined measuring range allows for a slew rate TL1 of 65 535 s, the actual slew rate limit must not exceed 50 000 s. To stabilise control of the mid-position in the case of 3-point proportional or 3-point quasi-proportional control, it is advisable to include a hysteresis function (F30.1) before the output function. Intermediate variables ya1, ya2 and ya3 are not accessible. The interlock functions should not be used when there is a requirement to allow manual override (e.g. from an MS2000 system) under all conditions. Conversely, these interlock functions should be used where there is a requirement that safety interlocks should not be overridden. The use of interlock functions is a matter of careful judgement and varies from system to system, the primary considerations being safety and the prevention of damage to equipment. If included, interlocks should preferably be incorporated directly in the structure.
9F273 A
Xs Xe2 Xe3
xe1
ya1
C1
Xs Xe3 Xe2
ya2
C2
TL1
ya3
C3
TL2
Function F53.1
Parameters
Description U D MB ME "S" "U" : : : : : : Universal signal Digital signal Measuring range Unit of measurement "Standard" definition range "Universal" definition range Input variable Interlock variable Interlock input Interlock input Slew rate limit Cycle/run time Output variable Symbol xe1 : Xs : Xe2 : Xe3 : TL1 : TL2 : y : U D U U U U UO Definition range MB from "S" or "U". MB from "S" or "U". MB from "S" or "U". MB as for Xe2, ME as for Xe2. MB software-defined (U:26:19) MB software-defined (U:26:19) MB from "S" or "U".

Codes C1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 C2 0 1
ya2 100%
K21-08.30
35/36 en - 97 - 01
Interlock No interlock Xs = 0 Xs = 0 Xs = 1 Xs = 1 Xe>Xe3 Xe2>Xe3 Slew rate limit None Slew rate limit TL1
9F274A
ya2 = ya2 = ya2 = ya2 = ya2 = ya2 = ya2 =
ya1 0% 100 % 0% 100 % 0% 100 %
ya3
0% TL = max. 10000 s 50000 s TL
C2: Code 1
C3 0 1 2 3 Code 0:
Control Proportional 2-point time-proportioning 3-point time-proportioning 3-point quasi-proportional
The calculated output signal y is transmitted directly to the output Code 1: The calculated output signal y appears at the output as a timeproportioning signal, where y may only be 0 % or 100 %. The duration of the periods is determined by the cycle / run time TL2.
y 100%
9F282
y 100%
9F283
0% 100%
ya3
0% ya3 : TL2 TL2 100%
ya3
C3: Code 0
Code 1

Code 2:
K21-08.30
36/36 en - 97 - 01
Note: The minimum pulse length (TL2) which can be transmitted to output y is 1s. Calculated pulse lengths between 0.5 s and 1 s are rounded up, while those below 0.5 s are ignored. A larger hysteresis can be achieved by prior connection of function F30.1.
The proportional demand signal ya3 is converted into a time-proportioning signal, where the duration of the period corresponds to the cycle time TL2. The resulting output signal y, which may only assume the values 0 %, 50 % or 100 % switches the appropriate relay in the connected terminal module (e.g. NKOK). The following applies: ya3 > 50 % y ya3 = 50 % y ya3 < 50 % y
y 100%
= 100 % Relay "a" ON = 50 % Relays "a" and "b" OFF = 0 % Relay "b" ON
TL2
9F284
a
ya3 : TL2 50% 0% 50% ya3 : TL2 100% ya3
0% TL2
C3: Code 2
Code 3: If the demand signal ya3 is constant, the output signal y = 50 % also remains constant. An increase or reduction in ya3 causes y to change to 100 % or 0 % respectively, thereby activating the appropriate relay in the connected terminal module (e.g. NKOK). The position of the controlled device can be determined from the run-time (TL2) registered and the direction of travel. It is sufficient to specify the time TL2 required by the controlled device to travel through 100 % of its operating stroke is sufficient information.
Note: Synchronisation is required at least once every 24 hours to avoid major positioning errors. This is achieved by a continuous "Close" command. In other words, an override signal of y = 0 % must be transmitted to the output for a duration of at least 1.2 x TL2. Automatic synchronisation occurs when the power supply is switched on. The minimum pulse length (TL2) which can be transmitted to output y is 1s. Calculated pulse lengths between 0.5 s and 1 s are rounded up, while those below 0.5 s are ignored. A larger hysteresis can be achieved by prior connection of function F30.1. C3: Code 3
y 100%
9F285
a +
50% ya3
0% 100% ya3 : TL2 ya3 : TL2
K21-09
Installation instructions EMC / Cable routing
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions EMC / Cable routing
K21-09.01
1/1 en - 97 - 01
Notes on the installation instructions

This section provides basic information on electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), together with the associated instructions for cable routing inside the control panel. Section K21-10 gives mounting instructions for the components of the INTEGRAL AS1000 system, and section K21-11 contains instructions on connecting the INTEGRAL AS1000 system.
Contents
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 09.10
Definition of EMC .............................................................................................. 1 Interference 1 Lightning protection 3 Mains filters 4 Interference suppression in power components 4 Cable routing 09.20
Principles 1 Cable routing inside the control panel 1 Signal strategy 1 Earthing 2 Primary power supply cables (> 50 V) 2 Secondary power supply cables (AC 24 V) 3 Peripheral device signal cables 3 Bus cables 4 Ribbon cables 4
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions EMC
K21-09.10
1/4 en - 97 - 01
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Definition of EMC
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) describes the situation where intentional signals are able to coexist with interference signals without any loss of data in the intended signal. EMC can thus be expressed as the ability of electrical equipment and systems to function within a precisely defined electromagnetic environment without mutual impairment. The term EMC covers both the intrinsic electromagnetic radiation emitted by a device, and its susceptibility to external electromagnetic interference. Both aspects have a decisive influence on the interaction between electronic and electrotechnical equipment, and should be considered as an entity when planning an EMC strategy.
Interference
Especially in industrial applications, electronic devices are always exposed to an individual electromagnetic environment which has various effects on the equipment concerned. The possible causes of interference can be divided into two categories as shown below:
94.0162
1 Conducted interference 2 Non-conducted interference
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions EMC

Conducted interference:
K21-09.10
2/4 en - 97 - 01
The switching of high power ratings in common power supply cables causes significant variations in voltage. The switching of high currents in parallel cables produces a magnetic effect which causes inductive coupling. Rapid voltage variations in parallel cables causes capacitive coupling. Lightning discharge causes galvanic, inductive or capacitive coupling. Non-conducted interference: Radiated interference, from radio pagers and transmitters, for example, can affect devices. Electrostatic discharge can affect devices or systems operated or repaired by a person whose body is electrostatically charged (discharge via the device handled). Non-conducted interference includes other forms of static discharge, and the nuclear electromagnetic pulse (NEMP) resulting from a nuclear explosion.
94.0192
External interference sources

Natural phenomena Atmospheric discharge Electrostatic discharge Other
Electromagnetic fields in engineering processes
Nuclear explosions
Supply voltage
Electrostatic discharge from the human body
Controller
Inputs
Intrinsic interference
Outputs
Field interference
Electromagnetic environment
Conducted interference
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions EMC Lightning protection
K21-09.10
3/4 en - 97 - 01
All cables leaving the building are highly vulnerable to power surges caused by atmospheric discharge (lightning). These surges result in inductive, capacitive or galvanic coupling in electronic systems and can cause malfunctioning of, or damage to, sensitive components. Power surges of this kind must be reduced to a safe level and diverted to earth. This can be achieved with gas-filled surge arresters, varistors, diodes, capacitors and inductors. Specialist companies combine these components into specifically-targeted protection modules for optimum protection of the various types of system. Please contact your local Landis & Staefa office for details of recommended devices.
51149
4 3
Management level
6 3
5 6 3 2 2 1
Automation level
1 4-pole high-energy arrester (coarse protection) in accordance with local regulations 2 Single-pole surge arrester (medium protection) in accordance with local regulations 3 Mains protector (medium protection) 4 Overvoltage protector for end devices (medium protection) 5 Overvoltage protector for serial data cables (fine protection) or modem or fibre optic arrangement 6 Overvoltage protector for communication cable (fine protection); in the INTEGRAL AS1000 system this is built into the NARB/A and NABBS/A adapters. (A lightning protection module should be used when there is a high risk of lightning.) Subject to technical alteration
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions EMC Mains filters
K21-09.10
4/4 en - 97 - 01
In areas prone to high-density interference, power cables may be exposed to high-frequency interference or short-term power surges. Interference of this kind not only affects the transformer primary side, but can even affect components connected on the secondary side. Where there is a possibility of this type of interference, a mains filter must be fitted to the transformer primary side. Mains filters should be located as close to the mains transformers as possible, and must be earthed.
L N PE
51150
AC 230 V
AC 24 V
Connecting a mains filter
Interference suppression in power components

The switching of inductive loads causes power transients, leading to interference being coupled into the system. In addition, sparking can damage the switching contacts. To avoid this type of interference, all power components must be provided with an effective means of interference suppression. Inductive components (transformers, contactors, and relays) must be protected by Transzorbs, MOVs (metal oxide varistors) or RC circuits, connected directly to their terminals. The breakdown voltage of the Transzorbs or MOVs must be between 1.7 and 2 times the corresponding nominal voltage. Inductive interference in DC loads can be suppressed by the use of diodes or RC circuits. The Transzorbs, MOVs or RC circuits must be carefully matched to the power components and connected with short leads. Circuits for inductive loads
Important In the case of AC loads, the RC circuits must not be connected parallel to the switching contact. The impedance of the RC circuit could impair correct switching.
9H324 B
AC 24 V
Relay, contactor
AC 24 V
Motor
Circuit for AC loads
+
DC 24 V
9H325 B
Relay, contactor
Caution: Diodes and single-pole Transzorbs may be used only in DC circuits. Check polarity before installation. Circuit for DC loads
+ M
Motor
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Cable routing
K21-09.20
1/4 en - 97 - 01
Cable routing
Principles
For optimum design of a system in respect of electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), the following points should be noted when selecting and routing cables:
Important: The guidance provided in this section is the basis for correct operation of the system in respect of electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Compliance with the instructions given here is essential.
The longer the distance over which cables are routed in parallel, and the smaller the spacing between them, the greater the level of interference. Mutual interference from cables crossing at right-angles is, by contrast, comparatively small. Twisted cables are less susceptible to interference than single wires or untwisted cables. Unconnected surplus wires in a cable can pick up and transmit interference. Based on the above, the following rules should be observed: Different groups of cables (power supply cables, signal cables) should be routed separately As a general principle, unscreened concentrically stranded or twisted pair cables should be used for sensors, etc. The surplus cores in a cable should be connected in parallel with other cores For detailed information on the connection of the INTEGRAL AS1000 system, see K21-11.20.
Cable routing inside the control panel

The control panel is the point where twisted cables, grouped according to function, are transposed into a different structure. For this reason, careful attention should be paid to the routing of these cables inside the control panel. The five categories of cable in the control panel should be treated separately, where possible: Primary power supply cables (> 50V) Secondary power supply cables (extra low voltage, SELV) Cables connecting the peripheral devices (extra low voltage, SELV) Bus cables (extra low voltage, SELV) Ribbon cable (extra low voltage, SELV) These different categories of cable must not be routed in parallel over long distances. Even inside the control panel, twisted cable should be used where possible. Signal strategy The INTEGRAL AS1000 control and interlock system incorporates SELV-E (PELV) electrical safety principles. This ensures optimum protection from dangerous voltages in the event of wiring errors, and at the same time, has many advantages in respect of EMC. The SELV-E philosophy requires that the low voltage transformer (SELV) should be earthed on the secondary side. The earthed transformer connection is the system reference point and is marked NS (). Only one transformer per system must be earthed (note this point particularly in the case of peripheral devices with a separate supply voltage, e.g. valves).
LS
LS
LS
51078
AC 230 V
AC 24 V
Active sensor
Controller
Valve
NS
NS ()
NS
The SELV-E (PELV) signal strategy

Earthing
K21-09.20
2/4 en - 97 - 01
For the central reference point of the protective earth in each control panel, either an adequate number of earth terminals or a continuous earth rail must be provided. All protective conductors within a control panel must be routed in a star configuration to the central reference point inside the control panel. This is also the point to which the earth (NS) of the transformer secondary side is connected. Protective conductors must not be looped and the removal of a component must not result in a break in the earthing system:
94.0168
9 Caution:
Protective conductors must not be looped.
To ensure that all components are securely connected to chassis or frame, DIN rails etc. must be fixed to the earthed back plate of the control panel, after removal of any paint at the point of connection. All protective conductor connections must be secured (e.g. with spring lock washers) to prevent their working loose:
94.0169
Primary power supply cables (> 50 V) Primary power supply cables must not be routed over long distances inside the control panel. For this reason, the transformers should be installed close to the incoming mains supply.
9 Caution:
Primary power supply cables must never be bundled with or routed in the same trunking as signal cables.
Primary power supply cables must be physically separated from other cables, or they must be double-insulated. In addition, a cable-strain relief must be provided at the point where they enter the control panel. The supply cables to mains filters must be routed separately from the outgoing cables to avoid capacitive coupling, resulting in the recoupling of the filtered interference signals. Fuses must be rated in accordance with local regulations.

Secondary power supply cables (AC 24 V)
K21-09.20
3/4 en - 97 - 01
The secondary power supply cables are extra low voltage cables (SELV) and supply controllers, communication modules etc. with the AC 24 V supply voltage. Note that, where possible, these cables: must not be routed in the vicinity of primary power supply cables (> 50 V) must not be routed parallel to communication cables or peripheral device cables (to avoid inductive and capacitive coupling). For reasons of safety, the power supply must be distributed to individual components in a star configuration.
Important The neutral conductor of the secondary power supply cable (NS) is used as the system reference point and must be earthed.
To implement the SELV-E (PELV) safety strategy, the system reference point (NS) must be connected via a low resistance to the earth connection (e.g. screwed connection to the central earth point). It is advisable to make provision for multiple-use of the system reference point NS at the input terminals. The fuse rating on the secondary side is based on the nominal rating of the installed transformers and on the cross-section of the selected cables. See K21-11 for cable selection and dimensions
Peripheral device signal cables Depending on the specification, the field wiring may be connected to the controllers either directly, or via connection terminals or isolating terminals at the point where the field cable enters the control panel. Direct connection This is the preferred method of connection for passive two-wire peripheral devices (e.g. T1 sensors). The twisted cable is connected directly to the connection terminals of the controllers. For three-wire peripheral devices with a 010 V signal, it is also advisable to route the signal directly to the controller. The supply (LS and NS) can be connected via the input terminals. Wiring to connection terminals With this method, the field wiring is connected directly to connection terminals at the point of entry into the control panel. The wiring between the input terminals and the modules in the control panel is pre-installed as part of the control panel construction. The connection terminals must be grouped according to their use and voltage level: Power supply 110 240 V Control voltage 110 240 V Extra low voltage AC 24 V / DC 60 V Extra low voltage terminals must be located separately from terminals with a higher voltage (min. 8 mm for leakage and clearance). Screened signal cables As a general principle, unscreened twisted pair or concentrically stranded twisted cable should be used. If regulations or environmental conditions require the use of screened cable (e.g. in the vicinity of high voltage cables, HF transmitters or equipment not complying with the EMC directives), ensure that the screen is correctly earthed (e.g. by use of a cable clamp). For effective screening, it is of vital importance that the screen should be connected correctly. Connection diagrams, cable selection and dimensions, see K21-11

Bus cables
K21-09.20
4/4 en - 97 - 01
No connection terminals are required for external bus cables. These are connected directly, and in a continuous run to the relevant modules on site. These modules must be positioned so as to ensure that connection between the modules themselves and the communication modules and adapters are as short as possible. Bus connections inside the control panels must be routed at an adequate distance from interference-emitting equipment and must be segregated from other cables. Where it is impossible to avoid running bus cables parallel to power cables, the following minimum clearance must be maintained: 30 cm 45 cm 60 cm 150 cm for for for for 125 V 230 V 440 V 5000 V or or 10 A 50 A
or 200 A or 800 A
As a general rule, unscreened twisted pair cable should be used for bus connections both inside and outside the control panel. Screened bus cables As a general principle, unscreened cable should be used. If regulations or environmental conditions require the use of screened cable (e.g. in the vicinity of high voltage cables, HF transmitters or equipment not complying with the EMC directives), ensure that the screen is correctly earthed (e.g. by use of a cable clamp). The screen must be earthed capacitively at one end and electrically at the other. In the case of INTEGRAL AS1000, the NARB/A bus adapter provides both options.
Ribbon cables In the INTEGRAL AS1000 system, ribbon cable is also used in the control panel. When routing these cables note that ribbon cables must never be routed in the same trunking as the low voltage and low current conductors or cables (those used for the control signals and supply voltage for the terminal module carriers) Recommended routing The best results are achieved by routing the cables as follows: Do not unroll the cables more than necessary Connect by as short and direct a route as possible; do not use trunking The ribbon cables of the terminal module carriers should be installed flat and fixed with suitable cable holders to a metallic (iron or aluminium) earthed surface, such as the control panel wall A distance of at least 5 cm from the equipment must be maintained. Where ribbon cables intersect with other wiring, they should do so at an angle of 90. The ribbon cables should then be routed, via suitable cable holders, forwards to a point just below the relevant module housing or card frame. The free ends must be long enough to permit easy connection to the subsequently assembled card modules. Control panels without hinged racks If there is only one installation level, the ribbon cables should be fixed to the rear wall of the control panel (see also K21-10.30). Control panels with hinged racks If there are two installation levels, the ribbon cables of the rear section are fixed to the back wall of the control panel, and those of the front section are fixed to the front of the screening plate of the hinged rack (see also K21-10.30).
K21-10
Installation instructions Mounting
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installations guidelines Control panels
K21-10.01
1/1 en - 97 - 01
Information about these guidelines

This section contains information on mounting the system components in the control panel. The instructions apply o the following systems: The INTEGRAL MS2000 building management system The INTEGRAL TS1500 remote buildings management system The INTEGRAL MS1000 in-house management system The INTEGRAL AS1000 control and interlock system The PRONTO IRC individual room control system
Guidelines for cabling outside the control panel will be found in the technical manuals for the system concerned. Information on EMC and on the on the routing of cables inside the control panel will be found in section K21-09 of this manual, and connection instructions in section K21-11.
Contents
General notes on mounting 10.10
Method 1 Ambient conditions 1 Layout of components inside the control panel 1 Installing the INTEGRAL AS1000 components 2 Installing special components 3 Mounting instructions 10.20
NCRS system controller 1 NICO, NITEL.., NRU../A, NMIDK and NIPRO card modules 3 Modems and switch boxes 7 NT.. terminal module carriers and NK.. terminal modules 8 NARS adapter 11 NARB/A and NABBS/A adapters 12 NARC and NATU adapters, NMID multiplexer 12 NAPB and NAPC adapters 13 NRUE/A, NRUF/A and NRUT../A compact controllers 14 NRK24/A compact controller 15 NRK../A application controllers 16 NBRN.. and NBRNA-.. operator terminals 18 NBE remote operator terminal 18 Example of control panel interior 10.30
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Mounting
K21-10.10
1/2 en - 97 - 01
General notes on mounting

9 Caution Control panel construction must comply with the relevant local regulations relating to protection against electric shock (personal safety).
Method
Components such as the RS card modules (RSM controllers), the NCRS system controller and the communications modules (NICO, NITEL.. and NIPRO) are supplied separately from the card frames. The electronic cards are fitted on site when the system is commissioned. This eliminates the risk of contamination of the electronic components while building works are in progress. However, the installed housings and, in particular, the electrical contacts must be protected from dust and other possible contamination (plastic covers may be used for this purpose). For instructions on the insertion and removal of electronic cards, refer to the mounting instructions. Service A power socket must be provided in all electronic sections of the control panel A sufficient number of large slots or pockets must be provided on the inside of control panel doors, to accommodate the control panel documentation.
Ambient conditions
The following ambient operating conditions for Staefa electronic components must be maintained inside the control panel (measured near the top): Temperature 5 45 C Humidity 10 ... 90 %rh, non-condensing In addition, the following conditions must be observed: A fixed (non-mobile) location Not subjected to vibration Not exposed to shock
Layout of the components inside the control panel

The equipment and wiring in the control panel affect each other mutually, both electrically and thermally. It is therefore important to keep power components and electronic components (i.e. interference-emitting and interference-susceptible devices) strictly segregated.
Important: Interference-emitting and interference-susceptible devices must be segregated.
Interference-emitting devices and components: Frequency converters Transformers Power supply units Contactors and relays Any cables exiting from the housing of the above devices, etc. Interference-susceptible devices and components: System controller NCRS Card modules NRU../A, NICO etc. Adapters NARB/A, NAPC etc. Terminal modules for measured signals Ribbon cables and bus cables Internal signal wiring etc.

Installing the INTEGRAL AS1000 components
Mounting instructions Mounting instructions are enclosed with all Landis & Staefa equipment (see also K21-10.20).
K21-10.10
2/2 en - 97 - 01
The general arrangement of the components depends on circumstances at the site where the control panel is installed. The routing of external cables is of particular relevance. The INTEGRAL AS1000 components must be installed in accordance with the mounting instructions and the information given in the data sheets for the device concerned. The general rules detailed below must be complied with when positioning and mounting INTEGRAL AS1000 components in the control panel. The following devices must be mounted in the orientation specified: NGCO system controller housing NHGB card frame PRONTO IRC controllers Horizontal Vertical Horizontal
The terminal module carriers are designed for horizontal mounting (note the position of the vents in the terminal modules). In exceptional circumstances, they may be installed vertically, but in this case, note that they must never be fitted with phase cut terminal modules (NKOA..) or NKID modules, as vertical mounting does not permit sufficient heat dissipation. Further, note that with vertical mounting, the ribbon cables must be at the bottom. Operator controls and indicators (e.g. the manual switches on certain output modules) should be installed at a convenient height (approx. 1 to 1.8 m above floor level). In hinged racks they must be installed at the front. The devices should be so positioned that a sufficient length of ribbon cable is available (approx. 2 m). The ribbon cable should be unrolled only as far as is necessary. To facilitate the connection and checking of the wiring, a minimum distance must be maintained between the trunking and the adjacent terminal module carriers or other control panel equipment.
Installing special components As a general rule, frequency converters must be located outside the control panel for the following reasons: ease of maintenance and replacement a source of high-level electromagnetic interference is kept outside the control panel See K21-10.30 for an example of control panel construction.
K21-10.20
1/18 en - 97 - 01
Mounting instructions
NCRS system controller
Equipment supplied The complete NCRS system controller consists of two parts: The NGCO system controller housing (for installation in the control panel) The NCRE controller board (not normally inserted until the system is commissioned).
NGCO housing
NCRE controller board
Hinged front-plate
Mounting the NGCO housing The controller housing is screwed horizontally onto the hinged or fixed frame in the control panel. To ensure adequate circulation, the sides of the housing must be at least 50 mm from the control panel wall and from any adjacent components. A distance of approximately 30 mm must be maintained between controller housings mounted one above the other, and between controller housings and card frames, by use of screening plates with cut-outs. This enables the various cables to be routed from the rear.
Caution: The housing must be mounted horizontally.
A minimum clearance of 100 mm is required (between the front of the system controller and the control panel doors. (This allows for the connection of a printer cable to the parallel port).

Caution: To prevent to the NCRE controller board from electrostatic discharge, an ESD-protected workplace (wrist strap with earth cable and conductive mat) must be used at all times. Never place the NCRE board on a conductive (metal) surface, as this can cause the back-up battery to discharge. Always switch off the power supply before inserting or removing the cards.
K21-10.20
2/18 en - 97 - 01
Handling the controller board

Opening the housing Unscrew the two screws on the front plate, and open outwards and downwards. Removing the controller board from the housing With the front plate open, slide the controller board from the housing, holding it by the outer edges. Immediately after removal, place the controller board in an antistatic bag. Inserting the controller board into the housing Holding the NCRE board by its outer edges, slide it on the guide rails into the lower part of the housing. It may be necessary to adjust the guide rails to ensure that the components on the NCRE board are in the right positions in relation to the front plate. In this case, adjust the position of the two screws at the front of the right and left guide rails. After fixing the screws, check that the front plate can be closed without obstruction.
K21-10.20
3/18 en - 97 - 01
NICO, NITEL.., NRU../A, NMIDK and NIPRO card modules

Equipment supplied The complete card module is supplied in two parts: The NHGB card frame (for installation in the control panel) The electronic card (not normally inserted into the card frame until the system is commissioned) The following items are also supplied with the card module: 2 mounting brackets with screws 1 black fixing screw
Mounting bracket with screw Card frame with vents Locking lever Handling plate with labelling space
Card and front plate NHGB card frame Base receptacle with protective strips Connection grooves
Locking lever Handling plate with type label
Mounting the NHGB card frame

Caution: The NHGB card frame must be mounted vertically to permit adequate heat dissipation from the controller board.
It is essential to mount the card frame the right way up. Viewed from the back, the grooves in the base must be to the right, and viewed from the front, the guide rails for the card modules must be to the right. The vents in the card frame must not be covered. Card frames may be mounted singly or in groups.

Mounting in groups (mechanical and electrical interconnection)
K21-10.20
4/18 en - 97 - 01
Caution: To protect them from dirt and oxidation, avoid touching the spring contacts.
Adjacent card frames are connected electrically via the spring contacts in their base receptacles. To avoid damaging the contacts, the protective strips must not be removed until directly prior to mounting. Insert a screwdriver carefully into the slots and lever gently to free the lugs. Once lifted, the strips can be removed completely by turning the screwdriver slightly.
Adjacent card frames are connected mechanically by slotting the lugs of one card frame into the grooves of the adjacent frame. To ensure that the spring contacts form a continuous electrical connection, it is important to check that all lugs are correctly fitted into the appropriate grooves.

Mounting options The card frames can be mounted as follows: Screw the housing directly onto any flat surface Mount on two rails Mount in a standard 19" rack Surface mounting
K21-10.20
5/18 en - 97 - 01
This method of mounting is particularly suitable for single or small numbers of card frames. No additional mounting accessories are required. Method For each card frame, drill two holes (diameter 2.5 mm) in the base (minimum thickness for steel plate: 2 mm). In the case of group mounting, remove the protective strips from the internal spring contacts. Screw the first card frame to the base, using the screws provided (M3x10) Slot the lugs of next card frame into the grooves of the frame already in position, and again screw this card frame to the base with the screws provided. Rail mounting The card frames can be mounted on EN50022 rails using the mounting brackets and screws supplied. Method For group mounting remove the protective strips from the internal contacts. Fix the first card frame on the rails, using first the top and then the bottom mounting bracket. Slot the lugs of the next card frame into the grooves of the card frame already in position. Push the card frame inwards until it makes contact with the mounting rails. Finally, fix using the top and bottom mounting brackets as above.

Mounting in a 19" rack
K21-10.20
6/18 en - 97 - 01
To mount the card frames, the 19" rack must have the same panel fixes to the front and back. Method: For group mounting remove the protective strips from the internal spring contacts. Push the first card frame into the right-hand side of the rack (viewed from the back) and fix it to the rack with the screws supplied (M3 x 10). Slot the lugs of the next card frame into the grooves of the one already in position. Push the card frame fully into the rack and, again, fix with the screws provided.
Handling the electronic card Removing the card from the housing Holding the card by the two handling plates on the front, simultaneously push the top locking lever upwards and the bottom lever downwards. Remove carefully. Inserting the card into the frame Holding the card by the two handling plates on the front, slide it into the housing on the right-hand guide rail, until the levers lock into position.
Caution: To prevent damage to the NRU.. controller board from electrostatic discharge, an ESD-protected workplace (wrist strap with earth cable and conductive mat) must be used at all times. Always switch off the power supply before inserting or removing the cards.
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Mounting Modems
K21-10.20
7/18 en - 97 - 01
Some systems will require the use of modems. Since there is such a wide range of modems on the market, there is little point in attempting to include mounting instructions in this manual. Definitive instructions will be found in the manufacturer's instructions enclosed with the modem itself. Remember to allow sufficient space for a modem and to provide a telephone line in accordance with the regulations of the national telecommunications authority. Switch boxes The RHI-MUX switch box can be used to connect 4 NITEL.. communication modules or 4 RH500 controllers to a single modem/PC. Since the switch box receives its power via a separate plug-in mains device, a mains socket must be installed in the vicinity of the switch box. The support arrangements for the switch box must be provided by the client. The RHI-MUX switch box is available only from Staefa.
AC 23 0V
94.0171
Unit2
M o d em
Unit4
Ty p :
Unit1
R H I- M U X
AC
Unit3
K21-10.20
8/18 en - 97 - 01
NT.. terminal module carrier and NK.. terminal modules

If the terminal module carriers already fitted with terminal modules when delivered, these should be removed before mounting the module carriers, to protect them from dirt and damage.
Upper section with terminals
Printed circuit board with rails, fuses and test sockets
Ribbon cable and connector
Labelling spaces
Base with snap-on bracket
The terminal module carriers may be mounted singly or in groups on any flat surface or on rails. The terminal module carriers are designed for horizontal mounting (see vents in terminal modules). In exceptional cases, the terminal module carriers may be mounted vertically, in which case the ribbon cables must be at the bottom. Vertically-mounted terminal module carriers must never be fitted with NKOA(H) or NKOAL(H) phase cut modules or with NKID modules, as vertical mounting does not permit sufficient heat dissipation. Output terminals with manual switches should be installed at a convenient height (approximately 1 to 1.8 m above floor level). In hinged racks, they must be installed at the front. The devices should be so positioned that a sufficient length of original ribbon cable (approx. 2 m) is available. Spare ribbon cable is best left coiled, as it is then less susceptible to interference. To facilitate the connection and checking of the wiring, a minimum distance of 25 mm must be maintained between the trunking and the adjacent terminal module carriers or other control panel equipment. Ribbon cables must be routed with care, as described on page 10. They must not cover the labelling spaces on the module carriers. When positioning the module carriers, the installation height must be based on the maximum height of the terminal modules to be installed (max. 113 mm). A clearance of at least 150 mm must be allowed between the back of the terminal module carriers and the panel doors, hinged rack etc.
Caution: Terminal module carriers must be mounted horizontally. (Exceptions: see right).

Removing the terminal modules
K21-10.20
9/18 en - 97 - 01
Always disconnect the power before inserting or removing terminal modules. Insert and remove terminal modules with care to avoid bending the contacts. When inserted, the terminal modules snap onto lugs at the top and bottom of the terminal module carrier.
In order to remove a terminal module, the top and bottom lugs must be released with a screwdriver. Never try to remove the terminal module without first releasing the lugs in this way. Group mounting When mounting terminal modules in groups the following clearance must be allowed: Terminal side: 25 mm space required for terminal connection (equivalent to the maximum ribbon cable width). Narrow side: No clearance required.
Mounting on a flat surface Apart from the fixing screws, no other mounting accessories are required.

Rail mounting
K21-10.20
10/18 en - 97 - 01
The terminal module carriers may be mounted on a standard EN 50022 rail.
Important: Ribbon cables are susceptible to interference. Special care is required when routing these cables.
Ribbon cables The ribbon cables of the terminal modules and various adapters are particularly susceptible to capacitive and inductive interference. They should never be routed in the same trunking as the low voltage and low current conductors or cables (those used for the control signals and supply voltage for the terminal module carriers).
Recommended routing: The best results are achieved by routing the cables as follows: Do not unroll the cables more than necessary (see drawing on next page) Connect by as short and direct a route as possible; do not use trunking The ribbon cables of the terminal module carriers should be installed flat and fixed with suitable cable holders to a metallic (iron or aluminium) earthed surface, such as the control panel wall A distance of at least 5 cm from the equipment must be maintained. Where ribbon cables intersect with other wiring, they should do so at an angle of 90. The ribbon cables should then be routed forward via suitable cable holders. The free ends must be long enough to permit easy connection to the subsequently assembled card modules. Control panels without hinged racks If there is only one installation level, the ribbon cables should be fixed to the rear wall of the control panel (see also K21-10.30). Control panels with hinged racks If there are two installation levels, the ribbon cables of the rear section are fixed to the back wall of the control panel, and those of the front section fixed to the front of the screening plate of the hinged rack (see also K21-10.30).
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Mounting Ribbon cable
K21-10.20
11/18 en - 97 - 01
NARS adapter
Rail-mounting The adapters can be mounted any way up on a standard EN 50022 rail.
EN 50022 mounting rail
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Mounting NARB/A and NABBS/A adapters

Surface mounting
K21-10.20
12/18 en - 97 - 01
The adapters may be mounted in any orientation on a standard rail (EN50022-35 x 7.5) 51079
51080
EN50022-35 x 7,5
NARC and NATU adapters, NMID multiplexer

These devices may be mounted on rails or on any flat surface. Surface mounting The adapters can be fixed to any flat surface (such as a mounting plate) using four screws with a maximum diameter of 4 mm.
Rail-mounting A snap-on bracket on the back of the adapter housing can be used to mount the adapter on a a standard EN 50022 rail.
9H057
118
10
EN50022-35 x 7,5
51 ,5
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Mounting NAPB and NAPC adapters

Base with snap-on bracket Connection terminals for bus cables
K21-10.20
13/18 en - 97 - 01
215
U-shape cover
Rail-mounting These adapters can be mounted in any orientation on a a standard EN 50022 rail.
EN 50022 mounting rail
87
112
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Mounting NRUE/A and NRUF/A
K21-10.20
14/18 en - 97 - 01
The INTEGRAL RSC compact controllers can be fixed to any vertical surface using four screws (diameter 5 mm). No other mounting accessories are required.
265 250 5
40616
292
10
Caution To prevent damage to the electronic card from electrostatic discharge (ESD), an ESD-protected workplace (wrist strap with earth cable and conductive mat) must be used at all times. Always switch off the power supply before removing the cover.
Opening the controller

1. Ensure that the necessary EMC precautions have been taken. 2. Undo the four cross-head screws which secure the cover of the controller. 3. Carefully lift off the cover. In doing so, take care to avoid dislodging the pcb connection cable in the cover. Observe similar precautions when re-assembling the controller, paying special attention to the connection cable.
NRUT../A communications controller

The NRUT../A is essentially an NRUE/A compact controller with a built-in NITEL.. communications module. This is fixed into the cover plate of the controller. The front plate, which incorporates the connectors and indicators, is accessible externally, but the cover must be removed for access to the electronic card. The dimensions of the NRUT../A are identical to those of the two INTEGRAL RSC compact controllers, the NRUE/A and NRUF/A.
250
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Mounting NRD24/A compact controller
K21-10.20
15/18 en - 97 - 01
The compact controller can be mounted on DIN/EN rails or on a flat surface. Rail mounting The back of the controller is fitted with a snap-mounting arragement suitable for standard rails complying with DIN 46277 or EN 50022.
60190
Surface mounting The controller can be mounted directly on a flat surface with four screws (max. 4.5 mm ).
147
1 4
60191
Mounting 1 Fit to top rail 2 Snap-mount on bottom rail Dismounting 3 Release at bottom 4 Remove from top rail
160
52
170
161
max. 4,5 mm
2 3
Removal of the upper screw terminals The upper screw terminals can released with a scredriver.
60192
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Mounting NRK../A application controllers
K21-10.20
16/18 en - 97 - 01
The INTEGRAL RSA controllers can be fixed with four screws to any vertical surface, or snap-mounted on two standard EN 50022 rails.
162
149
40617
252
203
243
Caution: The plug-in application module is a static-sensitive component. Always disconnect the power before inserting or removing it from the controller. Do not touch the contacts in the device.
59
49
24
52 15
When mounting on rails, proceed as follows: 1. Mount the top rail 2. Fit the bottom rail to the controller and snap-mount the assembly onto the top rail. 3. Screw the bottom rail into position.
Opening the controller

1. Ensure that the necessary EMC precautions have been taken. 2. Undo the four cross-head screws between the terminal blocks. 3. Carefully lift off the cover. For the NRK16-B/A: Press the four white plastic clips together with pliers, carefully release the pcb for the display and operating unit, and pull upwards. Observe similar precautions when re-assembling the controller, paying special attention to the fibre optic cables of the LEDs and the extension of switch S100.
Caution To prevent damage to the electronic card from electrostatic discharge (ESD), an ESD-protected workplace (wrist strap with earth cable and conductive mat) must be used at all times. Always switch off the power supply before removing the cover.
NRK16-T../A and NRK14-T../A communications controllers

The NRK..-T../A are essentially RSA application controllers with a built-in NITEL communications module. The NITEL.. card is slotted into the RSA controller. Access to this card can be gained by unscrewing the side cover. For this purpose, however, the complete controller must be removed from its mounting.
216
202
40618
252
203
243
84 15
125
125

Mounting in control panel doors
K21-10.20
17/18 en - 97 - 01
A mounting kit is available (Order No. Z402) for mounting NRK16../A application controllers in control panel doors. The kit comprises a cover plate, two mounting brackets and all the necessary screws.
Note: The packaging of this kit provides a drilling / cutting template.
First cut a rectangular opening in the control panel door and drill the eight holes required. (The four outer holes must be countersunk for the countersunk screws on the outside of the door). Fit the two brackets onto the NRK../A from the front, and screw each bracket into place using two screws inserted from the back of the controller. (If the brackets are not required to support the connecting cable, fit them with the closed part of the bracket facing the inside of the panel door). Screw the two brackets into place using four countersunk screws inserted from the outside of the panel door. Fix the cover plate on the outside of the panel door with four screws.
94.0182
4,3 / 7 x 90 4,3 19 20 8 125 149 165 20 8 19 205 243
94.0193

94.0165
K21-10.20
18/18 en - 97 - 01
NBRN-.. and NBRNA-.. operator terminals

Mounting in the control-panel front For mounting in a control-panel front, an aperture 201 mm high by 119 mm wide is required. Control panel thickness: 1 to 3 mm. Mount by pressing the device into the aperture from the front. Use the wire bracket supplied to fix it in position from the back.
201
NBE remote operator terminal

Mounting in the control-panel front
119
The NBE remote operator terminal can be mounted in a control-panel front. For mounting in a control-panel front, an aperture 168 mm high by 82 mm wide is required. Control panel thickness: 1 to 3 mm. Before mounting, separate the two sections with a screwdriver. Opening the NBE housing
93.00257
C Alar m
Auto
Caution: To avoid damage to the internal connectors, keep the two sections parallel while separating them.
0 1 2
Mount as follows: Push the base of the NBE into the aperture from the front, and fix it at the back with a Z404 wire clip. Note that this must be ordered separately (Order No. Z404). Replace the upper section containing the electronic components.
19 22 82
93.00259
168
Cut-out
1... 3
Fixing with Z404 clip
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation guidelines Construction (Example)
K21-10.30
1/2 en - 97 - 01
Control panel construction (Example)

The example below shows a control panel for a INTEGRAL MS2000 system, with a hinged rack and two installation levels, and connection terminals for cable entry from the top. The panel dimensions in this example are 2000 x 1000 x 600 mm (h x w x d). The upper part of the hinged rack contains an NCRS system controller, card modules and adapters. The lower part accommodates some of the terminal module carriers. The fixed installation level to the rear contains the connection terminals and more terminal module carriers. Note the screening plate between the front and rear installation levels in the area containing the terminal module carriers.
Cable entry from above Connection terminals
NCRS system controller Adapters
Card rack Trunking Screening plate and cable holders Terminal module carriers with terminal modules Fixed mounting rack Hinged rack Control panel 2000 x 1000 x 600 Ribbon cable
Side and front views with hinged rack
Connection terminals Trunking Fixed mounting rack Trunking Terminal module carriers with terminal modules
Fixed rack in rear section of the control panel
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation guidelines Construction (Example)
K21-10.30
2/2 en - 97 - 01
In larger systems with several adjacent control panels, a separate control panel should be reserved for the power components. Care should be taken to keep the power cables and communication cables physically separate.
94.0170
Bus Peripheral devices Power supply / Signals
staefa integral
staefa integral
staefa integral
AC 230 V
K21-11
Installation instructions AS1000 connection
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Connection
K21-11.01
1/2 en - 97 - 01
Notes on this section

This section provides information on connecting the INTEGRAL AS1000 control and interlock system and on transformer sizing. Section K21-10 contains detailed instructions for mounting the system components, and section K21-09 provides information on EMC and cable routing.
Applicability These instructions apply specifically to control and interlock modules with type codes containing the suffix ../A (e.g. NRU../A, NRK../A). The RS bus is electrically isolated in these devices, which also have improved EMC properties. The instructions in section K21-11.30 apply to systems incorporating older control and interlock devices (those without the suffix ../A) and for mixed systems. Important The sheets marked with a grey border apply only to systems comprising control and interlock devices whose type codes do not include the suffix ../A, and to mixed systems.
Contents
Overview of peripheral devices Transformer sizing 11.05 11.10
AC 24 V supply voltage ...................................................................................... 1 Supply voltage for system components ............................................................ 2 Calculating the transformer size ....................................................................... 3 Example ............................................................................................................... 4 Connection of systems using type ../A control and interlock devices
11.20
Supply voltage and signal strategy ................................................................... 1 INTEGRAL RSM .............................................................................................. 1 INTEGRAL RSC / RSA ..................................................................................... 2 AC 24 V power supply cables ............................................................................ 3 Peripheral device signal cables ......................................................................... 4 RS bus connections ............................................................................................. 6 RS bus specification (RS485) ........................................................................ 6 RS bus connection inside the control panel ............................................... 6 RS bus connections outside the control panel via NARB/A ....................... 7 Electrical isolation of the RS bus via NARC ................................................ 8 Connecting a PC operator station via NITEL.. .................................................. 9 Connecting the PRONTO IRC individual room control system ....................... 9 Connecting peripheral devices to the RSC and RSA controllers ................... 10 Passive sensors ............................................................................................ 10 Active sensors with DC 15 V supply voltage and DC 0 ... 10 V signal ..... 10 Active AC 24 V sensors, 4-wire connections ............................................. 11 Active AC 24 V sensors, 3-wire connections ............................................. 11 Actuators with AC 24 V supply voltage and DC 0 ... 10 V signal, 4-wire connections ..................................................................................... 12
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Connection
K21-11.01
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Actuators with AC 24 V supply voltage and DC 0 ... 10 V signal, 3-wire connections ..................................................................................... 12 Actuators with AC 24 V supply voltage, and DC 0 ... 10 V positioning and position feedback signal, 3-wire connections .............. 12 BSG-100 setpoint adjuster .......................................................................... 14 Room operating units ................................................................................ 14 Digital output signals ................................................................................. 15 Connecting peripheral devices to the RSM controllers ................................. 16 Passive sensors ............................................................................................ 16 Active sensors with DC 15 V supply voltage and DC 0 ... 10 V signal ..... 16 Active sensors with AC 24 V supply voltage and DC 0 ... 10 V signal, 4-wire connections ..................................................................................... 16 Active sensors with AC 24 V supply voltage and DC 0 ... 10 V signal, 3-wire connections ..................................................................................... 17 Active sensors with DC 15 V supply voltage and DC 0 ... 10 V signal, 3-wire connections ..................................................................................... 17 DC 0 ... 10 V sensor signal with electrical isolation from RS system ....... 17 Actuators with AC 24 V supply voltage and DC 0 ... 10 V signal, 4-wire connections ..................................................................................... 17 Actuators with AC 24 V supply voltage and DC 0 ... 10 V signal, 3-wire connections .................................................................................... 18 Actuators with AC 24 V supply voltage, and DC 0 ... 10 V positioning and position feedback signal, 3-wire connections .............. 18 Room operating units ................................................................................ 19 Digital output signals ................................................................................. 19
Connection of systems comprising earlier type RS devices (without suffix ../A), or mixed systems
11.30
RS bus connections ............................................................................................. 1 RS bus connection inside the control panel ............................................... 1 RS bus connection outside the control panel, via NARB ........................... 2 Electrical isolation of the RS bus via NARC ................................................ 3 Connecting peripheral devices to the RSC and RSA controllers ..................... 4 3-wire connections ....................................................................................... 4 4-wire connections ....................................................................................... 7 Connecting peripheral devices to the RSM controllers ................................... 8 3-wire connections ....................................................................................... 8 4-wire connections ....................................................................................... 9
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Peripheral devices
K21-11.05
1/2 en - 97 - 01
Overview of peripheral devices

Type Data sheet 4507 4689 4887 4881 4886 4640 4640 4623 4633 4872 4871 S1-05.61 S1-05.61 1986 1987 1808 1903 1779 1839 1956 1775 1778 1886 1866 1917 1957 1935 5488 1876 1856 1953 1736 1954 1942 1837 1918 1796 1797 1795 1819 1512 1512 RSM TerminalConnection module see sheet: NKOK NKOK NKOA NKOAS(A) NKOA NKOK NKOAS(A) NKOK NKOAS(A) NKOD NKOD NKOA NKOD NKDG NKDG NKDG NKDG NKDG NKDG NKIA NKDG NKIAV.. NKDG NKDG NKDW NKDW NKIDP(H) NKDG NKIA NKDG NKDW NKDG NKDG NKIA NKDG NKIAV NKDG NKDG NKIDP(H) NKIDP(H) K21-02.75 K21-02.75 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-02.75 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-02.75 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 19 K21-11.20 / 19 K21-11.20 / 19 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-02.52 / 2 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-02.52 / 2 K21-02.52 / 2 RSC / RSA TerminalConnection module see sheet: NKOK / UA3 NKOK / UA3 Module UA9 Direct Module UA9 NKOK / UA3 Direct NKOK / UA3 Direct NKOD+NTIO NKOD+NTIO Module UA9 NKOD+NTIO Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct K21-02.75 K21-02.75 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-02.75 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-02.75 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 19 K21-11.20 / 19 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 19 K21-11.20 / 14 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 11 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 11 K21-11.20 / 11 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 11 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 11 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 11 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 10 Supply voltage, signal type AC 24 V, 3-point AC 24 V, 3-point Phase cut AC 24 V, 3-wire Phase cut AC 24 V, 3-point AC 24 V, 3-wire AC 24 V, 3-point AC 24 V, 3-wire On/off On/off Phase cut AC 230 V, on/off DC 15 V, 3-wire DC 2-3 V, 2-wire T1, 2-wire DC 15 V, 3-wire DC 15 V, 3-wire T1, 2-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire T1, 2-wire PT100, 4-wire DC 15 V, 3-wire DC 15 V, 3-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire 2-wire, volt-free DC 15 V, 3-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire T1, 2-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire T1, 2-wire T1, 2-wire AC 24 V, 3-wire T1, 2-wire PT100, 4-wire T1, 2-wire T1, 2-wire 2-wire, volt-free 2-wire, volt-free
A1D20 A1L150 AM1.. AM1../E AM1S/H AS1D8 ASXD8 AS1D15/30 ASU1D15 /30 AT..B AT..R AT1ST AT2ST BSG-100 BSG-U1 FA-T1 FDPA-.. FD-T3 FF-T1 FK-Q2 FK-T1K.. FK-TP/200 FKA-H1 FKA-H1/T1 FKA-P.. FKA-Q1A FKA-V2 FR-A180, FR-A360 FR-H1 FR-H1/T1 FR-Q2 FR-T1/A FRA-Q1 FS-T1 FS-T1L.. FT-P.. FT-T1K.. FT-TP/.. FTR..-T1 FW-T1G HKU20 HRU20
NKIAV.+NTIO K21-11.20 / 16
See FKA-H1 and FR-T1
See FR-H1 and FR-T1
NKIAV.+NTIO K21-11.20 / 10
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Peripheral devices

RSM Type Data sheet sheet Terminalmodule Connection see sheet RSC / RSA Terminalmodule Connection see sheet
K21-11.05
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Supply voltage, signal type
IPA9 KRT-1B KRT-1L KRT-1S KRU-1 LS20.. M2A..SX.. M2FP03GX M2FS..LX.. M2H..FX../C2 M2H..FYN M3B..GH../A M3FB..LX.. M3FK..LX.. M3K..FX..N M3P../A M3P..Y M3R..G M2H..F../A NILAH PBA PBC PFB-T1 QBM81-.. QAF81.. TAM2 TKM2.. TRG2.. TTM2.. TTM2D TTW2.. TTW2D.. UA9 UKU US.. US..-E Z230, Z231 ZAS1, ZAS2 ZM.. , ZM../A
5163 1612 1613 1611 1614 4933 4751 4731 4711 4347 4348 4458 4721 4722 4741 4453 4454 4425 4346 5128 1651 1655 1836 1552 1284 1255 1291 1329 1222 1223 1222 1223 5133 5141 4918 4915 4649 4647 4591
NKOA 3 NKDG 3 NKDG

2 NKDG/1 NKIDP
K21-11.20 / 18 K21-11.20 / 18 K21-11.20 / 18 K21-11.20 / 18 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 18 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 18 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 18 K21-11.20 / 18 K21-11.20 / 16 K21-02.52 / 2 K21-02.52 / 2 K21-02.52 / 2 K21-02.52 / 2 K21-02.52 / 2 K21-02.52 / 2 K21-02.52 / 2 K21-02.52 / 2 K21-02.52 / 2 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-11.20 / 17 K21-02.52 / 2 K21-02.52 / 2 K21-11.20 / 17
UA9 Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct Direct
K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 15 K21-11.20 / 15 K21-11.20 / 15 K21-11.20 / 15 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 14 K21-11.20 / 15 K21-11.20 / 10 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12 K21-11.20 / 12
Phase cut Mixed Mixed Mixed Mixed DC 10 V PWM AC 24 V, 4-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire AC 24 V, 3-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire AC 24 V, 3-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire AC 24 V, 4-wire Mixed Mixed Mixed T1, 2-wire 2-wire, volt-free 2-wire, volt-free 2-wire, volt-free 2-wire, volt-free 2-wire, volt-free 2-wire, volt-free 2-wire, volt-free 2-wire, volt-free 2-wire, volt-free AC 24 V, 4-wire Various AC 24 V, 3-wire AC 24 V, 3-wire 2-wire, volt-free 2-wire, volt-free AC 24 V, 4-wire
2 NKDG NKOAS(A) NKOAS(A) NKOAS(A) NKOAS(A) NKOAS(A) NKOAS(A) NKOAS(A) NKOAS(A) NKOAS(A) NKOAS(A) NKOAS(A) NKOAS(A) NKOAS(A) NKOAS(A) NKDG 2 NKDG 2 NKDG NKDG NKIDP(H) NKIDP(H) NKIDP(H) NKIDP(H) NKIDP(H) NKIDP(H) NKIDP(H) NKIDP(H) NKIDP(H) NKDW NKDW NKOAS(A) NKOAS(A) NKIDP(H) NKIDP(H) NKOAS(A)
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Transformers
K21-11.10
1/4 en - 97 - 01
Transformer sizing
AC 24 V supply voltage
The Staefa components operate with a supply voltage of AC 24 V. To reduce the mains voltage to the required level, a safety transformer with extra-low voltage (SELV) of AC 24 V on secondary side is required.
Important: Transformers must satisfy SELV requirements. The protection on the primary side must be in accordance with local regulations.
All equipment in the same control panel may be supplied by the same transformer. Remote systems require separate transformers, since the RS bus does not transmit the supply voltage. Transformers for the supply voltage to the RS controllers must be earthed on the secondary side (see diagram below). The transformer primary side may be connected to any phase. Transformers must be protected against overload in accordance with their nominal power and the relevant cable cross-sections. Where there is a likelihood of interference coupling, the supply transformer should be fitted with a mains filter on the primary side (see K21-09.10).
51151
6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5
6 5
2 1
2 1
AC 230 / 24 V
Important: Transformers supplying type ../A RS controllers must be earthed on the secondary side. Any additional transformers, used, for example, for the peripheral devices, must not be earthed.
AC 230 / 24 V
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Transformers Supply voltage for system components
K21-11.10
2/4 en - 97 - 01
RSM controllers The AC 24 V supply voltage from the transformer is connected in parallel to the NTOMS terminal module carriers and, where necessary, to other modules or adapters. The NTOMS carriers thus provide the supply for the AC 24 V and 20 V phase cut terminal modules. The RS card modules receive their AC 24 V supply via the ribbon cable of the NTOMS terminal module carrier. In the RS card module, the supply voltage, protected by a PTC thermistor, is linked to the service socket where it can be used to power the NBRN.. operator terminal. The RS controllers convert the AC 24 V supply into an electrically isolated voltage of DC 15 V which is fed back to the connected terminal module carriers, to supply the DC 15 V peripheral devices (sensors, indicators etc.) and the electronic components in the terminal modules. When designing the system, care should be taken to ensure that the power consumption of the connected DC loads does not exceed the maximum output power of the RS controller (RSM: 7.5 W / 500 mA, RSC: 300 mA, RSA: 150 mA). It may be necessary to modify the hardware configuration or to install an additional RS controller. The appropriate transformer can only be selected after the configuration has been finalised and the AC 24 V power consumption has been determined.
Note Where there is a high load on the DC 15 V supply to a single NTIM carrier (e.g. where a number of NKIAV.. modules are fitted) some distortion of the input signals may result, due to voltage drop in the common ground core of the ribbon cable. In such cases, a Z347 ground conductor adapter should be used (see K21-03.10 page 7).
9E183 A
NBRN
AC 24 V
DC 15 V
RS
AC 24 V AC 24 V
NTOMS
DC 20 V
AC 24 V DC 15 V 0000 M
AC 24 V
NTIM
DC 15 V
AC 24 V
AC 230 / 24 V
RSA and RSC controllers The RSA and RSC controllers receive their supply voltage directly from the transformer. RSA controllers are protected by a PTC thermistor, and RSC controllers by a 4 A fine fuse.
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Transformers Calculating the transformer size
K21-11.10
3/4 en - 97 - 01
The first step in calculating the nominal power of the transformer is to determine the power consumption of all the system components supplied with AC 24 V or DC 15 V either directly or via the terminal modules. These are as follows: Peripheral devices (magnetic valves, damper actuators, active sensors etc.) with an AC 24 V, DC 15 V or DC 20 V (phase cut) supply NCRS system controllers, RS controllers, interface devices and terminal modules (intrinsic consumption). NBRN.. and NBE operator terminals (intrinsic consumption) By far the highest proportion of the total power consumption is taken up by the magnetic valves. For these, the nominal power of the transformer should be equivalent to 1.5 times the nominal power of the valve. In comparison, the intrinsic power consumption of the AC 24 V terminal modules is negligible. The maximum intrinsic consumption of the system components (RS controllers, pronto interfaces, terminal modules etc.) will be found in the relevant catalogue sheets or in the table below. Intrinsic power consumption of system components
Module DC 15 V mA AC 24 V VA Max. connected load / contact rating of terminal module carrier via terminal module (variable)
NRU../A (RSM) NRU../A (RSC) NRK../A NRD24/A NIPRO NITEL.. NAPC NARC NMID NMIDK NBRN-... NBRNA-... NBE NKDG NKDW NKIA NKIAU NKIAI NKIAV.. NKIAVN NKIT NKID NKIDH NKIDP NKIDPH NKIDP/8 NKIC NKOAS Important: When calculating the demand on the AC 24 V supply voltage, the following should be noted: The DC current consumption of the terminal modules and the external current consumption via NKDG is included in the power consumption data for the RS modules. Subject to technical alteration NKOASH NKOASA NKOAU NKOAI NKOD NKODH NKOK NKOKFH
0 0 Max. 6 20 0 Max. 3 Max. 7 Max. 5 5 10 1 5 5 Max. 10 Max. 10 Max. 36 Max. 20
15 20 12 12 15 15 15 Max. 3.5 6 6 2.4 Max. 2 Max. 2 Max. 0.75 Max. 0.75 Max. 0.75 Max. 0.75 Max. 2 Max. 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Max. 1 Max. 1.5 0.75 0.75 2 24 VA 24 VA 40 VA 40 VA 40 VA 7.5 W 40 VA
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions Transformers
K21-11.10
4/4 en - 97 - 01
Example
Calculate the maximum demand on the AC 24 V power supply for the system illustrated below: Equipment required Peripheral devices 4 T1 temperature sensors 1 humidity sensor 1 thermostat 1 magnetic valve DN25 3 magnetic valves DN40 2 damper actuators 4 pumps (supplied by contractor) 2 fans (supplied by contractor) 1 NBRN-.. operator terminal 1 RS module, type NRUB/A Load on DC 15 V source Peripheral devices: 1 x FRA-H2 Modules: 4 x NKOAS at 8 mA 9 x NKOD at 10 mA Total = = = = 5 mA 32 mA 90 mA 127 mA Terminal modules 4 terminal module 1 terminal module 1 terminal module 1 terminal module 1 terminal module 3 terminal modules 2 terminal modules 4 terminal modules 2 terminal modules NKDG NKDG NKID NKOD NKOAS NKOAS NKOD NKOD NKOD
The total load of 127 mA is within the admissible limit of 500 mA. The DC 15 V output of the NRUB/A module will therefore not be overloaded. Maximum demand on AC 24 V supply Peripheral devices: 3 magnetic valves DN40 (26 W x 1.5 each) 1 x magnetic valve DN25 (16 W x 1.5) 2 damper actuators, each 3.5 VA Sensors: none Modules: 1 x NRUB/A at 15 VA 9 x NKOD at 0.75 VA 4 x NKOAS at 0.5 VA Operator terminals: 1 x NBRN-.. at 250 mA x 24 V Total = = = 117 VA 24 VA 7 VA
= = = =
15 VA 6.8 VA 2 VA 6 VA 179.8 VA
Hence, a transformer with a minimum output of 200 VA is required.

INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions - Connection
K21-11.20
1/19 en - 97 - 01
Connecting systems with type ../A devices

Important Compliance with these installation instructions is essential. They provide the basis for correct operation of the system in respect of electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). A deviation from these instructions is permissible only in cases where local installation regulations so require. See section K21-11.30 for connection details for earlier controllers, (those without the suffix ../A), and mixed systems.
Supply voltage and signal strategy

Important Signals, communications signals and supply voltages from AS1000 devices may be connected directly to other systems and equipment only where these also comply with low voltage requirements (SELV). Exception: A voltage up to AC 240 V may be connected directly to the NKID, NKIDH, NKOD and NKODH terminal modules. These modules and the module carriers are constructed to withstand this voltage and have a minimum insulation resistance of AC 3750 V.
INTEGRAL RSM As a basic rule, the SELV-E (PELV) safety principles are applied. These require that the transformer providing the supply voltage should be connected to protective earth on the secondary side. A single transformer may be used for the supply voltage to several RS controllers and for the supply voltage to the peripheral devices within the same RS system. If several transformers are used, only one of these may be earthed. This strategy has significant advantages in terms of physical safety. Both 3-wire and 4-wire peripheral devices may be connected, by use of different terminal modules. See "Connecting peripheral devices to the RSM controllers", K21-11.20, page 16. The communication cables (RS bus) are electrically isolated in the RS controller.
9 Caution
Secondary-side earthing is essential and may be omitted only in cases where local regulations so prescribe.
Active sensor
X NS LS
RSM controller
NTIM ../A NTOM(S)
Controlled device
Y NS LS
51081
. . . .
. . . .
NK.. terminal modules
NS LS
NS LS
AC 24 V
AC 230 V

INTEGRAL RSA / RSC
K21-11.20
2/19 en - 97 - 01
Here too, SELV-E safety principles are applied. As with the INTEGRAL RSM controllers, the transformer is earthed on the secondary side and may be used simultaneously for the supply voltage to the RS controllers and to peripheral devices within the same RS system. Where several transformers are used, only one may be earthed. Although the RSA and RSC controllers were originally designed for 4-wire connections, the new signal strategy introduces the option of 3-wire connections. This means that the GND and NS terminals on the RSA and RSC controllers are interconnected. NS is the system reference point. See "Connecting peripheral devices to RSC or RSA controllers", K21-11.20 page 10. The communication cables (RS bus) are electrically isolated in the RS controller.
RSA or RSC controller Active sensor NS LS X
../A
+ +
Controlled device X NS LS
51082
9 Caution
Secondary-side earthing is essential and may be omitted only in cases where local regulations so prescribe. Where several transformers are used, note that only one may be earthed.
GND NS LS
AC 24 V
AC 230 V
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions - Connection AC 24 V power supply cables
K21-11.20
3/19 en - 97 - 01
These cables provide the AC 24 V supply voltage for the control modules, terminal module carriers and active peripheral devices . Special attention should be paid to cable dimensions. The use of wire with too small a cross-section, for example, may prevent a valve from opening fully. The fuse on the secondary side must be selected in accordance with the nominal rating of the transformer and the cable cross-sections used. The table below defines the minimum cable cross sections in accordance with AWG (American Wire Gauge) and DIN standards for various lengths of cable or switched nominal ratings (PN).
Table of secondary supply voltage cables (AC 24 V) 1) AWG 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 Cross-section [mm2] AWG 0.2047 0.3255 0.5176 0.8231 1.00 1.309 1.50 2.081 2.50 3.309 4.00 5.261 DIN 0.20 0.25 0.34 0.50 0.75 PN=10VA 2) 12 15 20 30 45 50 60 75 90 125 150 200 240 310
1) 2)
Cable length L max [m] 3) PN=20VA 2) 6 7 10 15 22 25 30 38 45 63 75 100 120 155 7 11 12 15 18 22 31 38 50 60 77 6 7 9 11 15 18 25 30 38 5 6 7 10 12 16 20 26 PN=40VA 2) PN=80VA 2) PN=120VA 2)
Local regulations relating to cable selection must also be observed. Voltage drop across the cable at nominal load and tA40 C = < 4 % 3) See diagram below for a definition of Lmax
U < 4 % Lmax
51152
AC 230 V
AC 24 V
AC 24 V
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions - Connection Signal cables to the peripheral devices
K21-11.20
4/19 en - 97 - 01
The signal cables transmit information from devices such as sensors and setpoint adjusters to the controllers, and information from the controllers to valves, damper actuators etc.
Signal cables to sensor elements, setpoint adjusters and room operating units Minimum requirements:
Important Use twisted cable only. Screening is not required.
Use only unscreened twisted cable. With low-power 3-wire peripheral devices (see example 1) the same cable may be used for signal and supply conductors. Use cables with the number of cores actually needed. If this is not possible, route surplus cores parallel to other cores, or connect to NS at both ends. Do not cut off cores! Avoid routing signal cables parallel to supply voltage cables, or maintain the following minimum distances: 30 cm for AC 125 V or 10 A 45 cm for AC 230 V or 50 A Example 1: 3-wire connection
51083
LS NS +
Active sensor LS NS 0 ...10 V
Twisted
Recommendation: Use unscreened twisted pair cable for improved interference protection. Create pairs for each element (T1, setpoint potentiometer, supply voltage). See Example 2.
Example 2: Connection of 3-wire devices using 4-core cable
51084
Active sensor
LS NS + LS NS 0 ...10 V
Twisted pair

Signal / supply cables to controlled devices Use unscreened twisted cable.
K21-11.20
5/19 en - 97 - 01
Select cable in accordance with the table of secondary supply voltage cables (AC 24 V) on page 3. Use cable with the number of cores actually required (see Example 3). If this is not possible, route surplus cores parallel to other cores. Do not cut off! Example 3: 3-wire connection (valve)
51153
LS NS +
Valve LS NS Y
For high-power controlled devices or where long cable runs are required, it is advisable to use separate cables for the supply and signals (e.g. separate transformer for valve supply voltage, see Example 4). The supply voltage cable should be selected in accordance with the table on page 3 and the signal cable in accordance with the table below. In this case, there is no need to use twisted cable for the supply voltage. Example 4: 3-wire connection with separate transformer
51085
1)
Valve
LS NS Y
1)The transformer must not be earthed.

+
Twisted
Table for unscreened signal cables (Sensors, setpoint adjusters, valve actuators, etc.) Cable description VDE / DIN AWG LiYYP 16 LiYYP 18 LiYYP 20 LiYYP LiYYP LiYYP LiYYP 22 A [mm2] 1.50 1.23 1.00 0.96 0.75 0.56 0.50 0.34 0.28 0.25 d [mm] 1.40 1.30 1.15 1.02 0.98 0.81 0.80 0.64 0.60 0.57 R 1) /km 14 16 20 21 26 33 39 56 64 77 Cable length Lmax [m] 240 200 150 140 120 80 75 55 50 40
Lmax l max
1)
Resistance of one wire; for loops: R /km x 2 Cable length Lmax represents the maximum distance between connected devices Recommended: twisted pair cable. Parallel connection of max. 2 pairs is permissible (2 x Lmax). See diagram, left, for a definition of Lmax
94.0166
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions - Connection RS bus connections

RS bus specification (RS485)
K21-11.20
6/19 en - 97 - 01
A bus cable complying with the following specification is required for the exchange of data between remote RS controllers, interfaces and operator terminals: Type: VDE Li-YYP 2 x 0.75 mm2
Key: Li = Stranded conductor Y = PVC-insulated core P = Twisted pair
In principle other cables may be used provided they are constructed in the same way and meet the following electrical specifications: Conductor resistance Capacitance at 800 Hz: core / core Number of twists 26 /km bus cable length 120 pF/m ( 20 %) approx. 20/m
Screened cables are not normally necessary. However, in environments susceptible to high-level interference, where screened cable is used, (e.g. in the vicinity of HF transmitters, high voltage cables etc.), the specification is as above, with the following exceptions: Type: VDE Li-YCYP 2 x 0.75 mm2 Capacitance at 800 Hz (core / screen): approx. 260 pF/m Screened cables must be earthed electrically at one end and capacitively at the other (use an NARB/A adapter - see next page). RS bus connections inside the control panel Mounting adjacent card modules (staefa integral RSM) The mechanical interconnection of adjacent NHGB card frames creates an internal RS bus connection through the card frame bases. Connecting the RSM card modules, RSC compact controllers and RSA application controllers. Inside the control panel, the RSM (card module) controllers are connected to the compact and application controllers via the NARB/A bus adapter (the method is as described for connection outside the control panel). Compact controllers may also be directly interconnected via the connection terminals. The cables used for connection must comply with the RS bus specification. Twisted pair cables must also be used inside the control panel. Connecting the RSC (compact) controllers inside the control panel
51086
1 2 3
1 2 3
RSG RS1 RS2
NRUE/A (1) NRUF/A NRUT../A
NRUE/A (2) NRUF/A NRUT../A
Twisted
RSG RS1 RS2

RS bus connection outside the control panel, via NARB/A
K21-11.20
7/19 en - 97 - 01
Both ends of the RS bus are connected to the NARB/A adapter. Screened cable is not normally required. However, in environments susceptible to high-level interference, where screened cable is used (e.g. in the vicinity of HF transmitters, high voltage cables etc.), the screen on the NARB/A of the controller with the lower address is earthed electrically, while that on the NARB/A of the controller with the higher address is earthed capacitively. Every NARB/A incorporates both earthing options. See data sheet K21-06.10 for a description of the NARB/A Connection principle
51155
N A RB/A
N A RB/A
N A RB/A
N RU ../A (1)
N RU ../A (2)
N RU ../A (3)
N ICO -N NICO
NARB/A wiring Only signals RS1 and RS2 are used for the RS bus connection between RS controllers with the suffix ../A. Note: Communication cables must not be routed parallel to signal cables.
51087
RS2 From RS controller 1 RS1
RS2 To RS RS1 controller 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NARB/A
RS1 RS2
NARB/A wiring in existing systems with screened cables This option must be used in conjunction with RS controllers whose type codes do not contain the suffix ../A, or in systems where high-level interference is likely.
51088
From RS controller 1
RSG RS2 RS1
RSG RS2 RS1
To RS controller 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Twisted pair
RS1 RS2 RSG
NARB/A

Extending the RS bus via NARC adapter
K21-11.20
8/19 en - 97 - 01
If the maximum admissible length of the RS bus (2400 m) is insufficient, an extension can be achieved by use of short-haul modems and an NARC adapter. In systems where increased lightning protection is required, this method also provides electrical isolation with a higher dielectric strength (depending on the modem). In conjunction with INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE, the NARC may be used as a signal transducer. In place of the NARB/A, two NARC bus adapters (interface converters) are used. The main function of the NARC is to convert the RS485 signal into two RS232 signals, and to control the data flow between the two devices. The two NARCs may be connected either by short-haul modem or by fibreoptic cable. Only RX, TX and GND signals are available (without electrical isolation), and no control signals are transmitted. For this reason a full duplex modem connection is required between these adapters (fibre-optic interface or short-haul modem). Dial-up modems are not suitable. Note that in systems with several outstations, the signal propagation time is a critical factor. Each additional interface represents an additional delay. The maximum signal propagation time must not exceed 1 ms (NARC delay max. 4 s, RS controllers: 3 s). See data sheet K21-06.15 for a description of the NARC. Connection principle
51156 1)
Fibre optical connection
1)
2)
2)
RS bus
NARB/A NARC NARC NARC
NBRN NRU../A NRU../A NRU../A NRU../A
Key: 1) 2) NARB/A NRU../A
Fibre-optic interface Short-haul modem Adapter for RS bus RS controller
Connecting the NARC to the RS bus

51089
Note The NARC adapter must either be mounted on an earthed DIN rail or earthed via terminal 5 (TE).
RS1 RS2
1 2 3 4 5
NARC
RSG RS1 RS2
TE
Twisted pair
INTEGRAL AS1000 Installation instructions - Connection Connection via NITEL.. to a PC operator station
K21-11.20
9/19 en - 97 - 01
For operation with the INTEGRAL DIALOG service software, the PC must be connected to a NITEL.. communications module (see data sheet K21-07.30). The PC is connected to the COM2/RS232 port of the NITEL.. with a standard cable (see K21-12.50). The NITEL.. is connected to the RS bus in the same way as an RS card module. It may either be connected via the NARB/A adapter, or plugged in directly adjacent to the RS card modules. Connection principle
51157
PC
NARB/A
AT link cable
6
NITEL
Connecting the PRONTO IRC individual room control system via NIPRO
The NIPRO pronto interface can be connected to the RS bus in the same way as an RS card module, and is connected via ribbon cable to the NAPC pronto bus adapter. Two pronto buses (trunks), each accommodating up to 60 individual room controllers, may be connected to the NAPC adapter, giving a total of 120 individual room controllers. Connection principle
51158
NARB/A
NAPC
pronto bus Z237
6 5 4 3 2 1
2 trunks
NRU../A
NIPRO
For installation of PRONTO IRC, refer to the relevant engineering manuals in the P.. series.
K21-11.20
10/19 en - 97 - 01
Connecting peripheral devices to RSC or RSA controllers

Passive sensors T1 sensors
Important The T1 supply voltage must be enabled (default setting - see K21-03.10 p. 3 and K21-04.10 p. 4).
NRUE/A NRUF/A NRUT../A NRK../A DC 15 V AC 24 V
+15 GND NS LS
51090
AC 24 V
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
T1 sensor
2 1
Pt100 sensors / Ni1000 sensors1)

+15 GND NS LS
51091
AC 24 V
NTIO
9 10 12 13 14
Pt100 sensor Ni1000-sensor1)
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
1)
For the connection of Landis & Staefa Ni1000 sensors only terminals 1 and 2 of the NKIAVN are used. The T1 supply voltage must be enabled (default setting).
2 1
NKIAVA NKIAVB NKIAVC NKIAVD NKIAVN 1)
1 + 2 3 4
1) 1)
Active sensors with DC 15 V supply and DC 0 ... 10 V signal

Important For sensors not designed to sink current (3rd party sensors, OEM devices), the T1 supply voltage must be disabled (by repositioning the jumpers - see K21-03.10, p. 3 and K21-04.10 p. 4)

+15 GND NS LS
51092
AC 24 V
e.g. FKA-H2
1 2 3 4 +15 V 5 GND 6 DC 0 ...10 V
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
e.g. FKA-P
e.g. NMID
GND + +15
OEM devices
GND + DC 0 ...10 V +15 DC +15 V
2 1
0V GND S + +15
Twisted pair
Control panel input terminals

Active 4-wire sensors with AC 24 V supply
Important For sensors not designed to sink current, (FR-Q2, 3rd party sensors, OEM devices), the T1 supply voltage must be disabled, by repositioning the jumpers (see K21-03.10 p. 3 and K21-04.10 p. 4) For 4-wire sensors, highimpedance isolation is required between the signal and the supply voltage. Otherwise, the 3-wire connection shown as option 2 (below) must be used.
K21-11.20
11/19 en - 97 - 01

+15 GND NS LS
51093
AC 24 V
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
e.g. FR-Q2
LS NS +
e.g. FKA-Q1A FKA-V2

~ AC 24 V ~ S 0 ...10 V 0 SGND
e.g. OEM devices

LS NS +
2 1
2 AC 24 V 1 4 5
Active 3-wire sensors with AC 24 V supply Option 1:

Important For sensors not designed to sink current (3rd party sensors) the T1 supply must be disabled (by repositioning the jumpers (see K21-03.10 p. 3 and K21-04.10 p. 4)
Direct connection
NRUE/A NRUF/A NRUT../A NRK../A
51094
AC 24 V
DC 15 V AC 24 V
+15 GND NS LS
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
2 1
e.g. active sensor NS AC 24 V ~ LS + DC 0 ...10 V
e.g. FT-P..
1 2 3
NS LS DC 0 ...10 V
Option 2:
Sensor connected indirectly via NTIO terminal module carrier and NKIA or NKIAU terminal module.
51095
Application This option is used where electrical or high-impedance isolation is required between the sensor and controller. (Only required in exceptional cases.)
1)
AC 24 V
DC 15 V AC 24 V
Terminal 12 of the NTIO is connected to the RSC or RSA controller if an NKIA is used (connection 2) not required). 2) Terminals 9 and 10 of the NTIO are connected to the RSA or RSC controller if an NKIAU is used. (Connection 1) not required.) 3) The NKIAU should be used where EMC is compromised by high-level interference.
+15 GND NS LS 2) 2) 1)
NTIO
9 10 12 13 14 1 + 2 3 4
3rd party signal

DC 0 ...10 V +
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
2 1
NKIA 3) NKIAU
Twisted pair

4-wire AC 24 V actuators with a DC 0 ... 10 V signal
K21-11.20
12/19 en - 97 - 01
Outputs DC 0 ...10 V
Important Actuators must incorporate highimpedance isolation between the signal and supply. Where this is not the case, a separate unearthed transformer is required.

+15 GND NS LS
51096A
AC 24 V
e.g. UA9
LS NS +
e.g. ZM../A
~ 2 ~ 1 + 4 3
OEM devices
LS AC 24 V NS + DC 0 ...10 V
4 3
2 AC 24 V 1 4 3
3-wire AC 24 V actuators with a DC 0 ... 10 V signal

+15 GND NS LS
51097A
AC 24 V
e.g. ASU1D15 ASU1D30

1 N 2 ~ L + 3
e.g. AM1S/E
2 N 1 ~ L + 3
e.g. M..Y-Valve
2 NS AC 24 V 1 LS 3 +
OEM devices
N ~ L +
AC 24 V DC 0 ...10 V
4 3
3-wire AC 24 V actuators with DC 0 ... 10 V positioning signal and position feedback signal Without separate transformer
+15 GND NS LS
51098A
AC 24 V
4 3 2 1
+ +
e.g. M..Y valve NS AC 24 V ~ LS + DC 0 ...10 V + DC 0 ...10 V
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
Twisted

With separate transformer
K21-11.20
13/19 en - 97 - 01
Important Transformer T2 must not be earthed.

DC 15 V AC 24 V

+15 GND NS LS
51100B
T1 AC 24 V
T2 AC 24 V
e.g. M..Y valve NS AC 24 V ~ LS + DC 0 ...10 V + DC 0 ...10 V
4 3 2 1
+ +
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
Twisted

BSG-100 setpoint adjuster Used for position limit control
+15 GND NS LS
51101A
K21-11.20
14/19 en - 97 - 01
AC 24 V
BSG-100
1 AC/DC +15 ... 24 V 2 GND 4 3
4 3
~ AC 24 V
e.g. damper actuator
Used as setpoint adjuster

+15 GND NS LS
51102
AC 24 V
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
BSG-100
1 AC/DC +15 ... 24 V 2 GND 3 4
2 1
Room operating units PBA

+15 GND NS LS
51103
PBC
+15 GND NS LS
60132
AC 24 V
AC 24 V
PBC 9 NS / GND 8 LS / + 15 V
3 w 2 SGND 1 TRA
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
PBA 2 1 2 1
+ + 1 2 3 4
T1 w
2 1 2 1
+ +
Twisted pair

KRT-1S
NRUE/A NRUF/A NRUT../A NRK../A DC 15 V AC 24 V 2 1 2 1 2 1
+15 GND NS LS
60133
K21-11.20
15/19 en - 97 - 01
KRU-1
KRT-1S
2 1 4 3 8 7
60135
AC 24 V
AC 24 V
+15 GND NS LS
KRU-1 Inputs DC 0 ...10 V

6 DC 15 V 7 GND
+ + +
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
2 1 2 1
+ +
2 1 5
KRT-L, KRT-B
60134
NRK../A DC 15 V AC 24 V
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
+15 GND NS LS + + +
AC 24 V DC 15 V KRT-1L KRT-1B
2 1 6 7 5 t
NRUE/A NRUF/A NRUT../A

+15 GND NS LS + + + -
AC 24 V
AC 24 V
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
KRT-1L KRT-1B
2 1 7 t
2 1 1 2 4
2 1 2 1 4 3
Remote operation DC 0 ...10 V
5 6
Digital output signals (for relays, contactors etc. )

51104
NRUE/A NRUF/A NRUT../A DC 15 V AC 24 V

+15 GND NS LS
AC 24 V
Max. load: 2 A, AC 24 V
* max 2 A max AC/DC 50 V

3 4
51105
* Recommendation: Suppress interference from inductive loads by fitting RC circuits or varistors (directly on core). For AC/DC 24 V e.g. C = 0.1 F, R = 32 (see also relay supplier's recommendation)
NRK../A
+15 GND NS LS
Max. load: 50 mA, DC 24 V

+ DC 24 V max 50 mA 5 3
K21-11.20
16/19 en - 97 - 01
Connecting peripheral devices to the RSM controllers

Passive sensors T1 sensors
NKIT NKDG
SGND 1 DC 2,2 ... 4,2 V + 2 3 4
51106A
T1 sensor
Pt100 sensors / Ni1000 sensors1)

NKIAVA NKIAVB NKIAVC NKIAVD NKIAVN 1)
1)
51107
For the connection of Landis & Staefa Ni1000 sensors only terminals 1 and 2 are used.
1 2 3 4
1) 1)
Pt100 sensor Ni1000 sensor1)
Active DC 15 V sensors with DC 0 ... 10 V signal

NKDG
SGND 1 DC 0 ...10 V + 2 DC +15 V 3 4
e.g. 51108 BSG-100 2 GND 3 DC 0 ...10 V 1 AC/DC 15 ... 24 V
4-wire active AC 24 V sensors with DC 0 ... 10 V signal Option 1: Direct connection to NKDW transducer module. This option may only be used with sensors designed to sink current, and in which the supply and signals are isolated electrically or by a high impedance.
e.g. 51109 FKA-Q1A
SGND DC 0 ...10 V 4 3 1 2 ~ AC 24 V ~ 0 SGND S DC 0 ...10 V
NKDW
Option 2:
Connection using NKIA decoupling module. This option must be used in the following cases: signal not compatible with RS input, i.e. sensor cannot sink current quasi 4-wire device, i.e. the signal is neither electrically isolated nor isolated by a high impedance from the supply voltage.
NKIA
1 DC 0 ...10 V + 2 ~ 3 AC 24 V 4
e.g. 51110 FR-Q2, or 3rd party sensor

+ ~ ~
DC 0 ...10 V AC 24 V
Twisted pair

3-wire active AC 24 V sensors with DC 0 ... 10 V signal
NKIA
DC 0 ...10 V + LS ~ AC 24 V NS 1 2 3 4
K21-11.20
17/19 en - 97 - 01
e.g. 51111 FT-P.. NS ~ LS AC 24 V + 0 ...10 V
3-wire active DC 15 V sensors with DC 0 ... 10 V signal, where the signal output is incompatible with the RS input (cannot sink current) Options for sensor supply voltage: via existing NKDG (preferably in NTOMS module carrier) external supply
NKDG
1 2 DC +15 V 3 4 SGND +
51112
e.g. 3rd party sensor GND

+ DC +15 V + DC 0 ...10 V
NKIA
1 + 2 3 4
DC 0 10 V sensor signal electrically isolated from RS system (where electrical isolation is specified, or where direct galvanic connection would cause interference to peripheral device signal)
NKIAU
1 + 2 3 4
e.g. 51113 3rd party sensor

+
DC 0 ...10 V
4-wire AC 24 V actuators or devices with DC 0 ... 10 V signal

NKOAS..
1) 1 2 3 4
51114
NKDW
SGND DC 0 ...10 V 4 3 1 2
e.g. ZM../A UA9, or 3rd party device

1 2 3 4 ~ AC 24 V ~ + DC 0 ...10 V
AC 24 V ~ DC 0 ...10 V
1)
When connecting 3rd party devices, the NKOAS.. terminal module must be used (high impedance isolation)
3-wire AC 24 V actuators with DC 0 ... 10 V signal

NKOAS..
AC 24 V ~ DC 0 ...10 V 1 2 3 4
e.g. 51115 ASU1D15

1 2 3 NS ~ LS AC 24 V
+ 0 ...10 V
Twisted

3-wire AC 24 V actuators with DC 0 ... 10 V positioning and position feedback signals
NKOAS NKOASH NKOASA
N 1 AC 24 V L 2 3 DC 0 ...10 V + 4 1)
K21-11.20
18/19 en - 97 - 01
51116A
M..Y
~ + +
NKIA
1 + 2 3 4
N L DC 0 ...10 V DC 0 ...10 V
1)
A separate, unearthed, transformer may also be used for the valve supply voltage.
Room operating units PBA

NKDG NKIT
SGND 1 DC 2,2 ... 4,2 V 2 3 4
51117
PBA
1 2 3 4
T1 w
NKDG
SGND 1 DC 2 ... 3 V 2 3 4
PBC
NKDG SGND 1 DC 2,2 4,2 V 2
3 4
60136
PBC
2 SGND 1 TRA 3 w
NKDG SGND DC 2,2 4,2 V DC 15 V

1 2 3 4
8 LS / + 15 V 9 NS / SGND
KRT-1, KRT-1S
60137
NKDG, NKIT
1 2 3 4
KRT-1S
1 2
KRT-1
1 2
NKDG
1 2 3 4 3 4 3 4
NKIDP
1 2 3 4 7 8
Twisted

KRT-1B, KRT-1L
NKDG, NKIT
1) 1 2 3 4
K21-11.20
19/19 en - 97 - 01
KRT-1L KRT-1B
1 2
60138
NKDG
2) 1 2 3 4 6 5
NKDG
1) 1 2 3 4
1) 2)
In NTIM terminal module carrier In NTOM(S) terminal module carrier
KRU-1, BRU-1
NKDG
1 2 3 4
60139
KRU-1
7 GND 5 6 DC 15 V
NKDG, NKIT
1 2 3 4 1 2
Digital output signals (for relays, contactors and misc. loads)

Supply voltage
51118
NKOD(H)
1 2 3 4
Load max. AC 250 V, max. 6 A resistive, 2 A inductive
* Recommendation: Suppress interference from inductive loads by fitting RC circuits or varistors (directly on core), e.g. For AC/DC 24 V: 0.1 F + 33 AC 50V For AC 230 V: 0.1 F + 100 AC 50V (see the relay supplier's recommendation)
Twisted
K21-11.30
1/12 en - 97 - 01
Connection of systems with the earlier RS controllers (without the ../A suffix) or mixed systems
Important
9 Caution
In systems using the older RS controllers (without the suffix ../A) or in systems combining old and new controllers, the transformer must not be earthed on the secondary side.
Existing cables may be retained when upgrading older systems or when replacing RS controllers with the newer, suffix ../A controllers. Note, however, that susceptibility to interference can be reduced by the use of twisted cables as described in K21-11.20. If new cables are installed, these must be in accordance with cable specifications detailed in K21-11.20. This does not apply to the RS bus cable, which must comply with the original specification as follows.
RS bus connections
Connection of RSA and RSC controllers inside the control panel If a screen is required, it must be earthed electrically at one end and earthed capacitively (or insulated) at the other.
94.0187
01 02 03
RSG RS1 RS2
01 02 03
RSG RS1 RS2
NRU.. (1) * if required
NRU.. (2)
Only for systems using RS controllers with no ../A suffix and for mixed systems
In systems using the earlier RS controllers, which do not have the suffix ../A, or in systems incorporating both types (upgrades and replacements), the original connection diagrams, as in this section, must be used.

Connections outside the control panel via NARB adapter This solution may be used for connections inside the same building
K21-11.30
2/12 en - 97 - 01
where there is no significant difference in potential between the systems grounds (SGND) of the various remote systems in environments exposed to low to medium-level interference
Both ends of the RS bus are connected to the NARB adapter. The screen on the NARB of the controller with the lower address is earthed electrically, while that on the NARB of the controller with the higher address is earthed capacitively with a 68 nF / AC 250 V capacitor. Connection principle
92.00037
NARB
NARB
NARB
NRU.#1
NRU.#2
NRU.#3
NICO -N
Electrical earth Capacitive earth
Note Instead of the NARB adapter, the newer type NARB/A may be used. This offers improved wiring options (connection of a cable screen) and incorporates a surge protector.
NARB wiring RS1 and RS2 signal wires must be wires of the same twisted pair. Where used, RSG must be in a separate twisted pair. The two wires must be connected in parallel.
94.0175
RSG RS1 RS2
RSG RS1 RS2
1 2 3 4 5
NARB

Note Please contact your local Staefa office for detailed advice on the application of the NARC and other interfaces and bus protection systems.
K21-11.30
3/12 en - 97 - 01
Electrical isolation of the RS bus via NARC The RS bus must be electrically isolated under the following circumstances in environments exposed to medium or high levels of interference (e.g. industrial areas) for connections between different systems running across open land or in tunnelling through rock (lightning protection)
where the bus cable exceeds 2400 m Connection principle

92.00966 1) Fibre-optical connection 1) 2) 2)
RS bus
NARB
NARC
NARC
NARC
NBRN NRU.. NRU.. NRU.. NRU..
Electrical earth Capacitive earth
Key: 1) 2) NARB NRU..
Fibre-optic interface Short-haul modem RS bus adapter RS controller
Connecting the NARC to the RS bus
94.0191
RSG RS1 RS2
* NARC
1 2 3 4 5
Note The NARC adapter must either be mounted on an earthed DIN rail or earthed via terminal 5 (TE).
RSG RS1 RS2
TE
* if required
with differences in potential > 5 V between system grounds (SGND) of remote systems
K21-11.30
4/12 en - 97 - 01
Connection of peripheral devices to RSC or RSA controller 3-wire connection

AC 24 V actuators with a DC 010 V signal Option 1: Direct connection. Peripheral device and RSC / RSA controller supplied from same transformer.
Important: This option must not be used with RSC or RSA controllers connected to other controllers on the RS bus sharing the same AC 24 V supply.
NRUE / NRUF / NRUT NRK16 (-B/-TEL) DC 15 V AC 24 V

+15 GND N () L (~) 1)
AC 24 V
40600EN
Outputs DC 0 ... 10 V
e.g. ASU1D15 ASU1D30

1 N 2 ~ L 3 +
e.g. AM1S/E
2 N 1 ~ L 3 +
other
N AC 24 V ~ L + DC 0 ... 10 V
1)
GND and N () AC 24 V must be linked.
4 3
Option 2:
Indirect connection. Connection via NTIO single terminal module carrier and NKOASA terminal module. Peripheral device and RSC/RSA supplied from same transformer.
1)
This connection is required when using type NKOAS(H) terminal modules, but not needed with the NKOASA.

+15 GND N () L (~)
AC 24 V
1)
40601AEN
2)
If the peripheral device requires more than 40 W, it must be supplied directly from the transformer. (The connection to terminals 1 and 2 of the NTIO are then not required).
NTIO
9 10 12 13 14 2)
e.g. AS..D..
N AC 24 V ~ L + DC 0 ... 10 V
NKOAS(A) N () 1
L (~) 2 () 3 DC 0 ... 10 V (+) 4
4 3
Option 3:
Direct connection. RSC/RSA controller and peripheral device each supplied from a separate transformer.
2) 1)
Controller 1
Application This option should be used in cases where several controllers, sharing the same AC 24 V power supply, are connected to the RS bus and located in the same control panel. The connection marked 1) is essential to prevent compensating currents via the RS bus. Important For individual, remotely located RSA/ RSC controllers (e.g. those outside the control panel) a separate transformer must be used for the peripheral devices of each controller. In such cases connection 1) is not required.
2)

+15 GND N () L (~)
AC 24 V
AC 24 V e.g. AS..D..
N ~ L +
40602AEN
e.g. M..Y-Valve
2 NS AC 24 V 1 LS 3 DC 0 ... 10 V
4 3
+ +15 GND N () L (~)
DC 15 V Controller 2 AC 24 V Outputs DC 0 ... 10 V
e.g. AS..D..
N ~ L +
e.g. M..Y-Valve
2 NS AC 24 V 1 LS 3 DC 0 ... 10 V
4 3
This transformer must not be earthed on the secondary (AC 24 V) side.
Controller n

Important: This option must not be used with RSC or RSA controllers connected to other controllers on the RS bus sharing the same AC 24 V supply. For sensors not designed for a sink current (e.g. FT-P..) the T1 power supply in the RSA/RSC controllers must be disabled (see K21-03.10 page 3 and K21-04.10 page 4).
K21-11.30
5/12 en - 97 - 01
Active sensors with AC 24 V supply and DC 010 V signal Option 1: Direct connection. Peripheral device and RSC / RSA controller supplied from same transformer.

+15 GND N () L (~) 1)
AC 24 V
40603AEN
Inputs DC 0 ... 10 V
e.g. active sensor

NS AC 24 V ~ LS + DC 0 ... 10 V
1)
2 1
Option 2:
Indirect connection via NTIO single terminal module carrier and NKIA or NKIAU 3) terminal module. Peripheral device and RSC/ RSA supplied from same transformer.
Application This option should be used in cases where several controllers sharing the same AC 24 V power supply are connected to the RS bus.
1)

+15 GND N () L (~)
AC 24 V
2)
3)
Terminal 12 of the NTIO is connected to the RSC/RSA controller if the NKIA is used (connection 2) not required). Terminals 9 and 10 of the NTIO are connected to the transformer if an NKIAU is used (connection 1) not required). The NKIAU should be used where there is a risk of electromagnetic interference (EMI).
40604AEN
NTIO
2)
2) 1)
2 1
9 10 12 13 14
e.g. active sensor DC 0 ... 10 V NKIA NKIAU 3)

1 + 2 3 4 NS AC 24 V ~ LS + DC 0 ... 10 V
Option 3:
Direct connection. RSC/RSA controller and peripheral device each supplied from a separate transformer.
NRUE / NRUF / NRUT NRK16 (-B/-TEL) DC 15 V

+15 GND N () L (~) 1)
2)
AC 24 V
AC 24 V e.g. active sensor

NS ~ LS +
40605AEN
Application This option should be used in cases where several controllers, sharing the same AC 24 V power supply, are connected to the RS bus and located in the same control panel. The connection marked 1) is essential to prevent compensating currents via the RS bus. Important For individual, remotely located RSA/ RSC controllers (e.g. those outside the control panel) a separate transformer must be used for the peripheral devices of each controller. In such cases connection 1) is not required.
2)
Controller 1
AC 24 V
e.g. additional sensor

NS AC 24 V ~ LS + DC 0 ... 10 V
2 1
+ +15 GND N () L (~)
DC 15 V Controller 2 AC 24 V Inputs DC 0 ... 10 V
e.g. active sensor

NS ~ LS +
e.g. additional sensor

NS AC 24 V ~ LS + DC 0 ... 10 V
2 1
Controller n
K21-11.30
6/12 en - 97 - 01
AC 24 V actuators with DC 010 V positioning signal and position feedback signal

Important: This option must not be used with RSC or RSA controllers connected to other controllers on the RS bus sharing the same AC 24 V supply.
Option 1:
Direct connection. Peripheral device and RSC/RSA controller supplied from same transformer.

+15 GND N () L (~) 1)
AC 24 V
40606AEN
e.g. M..Y-Valve
NS AC 24 V ~ LS + DC 0 ... 10 V + DC 0 ... 10 V
1)
4 3 2 1
+ +
Option 2:
Application This option should be used in cases where several controllers, sharing the same AC 24 V power supply, are connected to the RS bus and located in the same control panel. The connection marked 1) is essential to prevent compensating currents via the RS bus. Important: For individual, remotely located RSA/ RSC controllers (e.g. those outside the control panel) a separate transformer must be used for the peripheral devices of each controller. In such cases connection 1) is not required.
Direct connection. Peripheral device and RSC/RSA controller supplied from separate transformers.

Controller 1 Outputs DC 0 ... 10 V
+15 GND N () L (~) 1)
2)
AC 24 V
AC 24 V
40607AEN
e.g. additional e.g. M..Y-Valve peripheral device

NS ~ LS + + NS AC 24 V ~ LS + DC 0 ... 10 V
4 3 2 1
+ +
DC 0 ... 10 V
e.g. additional peripheral devices, controller n

+15 GND N () L (~) NS ~ LS AC 24 V + DC 0 ... 10 V + DC 0 ... 10 V
Controller n
DC 15 V AC 24 V
2)
DC 15 V actuators with DC 010 V signals Direct connection. Peripheral device supplied from controller.
40608EN

+15 GND N () L (~)
AC 24 V
Note: Simultaneous operation of 3-wire AC 24 V peripheral devices is also possible (GND and N on the RSA/RSC controller must be linked).
e.g. actuator or BSG-100 4 3

+ GND + DC 0 ... 10 V +15 DC +15 V

Active DC 15 V sensors with DC 010 V signal Direct connection. Peripheral device supplied from controller.
For sensors not designed for a sink current (e.g. 3rd party sensors) the T1 power supply in the RSA/RSC controllers must be disabled (see K21-03.10 page 3 and K21-04.10 page 4).
K21-11.30
7/12 en - 97 - 01

+15 GND N () L (~)
AC 24 V
40609AEN
Simultaneous operation of 3-wire AC 24 V peripheral devices is also possible (GND and N on the RSA/RSC controller must be linked).
Note:
e.g. FKA-P 2 1
+ 0V GND S + +15
e.g. NMID
GND + +15
e.g. OEM device

GND + DC 0 ... 10 V +15 DC +15 V
4-wire connections AC 24 V actuators with DC 010 V signal

Note: Simultaneous operation of 3-wire AC 24 V peripheral devices is also possible (GND and N on the RSA/RSC controller must be linked).

+15 GND N () L (~)
AC 24 V
40611AEN
e.g. UA9
LS NS +
e.g. ZM../A 2 1 4 3
~ ~ +
4 3
1 AC 24 V 2 4 3
1)
For sensors not designed for a sink current (e.g. FR-Q2) the T1 power supply in the RSA/RSC controllers must be disabled (see K21-03.10 page 3 and K21-04.10 page 4).
Active AC 24 V sensors with DC 010 V signal

+15 GND N () L (~)
AC 24 V
50619EN
Simultaneous operation of 3-wire AC 24 V peripheral devices is also possible (GND and N on the RSA/RSC controller must be linked).
Note:
e.g. FKA-Q1A
~ ~ S 0
1)
AC 24 V DC 0 ... 10 V
2 1

Room operating units BRT-1
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
NRUE, NRUF NRUT, NRK.. (-B, -TEL) 2 1
+
51159
K21-11.30
8/12 en - 97 - 01
BRT-1
2 1
KRT-1S, KRT-1
NRUE, NRUF NRUT, NRK.. (-B, -TEL) 2 1 2 1 2 1
+ + +
51160
KRT-1S
2 1 4 3 8 7
KRT-1
2 1 4 3
KRT-1L, KRT-1B
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V Inputs DC 0 ...10 V NRK16 (-B, -TEL) 2 1 1 2 4
+ + +
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
51119
KRT-1L KRT-1B
2 1 6 7 5
NRUE NRUF NRUT 2 1 2 1 4 3

+ + +
KRT-1L KRT-1B
2 1 7
5 6
BRT-1Q, BRQ-1, BRT-1H, BRH-1

NRUE, NRUF NRUT, NRK.. (-B, -TEL) DC 15 V AC 24 V
+15 GND NS LS
51120A
AC 24 V
BRT-1Q BRT-1H
BRQ-1 BRH-1
6 DC 15 V 7 GND
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
2 1 2 1
+ +
5 DC 15 V 6 GND 4 t 3 7
KRU-1, BRU-1
51121A
NRUE, NRUF NRUT, NRK.. (-B, -TEL) DC 15 V AC 24 V

+15 GND NS LS
AC 24 V
KRU-1
BRU-1
6 DC 15 V 7 GND
Inputs DC 0 ...10 V
2 1 2 1
+ +
6 DC 15 V 7 GND 2 t 1 5
K21-11.30
9/12 en - 97 - 01
Connecting peripheral devices to the RSM controllers

3-wire connections AC 24 V actuators with DC 0 ... 10 V signal
50620EN
NKOAS.. AC 24 V ~ 2
3 1
e.g. ASU1D15
1 AC 24 V 2 ~ 3 +0 ... 10 V
+0 ... 10 V 4
AC 24 V actuators with DC 010 V signal and position feedback signal

NKOAS..
N 1 AC 24 V L 2 3 DC 0 ...10 V + 4 2) 1 + 2 3 4 1)
60140
e.g. M..Y valve

~ + +
NKIA
N L DC 0 ...10 V DC 0 ...10 V
1) The valve may also be supplied from a separate, un-earthed, transformer 2) The NKIA is not required if the position feedback signal is not used.
Active AC 24 V sensors with DC 0 ... 10 V signals

50621EN
N NKIA
1)
Any AC 24 V supply, e.g. from terminal module carrier or NKDW
1 + 2 3 4
AC 24 V L e.g. active sensor 1) NS AC 24 V ~

LS
+ 0...10 V
DC 15 V actuators with DC 0 ... 10 V signal

50622EN
NKDG SNGD 1 DC 0 ... 10 V + 2 3 DC +15 V

4
e.g. BSG-100
2 3 1 4
GND + 0 ... 10 V + 15 ... 24 V AC/DC
Active DC 15 V sensors with DC 0 ... 10 V signal

50623EN
NKDG SNGD 1 DC 0 ... 10 V + 2 3 DC +15 V

4
e.g. active sensor (FKA-P, FKA-H2)

0 GND S DC 0 ... 10 V + DC 15 V

4-wire connections (24 V and signal isolated) AC 24 V actuators with a DC 010 V signal
50624EN
K21-11.30
10/12 en - 97 - 01
NKOAS..
1 ~ 2 3 +0 ... 10 V 4
NKDW
4 ~ 3 SNGD 1 +0 ... 10 V 2
e.g. ZM../A, UA9

1 2 3 4 ~ AC 24 V ~ DC 0 ... 10 V +
Active AC 24 V sensors with a DC 010 V signal (RS-compatible)

50625EN
NKDW
4 ~ 3 SGND 1 +0 ... 10 V 2
e.g. FKA-Q1A
~ AC 24 V ~ 0 SGND S DC 0 ... 10 V
Active AC 24 V sensors with DC 010 V signal Non-RS compatible signals (i.e. no sink-current capability) The connection from the peripheral device is not a genuine 4-wire connection, i.e. the signal is not electrically isolated from the supply voltage, nor is it separated by a high resistance.
NKIA DC 0 ... 10 V + 2
1)
1 3 4
AC 24 V L e.g. FR-Q2 or 3rd party sensor 1) ~ ~ AC 24 V

+
50626EN
DC 0 ... 10 V
Any AC 24 C supply, e.g. from terminal module carrier or NKDW

Room operating units BRT-1
51122
K21-11.30
11/12 en - 97 - 01
NKDG
1 2 3 4
BRT-1
3 4
KRT-1, KRT-1S
51123A
NKDG, NKIT
1 2 3 4
KRT-1S
1 2
KRT-1
1 2
NKDG
1 2 3 4 3 4 3 4
NKIDP
1 2 3 4 7 8
KRT-1B, KRT-1L
NKDG, NKIT
1) 1 2 3 4
KRT-1L KRT-1B
1 2
51124A
NKDG
2) 1 2 3 4 6 5
NKGD
1) 1 2 3 4
1) 2)
in NTIM module carrier in NTOM(S) module carrier

BRT-1H, BRH-1, BRT-1Q, BRQ-1
51125A
K21-11.30
12/12 en - 97 - 01
NKDG
1 2 3 4
BRT-1Q BRT-1H
6 GND 7 5 DC 15 V
BRQ-1 BRH-1
6 GND 7 5 DC 15 V
NKDG
1 2 3 4 3 4
KRU-1, BRU-1
51126
NKDG
1 2 3 4
KRU-1
7 GND 5 6 DC 15 V
BRU-1
7 GND 5 6 DC 15 V
NKDG, NKIT
1 2 3 4 1 2
K21-12
Commissioning
INTEGRAL AS1000 Commissioning
K21-12.01
1/1 en - 97 - 01
Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................ 12.10 Commissioning the control panels ............................................................. 12.20 Equipment testing ....................................................................................... 12.30 Commissioning the control and interlock system ...................................... 12.40 Commissioning the NITEL.. for INTEGRAL DIALOG .................................... 12.50
K21-12.10
1/2 en - 97 - 01
Introduction
Summary
This section details the safety precautions which must be observed under all circumstances when commissioning the INTEGRAL AS1000 control and interlock system to ensure the safety of personnel, equipment, components and the system as a whole. An awareness of the following makes a significant contribution to the prevention of accidents: The majority of accidents occur as a result of carelessness or lack of information. In addition to qualified personnel, inexperienced staff with no in-depth training in electronics will be working on site (e.g. machine fitters).
Safety of personnel
Safety precautions are primarily designed to prevent hazardous situations from occurring in the first place. This can be achieved by: Staff training Restricted access to the installations Clear marking of potentially dangerous zones Switching off any parts of the system not in use at the time To ensure safety, the following measures are imperative: 1. All personnel must be made aware of the power supply arrangements for the system: As a basis: a schematic showing the power distribution system Location of all mains switches and emergency circuit breakers Areas of the system which can be isolated by individual circuit breakers 2. Switch off the power supply to all parts of the system on which commissioning work is not currently in progress. 3. All mains-operated systems or loads must be electrically isolated before work is carried out on them. Those working on the system are themselves responsible for electrical isolation. Switches which have been switched off, or from which the fuses have been removed for safety purposes, must be fitted with a label bearing the date and the name of the person responsible. Upon completion of the work, that person is responsible for removing the label. Other staff are not authorised to remove labels or switch on equipment. 4. Restrict access to unprotected machinery (e.g. exposed fan-belt drives).
9 Danger Machinery outside the field of vision of the commissioning engineer can be started by the system, representing a potential danger to the safety of others.
Safety of the system

The commissioning engineer must ensure in advance that the equipment controlled by the INTEGRAL AS1000 system is, itself, ready for operation. Equipment not supplied by Landis & Staefa (such as heating, refrigeration, hydraulic and ventilation equipment) must not be commissioned until evidence has been furnished that the supplier has checked its serviceability.
INTEGRAL AS1000 Commissioning Handling of electronic components
K21-12.10
2/2 en - 97 - 01
To ensure the safe handling and reliability of electronic components and assemblies, the following points should be noted: 1. To prevent static discharge and corrosion, do not touch the connections of electronic components (e.g. integrated circuits), terminal strips or PCB tracks). 2. Switch off the power supply before assembling or dismantling electronic assemblies (modules, electronic cards etc.). 3. To prevent static discharge, always place dismantled components and electronic cards on a conductive foam surface or in antistatic plastic bags. 4. Do not leave electronic cards with back-up batteries on conductive-foam surfaces for long periods (no more than a few hours) as the batteries may discharge. If they are to be stored for a longer period, the batteries must be deactivated or removed. 5. Always wear an earthed wrist-wrap with a built-in safety resistor when replacing removable integrated circuits. Makeshift wrist-wraps must not be used. Failure to use the correct safety resistance can put the user at risk or render the wrist-wrap useless.
System documentation
The following documentation serves both as a guide for commissioning and as a basis for testing: Electrical wiring diagram of the system Schematic showing electrical distribution System description This documentation must be available before any work is undertaken.
Prerequisites for commissioning

The following conditions must be fulfilled prior to commissioning: The final installation check must be complete Any non-Staefa monitoring and safety equipment (e.g. overcurrent trips on contactors, pressure switches, differential pressure switches etc.) must have been checked by the Supplier.
K21-12.20
1/2 en - 97 - 01
Control panel commissioning

Procedure
Control panel commissioning is carried out in the following stages: Carry out a visual inspection of the control panels Perform an electrical check of the bus connections in the card rack Check the control panel input terminals for interference voltages Check that the RS controllers are fitted with EPROMs Connect the ribbon cables The commissioning team may comprise two commissioning engineers or one commissioning engineer and an assistant. The control panels are normally delivered without printed circuit boards; these are installed by the commissioning engineer as part of the commissioning procedure.
Preparatory work
The following preparations are required before the actual process of commissioning can start: Switch all power supply switches to OFF: Master switch in the control panel The switches of all equipment in the control panel, circuit breakers, test switches isolates Where electronic cards are installed: remove all electronic cards from the card rack and store in anti-static plastic bags.
Checks
The following checks form an essential part of the commissioning procedure: Carry out a visual inspection of the control panels and equipment: Are all peripheral devices mounted and connected? Are all the wires and cables connected inside the control panel and to the peripheral devices? Check the control panel input terminals for interference voltages. Interference voltages are checked with an AC-range voltmeter, by measuring the voltage at each input terminal in the control panel with respect to earth. Check the continuity of the bus connections in the control panel.
Control and interlock system

Before fitting the INTEGRAL AS1000 system with the necessary RS cards and terminal modules, the following points should be checked in addition to those described above: Mounting and layout of RSM, RSC and RSA controllers, operator terminals, adapters and terminal module carriers Routing and connection of the ribbon cables Labelling of the system components (RS cards, ribbon cables, terminal modules etc.) Terminal module wiring Bus cable connections (and screening) Neatness of card housings (wire ends etc.) When assembling the terminal modules, the associated parts of the system must be disabled by removing the fuses or switching off.
Caution Always switch off the power supply before inserting or removing terminal modules!
INTEGRAL AS1000 Commissioning 3rd party equipment
K21-12.20
2/2 en - 97 - 01
This manual does not provide information on 3rd party equipment. It is, nevertheless, the responsibility of the Landis & Staefa commissioning engineer to check any 3rd party equipment connected to the system. These checks should be carried out in cooperation with the Supplier's commissioning engineer. Refer to the Supplier's documentation for detailed information.
K21-12.30
1/2 en - 97 - 01
Performance testing
Prerequisites
The control panels must be in operation before equipment testing can take place.
Procedure
The purpose of equipment testing is to prove that all the functions operate correctly and in accordance with the electrical diagrams, so that any errors are identified and eliminated.
3rd party equipment Except where covered by a written instruction to the contrary, the performance testing does not include any 3rd party equipment connected to the system.
Important: In the course of testing, the following points are of special importance: Ensure that the peripheral devices are mounted in the correct locations (do not confuse the connecting cables) Check that the direction of rotation of motors is correct Check the plausibility of sensor readings and measured values from signal transmitters by random sampling.
Checks: Check that all equipment is present Check the functions of all equipment, from the terminal module to the interface with 3rd party equipment The commissioning of parts of the system supplied by third parties (refrigeration systems etc.) must be carried out only with the support of the relevant Supplier. Set data point addresses of measured-value transmitters and check the measured values transmitted The commissioning of the equipment comprises the following: A visual check of the equipment (if not checked when commissioning the control panel) Check the functioning of the equipment as follows: Peripheral devices (e.g. contactors, motors, actuators, relays and indicators) Sensors, sensing elements, test contacts, signal contacts and switches Terminal modules (ON, AUTO, OFF) Hard-wired interlock circuits (override switches, test switches and conventional interlocks) Debugging: correct any defects and errors found.
Results of performance testing

At the conclusion of the performance testing procedure, the following lists must be available with information on correct functioning: All peripheral devices: Check-list showing that all devices are present Wiring / cabling schedule Power supply schedule All RS modules: Data point schedule including data point functions
Preparatory work
Prior to the actual commissioning process, the following preparatory steps must be carried out:
Caution: Switching the power supply on may cause external sections of the system to be momentarily activated via the RS modules.
Switch on the system power supply: Control panel master switch Control fuses Switch on the circuit breakers for the terminal module carriers
K21-12.30
2/2 en - 97 - 01
Performance testing from terminal modules to interface

Procedure
Important Note the status of external interlocks (e.g. override and test switches).
Caution Contacts can be operated inadvertently through intervention with tools. This can affect calibration and cause damage or unexpected operation of machinery.
This test is designed to ensure that the wiring from the terminal modules to the interface / signal transmitter / actuator is correct and fully functional: Digital output channels: Set output terminal modules with manual switches first to logic 1 and then to logic 0 Check the functioning of the associated peripheral device Analogue output channels: Set output terminal modules with manual switches first to 0% and then to 100%. Check the functioning of the associated peripheral device Digital input channels: Set external signal transmitters first to logic 1 and then to logic 0 Check that the LED on the terminal module responds Analogue input channels: Modify the status variable (measured variable) on the signal transmitter. Use a suitable measuring instrument (e.g. voltmeter) to check the modifications. When these tests are complete, remove any temporary connections and reconnect any disconnect wires.
Checking the signal transmitters

HVAC systems can incorporate a large number of signal transmitters (e.g. sensors). In order to test their functioning (a process referred to as "positive identification"), their states are modified, and the change in signal is observed on a measuring instrument. The state of a signal transmitter can be modified as follows: To modify the state of a temperature sensor: Spray with coolant Immerse in iced water Warm with hot air dryer To modify the state of a differential pressure sensor: Remove the connection tube
Caution To avoid the risk of their being reconnected incorrectly after testing, wires should be disconnected only in exceptional circumstances.
For sensors which are not directly accessible, or in cases where there is no suitable way of simulating a change of state, a resistor can be connected in parallel to the sensing element in the terminal box, or a sensor wire can be disconnected. The apparent change in resistance will then be shown on the measuring instrument.
K21-12.40
1/1 en - 97 - 01
Commissioning the control and interlock system

Prerequisites
Before the INTEGRAL AS1000 system can be commissioned, the following requirements must be satisfied: The control panels must be ready for operation Plant such as main heating plant, air conditioning systems etc. must be fully functional All equipment testing must be complete The SAPIM structures for the RS modules msut have been tested and valid structure diagrams must be available Valid system documentation must be available, comprising the following: System configuration Function descriptions of the installations Hydraulic diagrams Adjustment diagrams and control sequences Electrical diagrams Cable schedules Commissioning report
Important If the system incorporates a PRONTO IRC individual room control system, this must be commissioned before the AS1000 system, in cooperation with the HVAC installer and the VAV manufacturer (see the PRONTO IRC technical manual, P51). Communication between the INTEGRAL AS1000 and PRONTO IRC systems cannote be established until the individual room controllers have been initialised.
Procedure
The aim of the commissioning is to ensure that the control and interlock system is capable of functioning as an autonomous system, and comprises the following stages: Switch off all parts of the system affected by commissioning (switch off the plant switch and terminal modules, remove fuses and place warning notices where appropriate indicating the commissioning work is in progress) Insert the RS printed circuit boards and check that the correct EPROMs have been fitted Check the EPROM version of the NBRN-.. operator terminal and of any NITEL commissioning module (NIBB emulation) used for commissioning Label the equipment where this has not been done Set the RS bus address and baud rate Connect the ribbon cables for the bus connections and terminal module carriers Use the NBRN-.. or a PC (with the INTEGRAL DIALOG service software) to check the devices connected to the RS bus Doownload the structures to the RS modules from the service PC Check the digital and analogue inputs and outputs Commission individual systems, adjusting control loops and programming any local time programmes etc. Test any inter-controller functions Upload the optimised setpoints and parameters onto the SAPIM or staefa plan project diskette Optimise the program, if appropirate, and document any modifications Update the documentation and, where applicable, make this available for the engineering and commissioning of a higher level (management) system.
EPROM versions Current EPROM versions are listed in the Firmware Overview.
K21-12.40
2/1 en - 97 - 01
K21-12.50
1/3 en - 97 - 01
Commissioning the NITEL.. for INTEGRAL DIALOG1)

1)
Note The NRK14-T../A or NRK16-T../A may also be used for the interface for INTEGRAL DIALOG. These must, however, be initialised using TS1500 or MS1000 software (see K21-04).
Prerequisites
To enable it to be used for operation with the INTEGRAL DIALOG service software, the NITEL.. must first be initialised.
Procedure
PC to COM1 After connecting the PC to COM1 of the NITEL.. via a standard null modem cable (see pin layout below), use a terminal program (such as Procomm Plus) to establish communication, and enter a password and a unique eightfigure identification number. The main menu will appear.
Use of modems If a modem is used, the interface must be defined under item 7 of the main menu.
Ensure that the baud rate of COM2 matches that of INTEGRAL DIALOG, by changing it if necessary (Menu 7 Interface). The NITEL.. is now initialised and the communication program can be closed. PC to COM2 Reconnect the null modem cable to COM2 of the NITEL.. . In order to set the password for access from INTEGRAL DIALOG to the NITEL.., switch to of DIP switch S2 on the printed circuit board must be set to 0 (see K21-07.30, page 5). The INTEGRAL DIALOG software can now be run.
Status LED The status LED will flash, because for the INTEGRAL DIALOG application (in contrast to the RC1500 application) the NITEL.. does not need to be loaded with an Infolist.
When 'SERVICE' appears in the display, press <Enter> to log on, and select the menu Edit password to define a new user and user password. After completing these inputs, remember to reset switch 2 of DIP switch 2! See manual NT21 for details of commissioning the NITEL.. with RC1500.
Null modem cable

Pin connections 9/9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
s s s s s s s s
__ CD ____________ << ___________ DTR _______ __ RxD ___________ << ____________ TxD _______ __ TxD ___________ >> ____________ RxD _______ __ DTR ___________ >> ____________ CD _______ __ GND _________________________ GND _______ __ DSR __________________________ DSR _______ __ RTS ___________ >> ____________ CTS _______ __ CTS ___________ << ____________ RTS _______
s s s s s s s s
4 3 2 1 5 6 8 7
Pin connections 9/25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

s s s s s s s s
__ CD ____________ << ___________ DTR _______ __ RxD ___________ << ____________ TxD _______ __ TxD ___________ >> ____________ RxD _______ __ DTR ___________ >> ____________ CD _______ __ GND _________________________ GND _______ __ DSR __________________________ DSR _______ __ RTS ___________ >> ____________ CTS _______ __ CTS ___________ << ____________ RTS _______
s s s s s s s s
20 2 3 8 7 6 5 4
INTEGRAL AS1000 Commissioning Operation from a PC with INTEGRAL DIALOG
K21-12.50
2/3 en - 97 - 01
NIBB interface The NIBB interface is the predecessor of the NITEL.. for PC operation with INTEGRAL DIALOG.
The NITEL.. incorporates a feature which allows direct access to the INTEGRAL RS and PRONTO IRC data points using the service software, INTEGRAL DIALOG, V3.4. The functions are the same as those of the NIBB interface, and are based on Version 2.4. The NITEL.. thus combines the functions of two devices (NIBB and NITEL..) in a single module. Significantly, this enables even data points which cannot be included in the Infolist to be operated from the management station.
Configuring the INTEGRAL DIALOG service software The table below shows only the main settings required to ensure successful operation with INTEGRAL DIALOG:
Password Operating level Interface Baud rate Update time Degrees Centigrade/Fahrenheit Reporting function Switch box (Display only, entry in password menu) 1, 2 or 3 IBM/COM1/RS23Z/Full duplex or modem/COM1 (or COM2) 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 baud 10 seconds C or F ON or OFF ON or OFF
NITEL.. settings RS232 port: INTEGRAL DIALOG can be connected either directly (by null modem cable) or by modem to COM2 of the NITEL.. . The inputs required for this purpose are similar to those used for RC1500 connections in the NITEL.. Interface menu. The NITEL.. automatically recognises INTEGRAL DIALOG and uses the appropriate protocol. The COM1 port cannot be used if INTEGRAL DIALOG is in use. If the caller hangs up or if no communication takes place for approximately four minutes, the NITEL.. re-enables COM1 and COM2. RS bus address: Any address between 17 and 32 can be set up with the Addr RS bus switch. However, it is important to ensure that the programmed address does not conflict with an existing address when the NITEL.. is connected to the RS bus. Password entry: INTEGRAL DIALOG allows the user to enter up to twenty user IDs with password and operating levels. These can be programmed on site only, and require Switch 2 of DIP switch S2 in the NITEL.. to be set to OPEN. These passwords are independent of the three password levels used in the NITEL.. with RC1500 or in terminal mode. To prevent unauthorised access with INTEGRAL DIALOG when no passwords have been defined, the NITEL.. has a default password for operating level 1. Since access is restricted to a minimum at this level, the risks are relatively small even if the password gets into the wrong hands. The other operating levels are only accessible after Switch 2 of DIP switch S2 has been set to OPEN and further passwords have been defined (as above). The following default settings for INTEGRAL DIALOG allow access to operating level 1:
User ID Operating level Password SCS 1 SCS
Access protection To deter unauthorised access to the plant, a password for INTEGRAL DIALOG must be entered when the NITEL.. is commissioned.
Important NITEL passwords defined in INTEGRAL DIALOG will only remain permanently in the memory of the NITEL.. provided that the NITEL.. has been initialised (ID and telephone number must be defined). Otherwise they will be lost in the event of a power failure.

Notes on operation
K21-12.50
3/3 en - 97 - 01
NIBB identification: When communication is established, INTEGRAL DIALOG makes an inventory of the connected NIBB (NITEL..) modules. In the case of NIBB emulation in the NITEL.., of course, the NITEL.. will find only one NIBB, since this is a point-to-point connection. The NIBB will normally be identified a few seconds after the message "Reading all NIBBs", and its COM21 address and name will be displayed. Occasionally, the message "No NIBB provided" will appear. There may then be a delay of up to four minutes before the next inventory. For the fastest possible processing time, therefore, the Addr. COM1 programming switch should always be set to 16, to achieve the fastest possible response time. Module identification: The NIBB emulation keeps a continuous record of the connected modules. Normally, therefore, these are displayed shortly after selection of the NIBB. Here too, there are some circumstances in which no modules, or not all those expected, will be displayed immediately. a) In stand-by mode (with INTEGRAL DIALOG not active), the inventory is updated approximately every minute. A recently connected module will therefore not be identified immediately. b) The inventory cannot be made during or immediately after an Infolist download. The delay depends on the length of the Infolist and may be as long as eight minutes, during which time INTEGRAL DIALOG displays the message "No modules provided".
K21-13
Accessories
INTEGRAL AS1000 Accessories
K21-13.01
1/1 en - 97 - 01
Contents
Z part numbers Z237 13.10
NBRN RS module service cable ................................................... 1
Z257 / 259 Cables for PC RS module connection via RS232 ....................... 2 Z273 - 275 T1 sensor simulators ...................................................................... 3 Z276 Simulators for active sensors ........................................................ 4
Z277 / 278 Voltmeters ..................................................................................... 5 Z332 Z347 Z392 Z398 Z399 Z400 Z402 Z404 Z405 Z406 T1 signal adjuster unit ................................................................... 6 Adapter for NTIM RS module GND conductor .......................... 7 Adhesive labels for NSA ................................................................ 8 Adhesive labels for NRK16-B/A ..................................................... 8 Connecting cable for two or more NRK../A ................................. 9 Wall mounting accessories for NBRN ........................................... 9 NRK16-B/A front-mounting kit ................................................... 10 NBE mounting clip ....................................................................... 11 Adhesive labels for NBE .............................................................. 11 NBRN NBE adapter ................................................................... 11
K21-13.01
2/1 en - 97 - 01
K21-13.10
1/11 en - 97 - 01
Z237
NBRN RS controller service cable
Z237
Technical data
Cable: Type Length Connectors Round / black, 6 x 0.5 mm2, unscreened 2m 10-pin ribbon cable connectors
Brief description
The Z237 service cable is fitted with a 10-pin ribbon cable connector at both ends (NBRN and RS controller). At the RS controller end, the cable can be connected to the service socket of an RS controller (or an appropriate RS bus adapter). The cable is also used for the connection between the NIPRO and the NAPC.
Pin connections
93.00478
2 4 6 8 10
1 3 5 7 9
2 4 6 8 10
1 3 5 7 9
Pin 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pin 10'
1 2 NC NC 5 6 NC NC 9 10
K21-13.10
2/11 en - 97 - 01
Z257 Z259
Cables connecting PC RS controller via RS232 for download to RS controllers
Z257
Z259
Types
Z257 Z259 PC-connector: 25-pin port connector PC-connector: 9-pin port connector
Technical data
Cable: Type Length Connectors: PC-end RS-end Round / black, 6 x 0.5 mm2, unscreened 3m See Types above 10-pin ribbon cable connector
Brief description
At the PC end, the Z257 has a 25-pin port connector and the Z259 a 9-pin port connector. The other end of either of these cables can be connected via the 10-pin ribbon cable connector to the service socket of the RS controller.
Pin connections
Z257 (with 25-pin PC connector)
93.00479
Z259 (with 9-pin PC connector)
93.00480
1 2 3 4 2 4 6 8 10 1 3 5 7 9 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
2 4 6 8 10
1 3 5 7 9
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
Pin 10 RS controller
8 7 3 4
Pin 25' PC
2 3 7 7 4 / 5 wire link 8 / 20 wire link
Pin 10
8 7 3 4
Pin 9
3 2 5 5
K21-13.10
3/11 en - 97 - 01
Z273 Z274 Z275

T1 sensor simulators
The T1 simulators can be used in place of NKDG, NKDW and NKIT terminal modules.
Z274
Types
Z273 Z274 Z275 T1 measuring range T1 measuring range 0 ... 40 C 0 ... 150 C T1 measuring range 45 ... 45 C
Technical data
Measuring ranges Accuracy Dimensions (w x h x d) Weight Ambient temperatures: Operation Transport and storage See Types above 5 % of measuring range 24 x 68 x 64 mm Approx. 60 g 0 ... 50 C 25 ... 70 C
93.00482
30 -30 20 40 -40
-10 0 -20
10
-45 +45 C
Brief description
The Z273, Z274 and Z275 simulators are passive like T1 sensors and may be slotted into the terminal module carriers in place of the relevant terminal modules (NKDG, NKDW or NKIT). By setting the manual switch appropriately, either the simulator (switch position: INTERN) or the installed sensor (switch position: EXTERN) can be connected to the RS controller. With the manual switch set to INTERN, the potentiometer can be used to select any value within the measuring range.
EXTERN INTERN
Rotary knob: Potentiometer Manual switch settings: EXTERN INTERN NK.. function Simulation
Z 274
Block diagram
93.00483
5
A (9) B (10) C (12)

93.00481
D E (13)
int ext
int ext
SNGD
F (14)
Signal
T1
1 SGND 2 + Signal 3 4
Interchangeable wires
1 ... 4 Terminals A ... F Connection to terminal module carrier
K21-13.10
4/11 en - 97 - 01
Z276
Simulator for active sensors
The simulator can be used in place of the NKDG terminal module.
Caution To a limited extent, the Z276 can be used in place of an NKIA or NKIAU terminal module, but must be set to INTERN only. Under no cirumstances should the switch be set to EXTERN owing to the risk of damage caused by ground loops.
Z276
Technical data
Supply voltage Measuring range Accuracy Dimensions (w x h x d) Weight Ambient temperatures: Operation Transport and storage DC 15 V (10 mA intrinsic consumption) DC 0 ... 10 V: 0 ... 100 % 5 % of measuring range 24 x 68 x 64 mm Approx. 60 g 0 ... 50 C 25 ... 70 C
93.00485
80 70 90 100
40 50 60
Brief description
The Z276 simulator behaves like an active sensor and can be slotted into the terminal module carrier in place of the NKDG terminal module. By setting the manual switch appropriately, either the simulator (switch position: INTERN) or the installed sensor (switch position: EXTERN) can be connected to the RS module. With the manual switch set to INTERN, the potentiometer can be used to select any value within the measuring range.
30
20
10
EXTERN INTERN
Z 276
0-100 %
Block diagram
Rotary knob: Potentiometer
A (9) 93.00486
Manual switch positions: EXTERN INTERN NK..-function Simulation

+ 15 VDC
B (10) C (12) D E (13)
int ext
int ext
SNGD
F (14)
+ Signal
1 ... 4 Connection terminals A ... F Connection to terminal module carrier
Terminal layout on terminal module carrier

93.00484
0 ...10 VDC +
1 SGND 2 + Signal 3 + 15 VDC 4
K21-13.10
5/11 en - 97 - 01
Z277 Z278
Voltmeters
The Z277 voltmeter is suitable for use with terminal module types NKDG, NKDW, NKIA and NKIAU; the Z278 is used with NKOA, NKOAH, NKOAL and NKOALH terminal modules.
Z277
Types
Z277 Z278 Measuring range DC 0 ... 10 V Measuring range DC 0 ... 20 V phase cut
Technical data
Accuracy Dimensions (w x h x d) Weight Ambient temperature: Operation Transport and storage 10 % of measuring range 24 x 60 x 68 mm Approx. 60 g 0 ... 50 C 25 ... 70 C
Brief description
The Z277 and Z278 voltmeters can be plugged into the relevant terminals of the terminal module carriers to measure direct voltages. The terminal modules do not need to be removed for this purpose.
Block diagram
93.00487
V 2
+ 3 4
1 ... 4
Input terminals
K21-13.10
6/11 en - 97 - 01
Z332
T1 signal adjuster unit for INTEGRAL RSA and INTEGRAL RSC controllers
Z332
Technical data
Adustment range Dimensions Weight Ambient temperature: Operation Transport and storage 2.5 K 13 x 30 x 16 mm Approx. 30 g 0 ... 50 C 25 ... 70 C
Note The adjuster unit must not be used with an adjustable T1 measuring circuit (e.g. with the NKIT terminal module) as this can result in measuring errors.
Brief description
The Z332 adjuster unit consists of a passive network and can be connected into a T1 measuring circuit. It can be used to adjust the T1 signal by 2.5 K.
Block diagram
93.00493
1 T1 IN 2
3 + OUT 4 Z332
Control device
Interchangeable wires
K21-13.10
7/11 en - 97 - 01
Z347
Adapter for NTIM RS controller GND conductor
Z347
Technical data
GND conductor: Type Black, multiple-stranded conductor 1 x 1.5 mm2, with ribbon cable socket and multi-pin socket 2 mm 2.2 m
Length
Brief description
The Z347 adapter is used to extend the GND conductor from the NTIM terminal module carrier to the RS controller. This reduces signal distortions (especially in T1 measuring circuits). The kit comprises a 10-pin ribbon-cable adapter and a cable. The adapter is connected between the RS module and the terminal module carrier and the ribbon cable is connected to it. The other end of the cable is plugged into the terminal module carrier ('GND', 2 mm socket).
Wiring recommendation
The GND conductor should either be routed parallel to the ribbon cable or wound around it (see also mounting instructions). Option 1
93.00491
Option 2
93.00492
NRU..
NTIM
GND
NRU..
NTIM
GND
K21-13.10
8/11 en - 97 - 01
Z392
Adhesive labels for NSA
Z392 is an A4 sheet of 190 white adhesive labels. Each label is the same size as the labelling spaces on the front of the application module. (Each module thus has space for two 6 x 38 mm labels). The paper is suitable for laser jet printing but is not perforated for tractortype feeders.
Z398
Adhesive labels for NRK16-B/A
Z398 comprises ten A5 sheets, each with one adhesive label. The labels are the same size as the operator panel of the NRK-16B/A controller (180 x 260 mm). In additional to the standard labelling spaces, nine fields are provided for alarms. The labels are of the same colour as the device itself. The paper is suitable for use with a laser-jet printer. The INTEGRAL PLAN software includes a macro for labelling.
93.00360 Input Remote Control
K21-13.10
9/11 en - 97 - 01
Z399
Connecting cable for two or more NRK16(-..)
X2 X1 X3
Z399
Technical data
Cable: Type Length Connectors Ribbon cable / grey, 10 x 0.5 mm2 0.5 m Ribbon-cable connectors, 10-pin
Brief description
The Z399 has a 10-pin ribbon-cable connector at each side (X1/X2), suitable for plugging into the service sockets of NRK16(-..) controllers. Between these, a third connector (X3) is available for connection to a further bus cable or an NBRN-.. operator terminal.
Pin connections
Note Although this is a 10-pole cable, not all conductors are point to point (e.g. the supply voltage). All the conductors from the nearest module are connected to the second connector X2.
2 4 6 8 10 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10
93.00494
1 3 5 7 9
X1 Pin 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X2 Pin 10'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X3 Pin 10''
NC NC NC NC 5 6 NC NC NC 10
Z400
Wall-mounting accessories for NBRN..
The Z400 comprises four mounting accessories which can be screwed onto any flat surface. The NBRN.. operator terminals can snap-mounted onto these.
K21-13.10
10/11 en - 97 - 01
Z402
Front-mounting kit for NRK16-B/A
Z402
Technical data
Protection class This must be defined for the system as a whole and is not affected by installing an NRK16-B/A with a front-mounting kit. This is defined by the control panel, but is max. IP41 with the front-mounting kit. The protection standard also depends on the thickness of the front plate. If this is more than 2.5 mm, there will be a larger space between the control panel front and the NRK16-B/A, so reducing the protection standard to IP30. See below
Protection standard
Dimensions
Brief description
The front-mounting kit consists of two fixing brackets, a front plate and 12 fixing screws, and facilitates the mounting of an NRK16-B/A controller in the front of a control panel, for example. The installed controller can be operated from outside the control panel, but the application module can only be removed with a tool, i.e. the controller itself must be removed. The front mounting kit does not affect the protection standard and protection class of the NRK16-B/A. A drilling/cutting template is enclosed with the mounting kit for the aperture and holes. See K21-10 for detailed mounting instructions and drilling diagram.
Dimensions [mm]
180 125
93.00495
155
87,5
243
260
K21-13.10
11/11 en - 97 - 01
Z404
Mounting clip for NBE
Use of the Z404 is the easiest way of mounting the NBE in a control panel front (see K21-10).
Z404
Z405
Labels for NBE
Z405 comprises ten A4 sheets each with ten separate labels of the same size as the labelling area on the front of the NBE (38 x 136 mm). These labels are required when the remote operator terminal is operated with parameters and setpoints other than those of the standard configuration.
93.00253
Z405
Z406
NBRN NBE adapter
Z406
Technical data
Cable: Type Length Connector Ribbon cable / grey, 10 x 0.5 mm2 0.5 m Ribbon cable connections, 10-pin
Brief description
The Z406 is used to connect an NBRN.. oprator terminal directly to the NBE remote operator terminal for the purpose of adjusting parameters.

Integral As1000

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Integral As1000

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

HOME

NRK16/A, NRK16-B/A, and NRK9/A / application controllers / NSA application module

Operation and service

SAPIM basic functions

Installation instructions EMC / Cable routing

Electronmagnetic compatibility (EMC) Principles and control panel guidelines

Installation instructions Mounting

Installation instructions AS1000 conneciton

Members of the Electrowatt Group

INTEGRAL AS1000 Safety and conditions of use

General safety notes

Risks associated with handling the products

Use for the purpose intended

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL AS1000 Safety and conditions of use Maintenance

Guarantee and liability

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL AS1000 Safety and conditions of use

About this manual

User manual NBRN.. operator terminals User manual INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL AS1000 Safety and conditions of use Layout

Data sheet numbering

K21-05.10 K... series of documents, Manual 21, Section 05, Sheet 10

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction / Description of operation

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL AS1000 K21 alphabetical product index

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL AS1000 K21 alphabetical product index

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction

Brief system description

System coordination and communication

INTEGRAL RS control and interlock

PRONTO IRC individual room control

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction System configuration

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction INTEGRAL RSM

Terminal module carrier with terminal modules

NT.. with NK.. See K21-02 for RSM specifications

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction INTEGRAL RSC

NRUE/A See K21-03 for RSC specifications.

NRK16/A See K21-04 for RSA specifications.

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction Options for local operation via RS bus

Technical specifications, see K21-05.12 (NBRNA-..) and K21-05.10 (NBRN-..).

Options for centralised operation

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL RS-SERVICE, INTEGRAL DIALOG

NITEL NTOMS NTOMS

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction

NARB/A NRK16/A NIPRO

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL AS1000 Introduction Engineering and commissioning

Subject to technical alteration

INTEGRAL AS1000 Operation of the RS controllers

Principle of operation of the RS controller

INPUT BUFFER IMB RAM

y = f(x, w, Xp,) y = f(x, w, Xp,)